32
Quick Start Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block

Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    6

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

Quick Start

Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block

Important User Information

Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (publication SGI-11 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom) describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable

In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams

No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual

Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited

Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations

Allen-Bradley MicroLogix PanelView PanelView Component PowerFlex SMC SMC-3 TechConnect and Rockwell Automation are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc

Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies

WARNINGIdentifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss

IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product

ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequence

SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present

BURN HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures

Where to Start

Follow the path below for simple starting controlling and monitoring motors

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Connected Components Building Blocks publication

CC-QS001

3Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 3

Where to Start

Notes

4 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Table of Contents

PrefaceIntroduction 7Conventions Used in This Manual 8Additional Resources 9

Chapter 1Simple Motor Control Integration Introduction 11

Before You Begin 11What You Need 12Follow These Steps 12Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive 13Set up the SMC-3 Controller 16

Chapter 2System Validation and Application Tips

Introduction 19Before You Begin 19What You Need 20Follow These Steps 20Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer 21Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller

Communication 22Navigating the Starters Overview Page 24

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality 25Navigating the Simple Starting Screen 25Understanding Faults 28Test the SMC-3 Controller 29Testing Other Drives and Starters 30

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 5

Table of Contents

Notes

6 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Preface

Introduction This Quick Start is designed to provide a way to implement a connected component for simple motor control By using discrete information (simple on-off signals from contacts) from a PowerFlex 4M drive SMC-3 starter 103T starter or 190E starter this building block shows an example of extracting important basic information about the status of a motor and displaying it on a PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Any or all of these starters or drives can be used The PowerFlex 4M drive is used for this building block but the procedure is very similar for the PowerFlex 4 40 40P and 400 drives

To assist in the design and installation of your system application files and other information are provided on the Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001 The CD provides bills of materials (BOM) CAD drawings for panel layout and wiring control programs Human Machine Interface (HMI) screens and more With these tools and the built-in best-practices design the system designer is free to focus on the design of their machine control and not on design overhead tasks

The beginning of each chapter contains the following information Read these sections carefully before beginning work in each chapter

bull Before You Begin - This section lists the steps that must be completed and decisions that must be made before starting that chapter The chapters in this quick start do not have to be completed in the order in which they appear but this section defines the minimum amount of preparation required before completing the current chapter

bull What You Need - This section lists the tools that are required to complete the steps in the current chapter This includes but is not limited to hardware and software

bull Follow These Steps - This illustrates the steps in the current chapter and identifies which steps are required to complete the examples

IMPORTANT Use this Connected Components Building Block Quick Start in conjunction with the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001

Refer to Additional Resources on page 9 for a listing of Quick Start documents

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 7

Preface

Conventions Used in This Manual

This manual uses the following conventions

Convention Meaning Example

Click Click the left mouse button once Click Edit

Type What you type on the keyboard Type the IP address

Right-click Click the right mouse button once while the cursor is positioned on object or selection Right-click the 1768 Bus icon

Select Using the mouse to highlight a specific option Select the application name

Press Pressing a specific key on the keyboard or the PowerFlex 4M keypad Press Enter

Touch Touching a specific button on the PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Touch the Start button

8 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Preface

Additional Resources

Resource Description

Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001

Provides information on how to select products and gain access to panel and wiring information

Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

Provides files for the Connected Component Building Blocks

Bulletin 150 SMC-3 (1-37A)SMC-Delta (1-32A) Soft Starter Connecting Modules 41053-173-01 (1)

Provides information on the connecting modules with the SMC-3

Bulletin 150 SMC-3 Soft Starter (3-37A) 41053-167-01 (5)

Provides information on installation and settings of the SMC-3

Bulletin 193 E1 Plus Overload Relay 41053-358-01 (3)

Provides information on the installation and settings of the overload

Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Motor Circuit Protectors 21-301-951-01

Provides installation instructions for the MPCB and the MCP

Position Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start publication CC-QS003

Provides information on installing and setting up the PowerFlex 40P drive parameters with the pre-configured RSLogix 500 program that controls your base system including application tips as well as implementing the drive parameter backup and restore functionality

MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers User Manual publication 1763-UM001

Provides information on using the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controller

MicroLogix 1400 User Manual publication 1766-UM001

Provides information on using the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controller

PanelView Component Quick Start Manual publication 2711C-QS001A

Provides information on using the PanelView component

PanelView Component Operator Terminals User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

Provides information on using the PanelView Component HMI Terminals

PowerFlex 4M User Manual publication 22F-UM001

Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 4M Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 4 User Manual publication 22A-UM001 Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 4 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 40P User Manual publication 22D-UM001

Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 40P Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 400 User Manual publication 22C-UM001

Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 400 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

httpwwwabcomdrivesdriveexplorer Provides access to DriveExplorerLite software

httpwwwabcom Provides access to the Allen-Bradley website

httprockwellautomationcomknowledgebase Provides access to self-service support

httpwwwrockwellautomationcomcomponentsconnected

Provides access to the Connected Components website

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 9

Preface

Notes

10 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Chapter 1

Simple Motor Control Integration

Introduction

This chapter provides instructions to configure the PowerFlex 4M drive and SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller

You will configure two parameters in the PowerFlex 4M drive These are the basic parameters that need to be changed from the factory default settings in order to establish proper feedback to the MicroLogix controllers For your machine application there may be other drive parameters that need to be adjusted Consult your drive documentation for information on other drive parameters

You will also set the DIP switches on the SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller necessary to send appropriate discrete feedback to the MicroLogix controller

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed hardware design and installation recommendations as well as software installation

bull Apply power to your drive

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 11

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull One or more of these drives or startersndash PowerFlex 4-class drive (PowerFlex 4M drive is used in this document)

bull For PowerFlex 4M 4 40 and 400 drives there is a built-in keypad and display to edit parameters

bull For PowerFlex 40P drive to edit parameters you need either

- A hand-held interface catalog number 22-HIM-A3

or

- DriveExplorer software installed on the personal computer and a USB interface catalog number 1203-USB

ndash SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBRndash 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TEndash 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to configure the parameters in the drives and set the DIP switches on the SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller

Start

Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive page 13

Set up the SMC-3 Controller page 16

12 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive

Factory-default parameter values allow the drive to be controlled from the integral keypad No programming is required to start stop change direction and control speed directly from the integral keypad

However for this building block you will set parameter P106 [Start Source] for 2-wire control In the example for this building block the PF 4M drive is used in a 2-wire SRC Control (internal sourcing) Non-Reversing mode SRC is the default for a new drive If your drive has been used previously make sure the SNKSRC (SinkSource) switch under the front cover of the PF 4M drive is set to SRC See the PF 4M drive user manual for your specific needs other than shown in this example

In addition you will change parameter t221 [Relay Out Sel] to display lsquoMotorRunningrsquo since this building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive See Testing Other Drives and Starters page 30 for details

Follow this procedure to change parameters P106 [Start Source] and t221 [Relay Out Sel] using the PowerFlex 4M keypad explained below

PowerFlex 4M Keypad

Key Key Name Description

Escapebull Go back one step in Program mode

bull Cancel a change to a parameter value and exit Program mode

Selectbull Advance one step in the programming menu

bull Select a digit when viewing a parameter value

Up arrowbull Scroll through groups and parameters

bull Increase and decrease the value of a flashing digit

Down arrow

Enterbull Advance one step in the programming menu

bull Save a change to a parameter value

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 13

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

1 Press Esc until lsquo00rsquo is displayed

2 Press Sel until the leftmost character is flashing

3 Press the Down arrow until the leftmost character displayed is a flashing P

4 Press Enter

The P stops flashing and the rightmost numeric key is flashing

By default the first P parameter P101 is displayed Pressing the Up arrow increases and pressing the Down arrow decreases the value of the P parameters

5 Press the Up arrow five times to display P106

The current value of parameter P106 is displayed lsquo0rsquo in this case

6 Press Enter

The lsquo0rsquo flashes

7 Press the Up arrow twice to adjust the value to lsquo2rsquo

8 Press Enter

The value is accepted

The lsquo2rsquo should not be flashing any longer Notice that the green status indicator next to the green Start button is now off

9 Press Esc

P106 should be displayed with the lsquo6rsquo flashing

10Press Esc until the P is flashing on the leftmost alphanumeric character

11Press the Up arrow or Down arrow to scroll through the group menu to t

12Press Enter

The lsquo1rsquo flashes

Stop the drive before changing parameter P106

14 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

13Press and hold down the up arrow until you reach lsquo221rsquo

If you go past it push the down arrow until you return to lsquo221rsquo

14Press Enter twice so that lsquo0rsquo is flashing

15Press the up arrow to move to the value lsquo2rsquo

16Press Enter

The value is accepted The lsquo2rsquo should not be flashing any longer Notice that the green status indicator next to the green Start button is now off

17Press Esc

Parameter t221 should now be displayed with the lsquo1rsquo flashing

18Press Esc until lsquo00rsquo is displayed

19Power the drive off until the display goes blank and then power it back on

Your drive is now configured to be controlled by push buttons and communication commands initiated from the MicroLogix controller

As with all building blocks these are examples of getting information back discretely from a product You can change parameter t221 or other settings of the starters and drives to suit your application

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 15

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

Set up the SMC-3 Controller

The SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller needs to be set up for the isolation contactor and for the appropriate settings for the motor Below are the DIP switch settings used by the SMC-3 controller and the steps to change them

TIP The 140M MPCB specified in the BOM for this building block has a trip class of 10 However if you would like to use the overload trip class settings on the SMC-3 controller you can change out the 140M MPCB with the 140M MCP

16 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

1 Set the DIP switch settings to the starting needs of your motor using the chart below

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 17

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

2 Be sure that DIP switch 14 is set to Normal (off)

This will bring in the isolation contactor when the SMC-3 has received the input signal DIP switch 14 will also close the side-mounted NO aux contact when the starter comes up to speed The closure of this aux contact will send the signal back to the MicroLogix controller

3 If changing to an MCP set DIP switches 11 and 12 to the appropriate overload trip class

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

IMPORTANT The 103T starter uses a 140M MCP (Motor Circuit Protector) which uses a separate overload E1 Plus which must be set according to your system needs

The 190E starter the SMC-3 starter and the PF 4M drive must have the overload dial set on the 140M MPCB (Motor Protection Circuit Breakers)

18 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Chapter 2

System Validation and Application Tips

Introduction

In this chapter you validate that communication is occurring as intended between the MicroLogix controller and the individual discrete starters as well as between the MicroLogix controller and the PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Starting and stopping using the PVc terminal entails having the external HOA switch in Auto position In Hand mode the PVc terminal can still read status of the starters and drives but will not have startstop capabilities

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 3 of that document

bull Verify that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 1 of this document

bull Verify that all the devices are connected per the Simple Motor Control CAD wiring diagram on the Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Verify that the MicroLogix controller PowerFlex drive and PVc terminal have power applied to them

19Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 19

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Personal computer with either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox web browser

bull PanelView Component terminal

bull One or more of these drives or starters

bull PowerFlex 4M drive

bull SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBR

bull 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE

bull 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

bull MicroLogix 1100 or 1400 controller

bull Serial cable catalog number 1761-CBL-PM02

bull USB cable catalog number 2711C-CBL-UU02 or comparable

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to verify that communication is occurring between your devices and to test the system

Start

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer page 21

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller

Communication page 22

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality page 25

20 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer

The PanelView Explorer design-time environment is accessed through a web browser by connecting your computer to the PVc terminal with a USB connection Before connecting your computer to the USB port of the PVc terminal you must first install the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver on a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system After installing the driver you can connect the PVc terminal to your computer For details on how to install the driver refer to the PanelView Component Terminal User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

PVc Terminal USB Connections

All PanelView Component terminals support a USB port connection and require a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system and with the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver installed The driver cannot be installed on a computer with Windows 2000 operating system

1 Connect one end of a USB cable to the mini-USB device port on your PVc terminal

2 Connect the other end of the USB cable to a USB port on your personal computer

3 Power up the PVc terminal and the personal computer

PanelView Explorer Startup Window

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 21

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication

The 3-inch monochrome touch screen PanelView Component (PVc) terminal communicates with the MicroLogix controller over the DF1 network The PVc application reads from and writes to the data table of the MicroLogix controller When the PVc application writes to the MicroLogix controller the controller program detects the value change and writes that new value to the appropriate drive soft starter or discrete starter

1 Connect the personal computer to the PVc terminal using a USB cable

2 Connect the PVc terminal to MicroLogix controller using the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable

3 Start either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox 20

4 In the address bar of your browser type the IP address 1692542542 (This is a fixed IP address that the USB port uses)

5 Press Enter to connect your personal computer to the PVc terminal

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02

USB port

USB port

MicroLogix controller

1761-CBL-PM02

22 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

6 Select the application name in the PVc dashboard dialog box and then click Edit

7 In the Edit dialog box click the Communication tab

The following dialog box appears

8 Click Serial under Protocol and select DF1 from the pull-down list

9 Under PanelView Component Settings verify the Station Address is 2

Validate button

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 23

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

10Under Controller Settings

a Accept the default name lsquoPLC-1rsquo

b Select MicroLogix from the Controller Type field

c In the Address field type 1

11Click Validate

12Click Save

13Click Switch to PanelView Explorer Startup

14 In the Application Dashboard window select the Simple Starting Building Block application

15Click Run to run the application

Navigating the Starters Overview Page

When the PVc application is running any drive or starter that is enabled is shown on the Starters Overview screen as being lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo or lsquoFaultrsquo To ease the use of this program by the OEM the header for the starter is left generic for the ability to change starters without the need to change the PVc first page To change the buttons themselves please see the PanelView Component HMI Terminals user manual

bull lsquoM1rsquo is designated for the SMC-3 controller

bull lsquoM2rsquo is designated for the 103T starter

bull lsquoM3rsquo is designated for the PF 4M drive

bull lsquoM4rsquo is designated for the 190E starter

24 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

bull Stopped indicates the starter is stopped

bull 140M On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull Starting (not shown) indicates the starter or drive is starting

bull Running indicates that motor is running based on feedback from the starter or drive

bull Fault indicates that there is an overload short circuit or other fault the starter has detected

Touching anywhere on Stopped 140M On Running Fault or M takes you to the individual starter screens regardless of the status shown

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality

Now that the PVc terminal is successfully communicating with the MicroLogix controller you are ready to test the Simple Starting functionality

Navigating the Simple Starting Screen

Touch any of the MTR or M buttons on the Starters Overview screen to get to each individual starter screen such as these for the SMC-3 and VFD starter screens

TIP At this point you may choose to edit the Starters Overview screen and delete any buttons and status displays that are associated with non-existing starters or drives

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 25

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

The in the top-right corner exits the application and goes to the PVc Terminal Starters Overview screen

The 190E and 103T screens are similar to that for the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the fault button on the starter screen

The SMC-3 screen shows the following states

The right column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Start is a momentary start button which appears when the starterdrive is in Auto and the 140M is Ready Touching this button starts the starter or drive

bull Stop is also a momentary button Touching this button stops the starterdrive

If the HOA (Hand Off Auto) is not in Auto the Start and Stop buttons will not appear nor will they appear without a 3 Ph On signal In this building block a signal of lsquo1rsquo back to the PLC indicates an Auto position a signal of lsquo0rsquo back indicates a hand or off position You can add an additional contact block to the HOA for the hand position and feedback to the PLC to give that status also

The center column of the SMC-3 starter screen indicates the following

bull 3 Ph On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull 3 Ph Off indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOffrsquo position

bull Stopped indicates the SMC-3 controller is stopped

bull Starting indicates the motor is starting

bull At Speed indicates the motor is running and is at speed

bull Start Fail indicates the starter or drive received a start signal but did not start within the time set in the RSLogix program

CausesRemedies When getting a Start Fail indication check the starter drive andor motor for wiring issues or damage In addition the Start Fail indication may occur due to too short a time for the Timer On Delay in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller See Timer On Delay below

Reset procedure To reset the Start Fail on the PVc terminal when using the SMC-3 controller or the 103T or 190E starters turn the front knob on the 140M MPCB or MCP to off and then back to on to clear the indication To clear this indication on the drive press the stop button on the either on the PVc terminal in Auto mode or press the stop button in Hand mode

26 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Timer On Delay The timer is started when the Start signal is sent to the starter or drive At the end of the timing a comparison is done to see if the motor has actually started The time duration for the Timer On Delay is fully adjustable in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller For this building block the timers are set to 35 seconds for the SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive and 5 seconds for the 103T and 190E starters Check rung 3 or 4 of the default program for the timer

The left column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Fault indicates that the starter has detected a fault

Not all starters have this capability

The SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive can provide this information When the fault indication appears on the SMC-3 controller touching Fault takes you to the listed fault screen for the controller

The PF 4M drive VFD screen always has the Fault button displayed If a fault appears on the PF 4M drive the fault code is displayed on the drive You can press the Fault button on the PVc terminal to view the fault description You can scroll through the fault list just as with the SMC-3 controller

The fault indication on the 103T or 190E starter screen does not have this fault screen functionality since these starters do not provide additional information

bull OVLD indicates that there is an overload detected by the starter

bull SC indicates that there is a short circuit detected by the starter

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 27

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Understanding Faults

The Fault button is always present on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal This Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is merely a GoTo button and does not by itself indicate a fault condition with the PF 4M drive The SMC-3 controller however sends a signal back to the PVc terminal indicating a fault with the controller The Fault GOTO button is then displayed on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo screen on the PVc terminal Pressing the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo Fault screen or on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault screen takes you to the individual fault screens where you can scroll through to find the fault indicated on the PF 4M drive or the SMC-3 controller and its corresponding description

rsquoVFDrsquo Fault Screen (for PF 4M Drive)

lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault Screen

In both cases look at the fault code on the PF 4M drive or SMC-3 controller

bull For the PF 4M drive you must view the fault code on the drive Press the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal to view the fault listing Locate the specific fault for the drive To get a deeper description of the fault consult the user manual for the drive

bull The SMC-3 Controller will have a flashing LED and you need to count the number of flashes Then on the PVc terminal scroll through the fault listing screen and identify the fault using the number of flashes for identification

The button in the lower-right corner of the fault listings takes you back to the SMC-3 or VFD starter screen

28 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Test the SMC-3 Controller

Follow this procedure to test the SMC-3 controller

1 Make sure the motor is disconnected from the load for ease of testing in this procedure

2 Verify that the external HOA is in Auto mode

3 Verify that the 140M is in the ON position (I)

This enables the 3-phase power to the starter

4 Verify that there is no Fault OVLD or SC state If there is check the PVc terminal for the error condition The screen should look like this

5 Verify that the 3 Ph On indicator is present

6 Verify that the Start and Stop buttons are present

7 Make sure that the SMC-3 controller has the proper DIP switch setting for your application (for example ramp time current limit or soft start)

8 Touch the Start button

9 Verify the following

bull The isolation contactor pulls in

bull The motor starts according to the starting method selected for the SMC-3 controller

bull The Running indication appears when the motor is up to speed

10Touch the Stop button to stop the motor

11Unplug the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable from the PVc terminal going to the MicroLogix controller

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 29

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP ltFEFF0055007300650020006500730074006100730020006f007000630069006f006e006500730020007000610072006100200063007200650061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200071007500650020007000650072006d006900740061006e002000760069007300750061006c0069007a006100720020006500200069006d007000720069006d0069007200200063006f007200720065006300740061006d0065006e0074006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f007300200065006d00700072006500730061007200690061006c00650073002e0020004c006f007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f00730020005000440046002000730065002000700075006500640065006e00200061006200720069007200200063006f006e0020004100630072006f00620061007400200079002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200079002000760065007200730069006f006e0065007300200070006f00730074006500720069006f007200650073002egt SUO ltFEFF004e00e4006900640065006e002000610073006500740075007300740065006e0020006100760075006c006c006100200076006f006900740020006c0075006f006400610020006a0061002000740075006c006f00730074006100610020005000440046002d0061007300690061006b00690072006a006f006a0061002c0020006a006f006900640065006e0020006500730069006b0061007400730065006c00750020006e00e400790074007400e400e40020006c0075006f00740065007400740061007600610073007400690020006c006f00700070007500740075006c006f006b00730065006e002e0020005000440046002d0061007300690061006b00690072006a0061007400200076006f0069006400610061006e0020006100760061007400610020004100630072006f006200610074002d0020006a0061002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020002d006f0068006a0065006c006d0061006c006c0061002000740061006900200075007500640065006d006d0061006c006c0061002000760065007200730069006f006c006c0061002egt ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 2: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

Important User Information

Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (publication SGI-11 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom) describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable

In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams

No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual

Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited

Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations

Allen-Bradley MicroLogix PanelView PanelView Component PowerFlex SMC SMC-3 TechConnect and Rockwell Automation are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc

Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies

WARNINGIdentifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss

IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product

ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequence

SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present

BURN HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures

Where to Start

Follow the path below for simple starting controlling and monitoring motors

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Connected Components Building Blocks publication

CC-QS001

3Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 3

Where to Start

Notes

4 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Table of Contents

PrefaceIntroduction 7Conventions Used in This Manual 8Additional Resources 9

Chapter 1Simple Motor Control Integration Introduction 11

Before You Begin 11What You Need 12Follow These Steps 12Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive 13Set up the SMC-3 Controller 16

Chapter 2System Validation and Application Tips

Introduction 19Before You Begin 19What You Need 20Follow These Steps 20Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer 21Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller

Communication 22Navigating the Starters Overview Page 24

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality 25Navigating the Simple Starting Screen 25Understanding Faults 28Test the SMC-3 Controller 29Testing Other Drives and Starters 30

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 5

Table of Contents

Notes

6 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Preface

Introduction This Quick Start is designed to provide a way to implement a connected component for simple motor control By using discrete information (simple on-off signals from contacts) from a PowerFlex 4M drive SMC-3 starter 103T starter or 190E starter this building block shows an example of extracting important basic information about the status of a motor and displaying it on a PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Any or all of these starters or drives can be used The PowerFlex 4M drive is used for this building block but the procedure is very similar for the PowerFlex 4 40 40P and 400 drives

To assist in the design and installation of your system application files and other information are provided on the Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001 The CD provides bills of materials (BOM) CAD drawings for panel layout and wiring control programs Human Machine Interface (HMI) screens and more With these tools and the built-in best-practices design the system designer is free to focus on the design of their machine control and not on design overhead tasks

The beginning of each chapter contains the following information Read these sections carefully before beginning work in each chapter

bull Before You Begin - This section lists the steps that must be completed and decisions that must be made before starting that chapter The chapters in this quick start do not have to be completed in the order in which they appear but this section defines the minimum amount of preparation required before completing the current chapter

bull What You Need - This section lists the tools that are required to complete the steps in the current chapter This includes but is not limited to hardware and software

bull Follow These Steps - This illustrates the steps in the current chapter and identifies which steps are required to complete the examples

IMPORTANT Use this Connected Components Building Block Quick Start in conjunction with the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001

Refer to Additional Resources on page 9 for a listing of Quick Start documents

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 7

Preface

Conventions Used in This Manual

This manual uses the following conventions

Convention Meaning Example

Click Click the left mouse button once Click Edit

Type What you type on the keyboard Type the IP address

Right-click Click the right mouse button once while the cursor is positioned on object or selection Right-click the 1768 Bus icon

Select Using the mouse to highlight a specific option Select the application name

Press Pressing a specific key on the keyboard or the PowerFlex 4M keypad Press Enter

Touch Touching a specific button on the PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Touch the Start button

8 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Preface

Additional Resources

Resource Description

Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001

Provides information on how to select products and gain access to panel and wiring information

Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

Provides files for the Connected Component Building Blocks

Bulletin 150 SMC-3 (1-37A)SMC-Delta (1-32A) Soft Starter Connecting Modules 41053-173-01 (1)

Provides information on the connecting modules with the SMC-3

Bulletin 150 SMC-3 Soft Starter (3-37A) 41053-167-01 (5)

Provides information on installation and settings of the SMC-3

Bulletin 193 E1 Plus Overload Relay 41053-358-01 (3)

Provides information on the installation and settings of the overload

Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Motor Circuit Protectors 21-301-951-01

Provides installation instructions for the MPCB and the MCP

Position Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start publication CC-QS003

Provides information on installing and setting up the PowerFlex 40P drive parameters with the pre-configured RSLogix 500 program that controls your base system including application tips as well as implementing the drive parameter backup and restore functionality

MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers User Manual publication 1763-UM001

Provides information on using the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controller

MicroLogix 1400 User Manual publication 1766-UM001

Provides information on using the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controller

PanelView Component Quick Start Manual publication 2711C-QS001A

Provides information on using the PanelView component

PanelView Component Operator Terminals User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

Provides information on using the PanelView Component HMI Terminals

PowerFlex 4M User Manual publication 22F-UM001

Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 4M Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 4 User Manual publication 22A-UM001 Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 4 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 40P User Manual publication 22D-UM001

Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 40P Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 400 User Manual publication 22C-UM001

Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 400 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

httpwwwabcomdrivesdriveexplorer Provides access to DriveExplorerLite software

httpwwwabcom Provides access to the Allen-Bradley website

httprockwellautomationcomknowledgebase Provides access to self-service support

httpwwwrockwellautomationcomcomponentsconnected

Provides access to the Connected Components website

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 9

Preface

Notes

10 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Chapter 1

Simple Motor Control Integration

Introduction

This chapter provides instructions to configure the PowerFlex 4M drive and SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller

You will configure two parameters in the PowerFlex 4M drive These are the basic parameters that need to be changed from the factory default settings in order to establish proper feedback to the MicroLogix controllers For your machine application there may be other drive parameters that need to be adjusted Consult your drive documentation for information on other drive parameters

You will also set the DIP switches on the SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller necessary to send appropriate discrete feedback to the MicroLogix controller

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed hardware design and installation recommendations as well as software installation

bull Apply power to your drive

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 11

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull One or more of these drives or startersndash PowerFlex 4-class drive (PowerFlex 4M drive is used in this document)

bull For PowerFlex 4M 4 40 and 400 drives there is a built-in keypad and display to edit parameters

bull For PowerFlex 40P drive to edit parameters you need either

- A hand-held interface catalog number 22-HIM-A3

or

- DriveExplorer software installed on the personal computer and a USB interface catalog number 1203-USB

ndash SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBRndash 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TEndash 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to configure the parameters in the drives and set the DIP switches on the SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller

Start

Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive page 13

Set up the SMC-3 Controller page 16

12 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive

Factory-default parameter values allow the drive to be controlled from the integral keypad No programming is required to start stop change direction and control speed directly from the integral keypad

However for this building block you will set parameter P106 [Start Source] for 2-wire control In the example for this building block the PF 4M drive is used in a 2-wire SRC Control (internal sourcing) Non-Reversing mode SRC is the default for a new drive If your drive has been used previously make sure the SNKSRC (SinkSource) switch under the front cover of the PF 4M drive is set to SRC See the PF 4M drive user manual for your specific needs other than shown in this example

In addition you will change parameter t221 [Relay Out Sel] to display lsquoMotorRunningrsquo since this building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive See Testing Other Drives and Starters page 30 for details

Follow this procedure to change parameters P106 [Start Source] and t221 [Relay Out Sel] using the PowerFlex 4M keypad explained below

PowerFlex 4M Keypad

Key Key Name Description

Escapebull Go back one step in Program mode

bull Cancel a change to a parameter value and exit Program mode

Selectbull Advance one step in the programming menu

bull Select a digit when viewing a parameter value

Up arrowbull Scroll through groups and parameters

bull Increase and decrease the value of a flashing digit

Down arrow

Enterbull Advance one step in the programming menu

bull Save a change to a parameter value

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 13

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

1 Press Esc until lsquo00rsquo is displayed

2 Press Sel until the leftmost character is flashing

3 Press the Down arrow until the leftmost character displayed is a flashing P

4 Press Enter

The P stops flashing and the rightmost numeric key is flashing

By default the first P parameter P101 is displayed Pressing the Up arrow increases and pressing the Down arrow decreases the value of the P parameters

5 Press the Up arrow five times to display P106

The current value of parameter P106 is displayed lsquo0rsquo in this case

6 Press Enter

The lsquo0rsquo flashes

7 Press the Up arrow twice to adjust the value to lsquo2rsquo

8 Press Enter

The value is accepted

The lsquo2rsquo should not be flashing any longer Notice that the green status indicator next to the green Start button is now off

9 Press Esc

P106 should be displayed with the lsquo6rsquo flashing

10Press Esc until the P is flashing on the leftmost alphanumeric character

11Press the Up arrow or Down arrow to scroll through the group menu to t

12Press Enter

The lsquo1rsquo flashes

Stop the drive before changing parameter P106

14 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

13Press and hold down the up arrow until you reach lsquo221rsquo

If you go past it push the down arrow until you return to lsquo221rsquo

14Press Enter twice so that lsquo0rsquo is flashing

15Press the up arrow to move to the value lsquo2rsquo

16Press Enter

The value is accepted The lsquo2rsquo should not be flashing any longer Notice that the green status indicator next to the green Start button is now off

17Press Esc

Parameter t221 should now be displayed with the lsquo1rsquo flashing

18Press Esc until lsquo00rsquo is displayed

19Power the drive off until the display goes blank and then power it back on

Your drive is now configured to be controlled by push buttons and communication commands initiated from the MicroLogix controller

As with all building blocks these are examples of getting information back discretely from a product You can change parameter t221 or other settings of the starters and drives to suit your application

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 15

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

Set up the SMC-3 Controller

The SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller needs to be set up for the isolation contactor and for the appropriate settings for the motor Below are the DIP switch settings used by the SMC-3 controller and the steps to change them

TIP The 140M MPCB specified in the BOM for this building block has a trip class of 10 However if you would like to use the overload trip class settings on the SMC-3 controller you can change out the 140M MPCB with the 140M MCP

16 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

1 Set the DIP switch settings to the starting needs of your motor using the chart below

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 17

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

2 Be sure that DIP switch 14 is set to Normal (off)

This will bring in the isolation contactor when the SMC-3 has received the input signal DIP switch 14 will also close the side-mounted NO aux contact when the starter comes up to speed The closure of this aux contact will send the signal back to the MicroLogix controller

3 If changing to an MCP set DIP switches 11 and 12 to the appropriate overload trip class

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

IMPORTANT The 103T starter uses a 140M MCP (Motor Circuit Protector) which uses a separate overload E1 Plus which must be set according to your system needs

The 190E starter the SMC-3 starter and the PF 4M drive must have the overload dial set on the 140M MPCB (Motor Protection Circuit Breakers)

18 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Chapter 2

System Validation and Application Tips

Introduction

In this chapter you validate that communication is occurring as intended between the MicroLogix controller and the individual discrete starters as well as between the MicroLogix controller and the PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Starting and stopping using the PVc terminal entails having the external HOA switch in Auto position In Hand mode the PVc terminal can still read status of the starters and drives but will not have startstop capabilities

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 3 of that document

bull Verify that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 1 of this document

bull Verify that all the devices are connected per the Simple Motor Control CAD wiring diagram on the Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Verify that the MicroLogix controller PowerFlex drive and PVc terminal have power applied to them

19Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 19

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Personal computer with either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox web browser

bull PanelView Component terminal

bull One or more of these drives or starters

bull PowerFlex 4M drive

bull SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBR

bull 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE

bull 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

bull MicroLogix 1100 or 1400 controller

bull Serial cable catalog number 1761-CBL-PM02

bull USB cable catalog number 2711C-CBL-UU02 or comparable

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to verify that communication is occurring between your devices and to test the system

Start

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer page 21

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller

Communication page 22

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality page 25

20 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer

The PanelView Explorer design-time environment is accessed through a web browser by connecting your computer to the PVc terminal with a USB connection Before connecting your computer to the USB port of the PVc terminal you must first install the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver on a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system After installing the driver you can connect the PVc terminal to your computer For details on how to install the driver refer to the PanelView Component Terminal User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

PVc Terminal USB Connections

All PanelView Component terminals support a USB port connection and require a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system and with the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver installed The driver cannot be installed on a computer with Windows 2000 operating system

1 Connect one end of a USB cable to the mini-USB device port on your PVc terminal

2 Connect the other end of the USB cable to a USB port on your personal computer

3 Power up the PVc terminal and the personal computer

PanelView Explorer Startup Window

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 21

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication

The 3-inch monochrome touch screen PanelView Component (PVc) terminal communicates with the MicroLogix controller over the DF1 network The PVc application reads from and writes to the data table of the MicroLogix controller When the PVc application writes to the MicroLogix controller the controller program detects the value change and writes that new value to the appropriate drive soft starter or discrete starter

1 Connect the personal computer to the PVc terminal using a USB cable

2 Connect the PVc terminal to MicroLogix controller using the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable

3 Start either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox 20

4 In the address bar of your browser type the IP address 1692542542 (This is a fixed IP address that the USB port uses)

5 Press Enter to connect your personal computer to the PVc terminal

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02

USB port

USB port

MicroLogix controller

1761-CBL-PM02

22 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

6 Select the application name in the PVc dashboard dialog box and then click Edit

7 In the Edit dialog box click the Communication tab

The following dialog box appears

8 Click Serial under Protocol and select DF1 from the pull-down list

9 Under PanelView Component Settings verify the Station Address is 2

Validate button

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 23

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

10Under Controller Settings

a Accept the default name lsquoPLC-1rsquo

b Select MicroLogix from the Controller Type field

c In the Address field type 1

11Click Validate

12Click Save

13Click Switch to PanelView Explorer Startup

14 In the Application Dashboard window select the Simple Starting Building Block application

15Click Run to run the application

Navigating the Starters Overview Page

When the PVc application is running any drive or starter that is enabled is shown on the Starters Overview screen as being lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo or lsquoFaultrsquo To ease the use of this program by the OEM the header for the starter is left generic for the ability to change starters without the need to change the PVc first page To change the buttons themselves please see the PanelView Component HMI Terminals user manual

bull lsquoM1rsquo is designated for the SMC-3 controller

bull lsquoM2rsquo is designated for the 103T starter

bull lsquoM3rsquo is designated for the PF 4M drive

bull lsquoM4rsquo is designated for the 190E starter

24 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

bull Stopped indicates the starter is stopped

bull 140M On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull Starting (not shown) indicates the starter or drive is starting

bull Running indicates that motor is running based on feedback from the starter or drive

bull Fault indicates that there is an overload short circuit or other fault the starter has detected

Touching anywhere on Stopped 140M On Running Fault or M takes you to the individual starter screens regardless of the status shown

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality

Now that the PVc terminal is successfully communicating with the MicroLogix controller you are ready to test the Simple Starting functionality

Navigating the Simple Starting Screen

Touch any of the MTR or M buttons on the Starters Overview screen to get to each individual starter screen such as these for the SMC-3 and VFD starter screens

TIP At this point you may choose to edit the Starters Overview screen and delete any buttons and status displays that are associated with non-existing starters or drives

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 25

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

The in the top-right corner exits the application and goes to the PVc Terminal Starters Overview screen

The 190E and 103T screens are similar to that for the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the fault button on the starter screen

The SMC-3 screen shows the following states

The right column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Start is a momentary start button which appears when the starterdrive is in Auto and the 140M is Ready Touching this button starts the starter or drive

bull Stop is also a momentary button Touching this button stops the starterdrive

If the HOA (Hand Off Auto) is not in Auto the Start and Stop buttons will not appear nor will they appear without a 3 Ph On signal In this building block a signal of lsquo1rsquo back to the PLC indicates an Auto position a signal of lsquo0rsquo back indicates a hand or off position You can add an additional contact block to the HOA for the hand position and feedback to the PLC to give that status also

The center column of the SMC-3 starter screen indicates the following

bull 3 Ph On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull 3 Ph Off indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOffrsquo position

bull Stopped indicates the SMC-3 controller is stopped

bull Starting indicates the motor is starting

bull At Speed indicates the motor is running and is at speed

bull Start Fail indicates the starter or drive received a start signal but did not start within the time set in the RSLogix program

CausesRemedies When getting a Start Fail indication check the starter drive andor motor for wiring issues or damage In addition the Start Fail indication may occur due to too short a time for the Timer On Delay in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller See Timer On Delay below

Reset procedure To reset the Start Fail on the PVc terminal when using the SMC-3 controller or the 103T or 190E starters turn the front knob on the 140M MPCB or MCP to off and then back to on to clear the indication To clear this indication on the drive press the stop button on the either on the PVc terminal in Auto mode or press the stop button in Hand mode

26 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Timer On Delay The timer is started when the Start signal is sent to the starter or drive At the end of the timing a comparison is done to see if the motor has actually started The time duration for the Timer On Delay is fully adjustable in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller For this building block the timers are set to 35 seconds for the SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive and 5 seconds for the 103T and 190E starters Check rung 3 or 4 of the default program for the timer

The left column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Fault indicates that the starter has detected a fault

Not all starters have this capability

The SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive can provide this information When the fault indication appears on the SMC-3 controller touching Fault takes you to the listed fault screen for the controller

The PF 4M drive VFD screen always has the Fault button displayed If a fault appears on the PF 4M drive the fault code is displayed on the drive You can press the Fault button on the PVc terminal to view the fault description You can scroll through the fault list just as with the SMC-3 controller

The fault indication on the 103T or 190E starter screen does not have this fault screen functionality since these starters do not provide additional information

bull OVLD indicates that there is an overload detected by the starter

bull SC indicates that there is a short circuit detected by the starter

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 27

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Understanding Faults

The Fault button is always present on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal This Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is merely a GoTo button and does not by itself indicate a fault condition with the PF 4M drive The SMC-3 controller however sends a signal back to the PVc terminal indicating a fault with the controller The Fault GOTO button is then displayed on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo screen on the PVc terminal Pressing the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo Fault screen or on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault screen takes you to the individual fault screens where you can scroll through to find the fault indicated on the PF 4M drive or the SMC-3 controller and its corresponding description

rsquoVFDrsquo Fault Screen (for PF 4M Drive)

lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault Screen

In both cases look at the fault code on the PF 4M drive or SMC-3 controller

bull For the PF 4M drive you must view the fault code on the drive Press the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal to view the fault listing Locate the specific fault for the drive To get a deeper description of the fault consult the user manual for the drive

bull The SMC-3 Controller will have a flashing LED and you need to count the number of flashes Then on the PVc terminal scroll through the fault listing screen and identify the fault using the number of flashes for identification

The button in the lower-right corner of the fault listings takes you back to the SMC-3 or VFD starter screen

28 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Test the SMC-3 Controller

Follow this procedure to test the SMC-3 controller

1 Make sure the motor is disconnected from the load for ease of testing in this procedure

2 Verify that the external HOA is in Auto mode

3 Verify that the 140M is in the ON position (I)

This enables the 3-phase power to the starter

4 Verify that there is no Fault OVLD or SC state If there is check the PVc terminal for the error condition The screen should look like this

5 Verify that the 3 Ph On indicator is present

6 Verify that the Start and Stop buttons are present

7 Make sure that the SMC-3 controller has the proper DIP switch setting for your application (for example ramp time current limit or soft start)

8 Touch the Start button

9 Verify the following

bull The isolation contactor pulls in

bull The motor starts according to the starting method selected for the SMC-3 controller

bull The Running indication appears when the motor is up to speed

10Touch the Stop button to stop the motor

11Unplug the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable from the PVc terminal going to the MicroLogix controller

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 29

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 3: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

Where to Start

Follow the path below for simple starting controlling and monitoring motors

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Connected Components Building Blocks publication

CC-QS001

3Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 3

Where to Start

Notes

4 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Table of Contents

PrefaceIntroduction 7Conventions Used in This Manual 8Additional Resources 9

Chapter 1Simple Motor Control Integration Introduction 11

Before You Begin 11What You Need 12Follow These Steps 12Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive 13Set up the SMC-3 Controller 16

Chapter 2System Validation and Application Tips

Introduction 19Before You Begin 19What You Need 20Follow These Steps 20Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer 21Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller

Communication 22Navigating the Starters Overview Page 24

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality 25Navigating the Simple Starting Screen 25Understanding Faults 28Test the SMC-3 Controller 29Testing Other Drives and Starters 30

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 5

Table of Contents

Notes

6 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Preface

Introduction This Quick Start is designed to provide a way to implement a connected component for simple motor control By using discrete information (simple on-off signals from contacts) from a PowerFlex 4M drive SMC-3 starter 103T starter or 190E starter this building block shows an example of extracting important basic information about the status of a motor and displaying it on a PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Any or all of these starters or drives can be used The PowerFlex 4M drive is used for this building block but the procedure is very similar for the PowerFlex 4 40 40P and 400 drives

To assist in the design and installation of your system application files and other information are provided on the Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001 The CD provides bills of materials (BOM) CAD drawings for panel layout and wiring control programs Human Machine Interface (HMI) screens and more With these tools and the built-in best-practices design the system designer is free to focus on the design of their machine control and not on design overhead tasks

The beginning of each chapter contains the following information Read these sections carefully before beginning work in each chapter

bull Before You Begin - This section lists the steps that must be completed and decisions that must be made before starting that chapter The chapters in this quick start do not have to be completed in the order in which they appear but this section defines the minimum amount of preparation required before completing the current chapter

bull What You Need - This section lists the tools that are required to complete the steps in the current chapter This includes but is not limited to hardware and software

bull Follow These Steps - This illustrates the steps in the current chapter and identifies which steps are required to complete the examples

IMPORTANT Use this Connected Components Building Block Quick Start in conjunction with the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001

Refer to Additional Resources on page 9 for a listing of Quick Start documents

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 7

Preface

Conventions Used in This Manual

This manual uses the following conventions

Convention Meaning Example

Click Click the left mouse button once Click Edit

Type What you type on the keyboard Type the IP address

Right-click Click the right mouse button once while the cursor is positioned on object or selection Right-click the 1768 Bus icon

Select Using the mouse to highlight a specific option Select the application name

Press Pressing a specific key on the keyboard or the PowerFlex 4M keypad Press Enter

Touch Touching a specific button on the PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Touch the Start button

8 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Preface

Additional Resources

Resource Description

Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001

Provides information on how to select products and gain access to panel and wiring information

Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

Provides files for the Connected Component Building Blocks

Bulletin 150 SMC-3 (1-37A)SMC-Delta (1-32A) Soft Starter Connecting Modules 41053-173-01 (1)

Provides information on the connecting modules with the SMC-3

Bulletin 150 SMC-3 Soft Starter (3-37A) 41053-167-01 (5)

Provides information on installation and settings of the SMC-3

Bulletin 193 E1 Plus Overload Relay 41053-358-01 (3)

Provides information on the installation and settings of the overload

Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Motor Circuit Protectors 21-301-951-01

Provides installation instructions for the MPCB and the MCP

Position Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start publication CC-QS003

Provides information on installing and setting up the PowerFlex 40P drive parameters with the pre-configured RSLogix 500 program that controls your base system including application tips as well as implementing the drive parameter backup and restore functionality

MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers User Manual publication 1763-UM001

Provides information on using the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controller

MicroLogix 1400 User Manual publication 1766-UM001

Provides information on using the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controller

PanelView Component Quick Start Manual publication 2711C-QS001A

Provides information on using the PanelView component

PanelView Component Operator Terminals User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

Provides information on using the PanelView Component HMI Terminals

PowerFlex 4M User Manual publication 22F-UM001

Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 4M Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 4 User Manual publication 22A-UM001 Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 4 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 40P User Manual publication 22D-UM001

Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 40P Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 400 User Manual publication 22C-UM001

Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 400 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

httpwwwabcomdrivesdriveexplorer Provides access to DriveExplorerLite software

httpwwwabcom Provides access to the Allen-Bradley website

httprockwellautomationcomknowledgebase Provides access to self-service support

httpwwwrockwellautomationcomcomponentsconnected

Provides access to the Connected Components website

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 9

Preface

Notes

10 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Chapter 1

Simple Motor Control Integration

Introduction

This chapter provides instructions to configure the PowerFlex 4M drive and SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller

You will configure two parameters in the PowerFlex 4M drive These are the basic parameters that need to be changed from the factory default settings in order to establish proper feedback to the MicroLogix controllers For your machine application there may be other drive parameters that need to be adjusted Consult your drive documentation for information on other drive parameters

You will also set the DIP switches on the SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller necessary to send appropriate discrete feedback to the MicroLogix controller

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed hardware design and installation recommendations as well as software installation

bull Apply power to your drive

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 11

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull One or more of these drives or startersndash PowerFlex 4-class drive (PowerFlex 4M drive is used in this document)

bull For PowerFlex 4M 4 40 and 400 drives there is a built-in keypad and display to edit parameters

bull For PowerFlex 40P drive to edit parameters you need either

- A hand-held interface catalog number 22-HIM-A3

or

- DriveExplorer software installed on the personal computer and a USB interface catalog number 1203-USB

ndash SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBRndash 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TEndash 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to configure the parameters in the drives and set the DIP switches on the SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller

Start

Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive page 13

Set up the SMC-3 Controller page 16

12 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive

Factory-default parameter values allow the drive to be controlled from the integral keypad No programming is required to start stop change direction and control speed directly from the integral keypad

However for this building block you will set parameter P106 [Start Source] for 2-wire control In the example for this building block the PF 4M drive is used in a 2-wire SRC Control (internal sourcing) Non-Reversing mode SRC is the default for a new drive If your drive has been used previously make sure the SNKSRC (SinkSource) switch under the front cover of the PF 4M drive is set to SRC See the PF 4M drive user manual for your specific needs other than shown in this example

In addition you will change parameter t221 [Relay Out Sel] to display lsquoMotorRunningrsquo since this building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive See Testing Other Drives and Starters page 30 for details

Follow this procedure to change parameters P106 [Start Source] and t221 [Relay Out Sel] using the PowerFlex 4M keypad explained below

PowerFlex 4M Keypad

Key Key Name Description

Escapebull Go back one step in Program mode

bull Cancel a change to a parameter value and exit Program mode

Selectbull Advance one step in the programming menu

bull Select a digit when viewing a parameter value

Up arrowbull Scroll through groups and parameters

bull Increase and decrease the value of a flashing digit

Down arrow

Enterbull Advance one step in the programming menu

bull Save a change to a parameter value

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 13

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

1 Press Esc until lsquo00rsquo is displayed

2 Press Sel until the leftmost character is flashing

3 Press the Down arrow until the leftmost character displayed is a flashing P

4 Press Enter

The P stops flashing and the rightmost numeric key is flashing

By default the first P parameter P101 is displayed Pressing the Up arrow increases and pressing the Down arrow decreases the value of the P parameters

5 Press the Up arrow five times to display P106

The current value of parameter P106 is displayed lsquo0rsquo in this case

6 Press Enter

The lsquo0rsquo flashes

7 Press the Up arrow twice to adjust the value to lsquo2rsquo

8 Press Enter

The value is accepted

The lsquo2rsquo should not be flashing any longer Notice that the green status indicator next to the green Start button is now off

9 Press Esc

P106 should be displayed with the lsquo6rsquo flashing

10Press Esc until the P is flashing on the leftmost alphanumeric character

11Press the Up arrow or Down arrow to scroll through the group menu to t

12Press Enter

The lsquo1rsquo flashes

Stop the drive before changing parameter P106

14 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

13Press and hold down the up arrow until you reach lsquo221rsquo

If you go past it push the down arrow until you return to lsquo221rsquo

14Press Enter twice so that lsquo0rsquo is flashing

15Press the up arrow to move to the value lsquo2rsquo

16Press Enter

The value is accepted The lsquo2rsquo should not be flashing any longer Notice that the green status indicator next to the green Start button is now off

17Press Esc

Parameter t221 should now be displayed with the lsquo1rsquo flashing

18Press Esc until lsquo00rsquo is displayed

19Power the drive off until the display goes blank and then power it back on

Your drive is now configured to be controlled by push buttons and communication commands initiated from the MicroLogix controller

As with all building blocks these are examples of getting information back discretely from a product You can change parameter t221 or other settings of the starters and drives to suit your application

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 15

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

Set up the SMC-3 Controller

The SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller needs to be set up for the isolation contactor and for the appropriate settings for the motor Below are the DIP switch settings used by the SMC-3 controller and the steps to change them

TIP The 140M MPCB specified in the BOM for this building block has a trip class of 10 However if you would like to use the overload trip class settings on the SMC-3 controller you can change out the 140M MPCB with the 140M MCP

16 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

1 Set the DIP switch settings to the starting needs of your motor using the chart below

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 17

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

2 Be sure that DIP switch 14 is set to Normal (off)

This will bring in the isolation contactor when the SMC-3 has received the input signal DIP switch 14 will also close the side-mounted NO aux contact when the starter comes up to speed The closure of this aux contact will send the signal back to the MicroLogix controller

3 If changing to an MCP set DIP switches 11 and 12 to the appropriate overload trip class

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

IMPORTANT The 103T starter uses a 140M MCP (Motor Circuit Protector) which uses a separate overload E1 Plus which must be set according to your system needs

The 190E starter the SMC-3 starter and the PF 4M drive must have the overload dial set on the 140M MPCB (Motor Protection Circuit Breakers)

18 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Chapter 2

System Validation and Application Tips

Introduction

In this chapter you validate that communication is occurring as intended between the MicroLogix controller and the individual discrete starters as well as between the MicroLogix controller and the PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Starting and stopping using the PVc terminal entails having the external HOA switch in Auto position In Hand mode the PVc terminal can still read status of the starters and drives but will not have startstop capabilities

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 3 of that document

bull Verify that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 1 of this document

bull Verify that all the devices are connected per the Simple Motor Control CAD wiring diagram on the Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Verify that the MicroLogix controller PowerFlex drive and PVc terminal have power applied to them

19Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 19

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Personal computer with either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox web browser

bull PanelView Component terminal

bull One or more of these drives or starters

bull PowerFlex 4M drive

bull SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBR

bull 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE

bull 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

bull MicroLogix 1100 or 1400 controller

bull Serial cable catalog number 1761-CBL-PM02

bull USB cable catalog number 2711C-CBL-UU02 or comparable

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to verify that communication is occurring between your devices and to test the system

Start

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer page 21

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller

Communication page 22

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality page 25

20 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer

The PanelView Explorer design-time environment is accessed through a web browser by connecting your computer to the PVc terminal with a USB connection Before connecting your computer to the USB port of the PVc terminal you must first install the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver on a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system After installing the driver you can connect the PVc terminal to your computer For details on how to install the driver refer to the PanelView Component Terminal User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

PVc Terminal USB Connections

All PanelView Component terminals support a USB port connection and require a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system and with the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver installed The driver cannot be installed on a computer with Windows 2000 operating system

1 Connect one end of a USB cable to the mini-USB device port on your PVc terminal

2 Connect the other end of the USB cable to a USB port on your personal computer

3 Power up the PVc terminal and the personal computer

PanelView Explorer Startup Window

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 21

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication

The 3-inch monochrome touch screen PanelView Component (PVc) terminal communicates with the MicroLogix controller over the DF1 network The PVc application reads from and writes to the data table of the MicroLogix controller When the PVc application writes to the MicroLogix controller the controller program detects the value change and writes that new value to the appropriate drive soft starter or discrete starter

1 Connect the personal computer to the PVc terminal using a USB cable

2 Connect the PVc terminal to MicroLogix controller using the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable

3 Start either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox 20

4 In the address bar of your browser type the IP address 1692542542 (This is a fixed IP address that the USB port uses)

5 Press Enter to connect your personal computer to the PVc terminal

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02

USB port

USB port

MicroLogix controller

1761-CBL-PM02

22 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

6 Select the application name in the PVc dashboard dialog box and then click Edit

7 In the Edit dialog box click the Communication tab

The following dialog box appears

8 Click Serial under Protocol and select DF1 from the pull-down list

9 Under PanelView Component Settings verify the Station Address is 2

Validate button

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 23

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

10Under Controller Settings

a Accept the default name lsquoPLC-1rsquo

b Select MicroLogix from the Controller Type field

c In the Address field type 1

11Click Validate

12Click Save

13Click Switch to PanelView Explorer Startup

14 In the Application Dashboard window select the Simple Starting Building Block application

15Click Run to run the application

Navigating the Starters Overview Page

When the PVc application is running any drive or starter that is enabled is shown on the Starters Overview screen as being lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo or lsquoFaultrsquo To ease the use of this program by the OEM the header for the starter is left generic for the ability to change starters without the need to change the PVc first page To change the buttons themselves please see the PanelView Component HMI Terminals user manual

bull lsquoM1rsquo is designated for the SMC-3 controller

bull lsquoM2rsquo is designated for the 103T starter

bull lsquoM3rsquo is designated for the PF 4M drive

bull lsquoM4rsquo is designated for the 190E starter

24 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

bull Stopped indicates the starter is stopped

bull 140M On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull Starting (not shown) indicates the starter or drive is starting

bull Running indicates that motor is running based on feedback from the starter or drive

bull Fault indicates that there is an overload short circuit or other fault the starter has detected

Touching anywhere on Stopped 140M On Running Fault or M takes you to the individual starter screens regardless of the status shown

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality

Now that the PVc terminal is successfully communicating with the MicroLogix controller you are ready to test the Simple Starting functionality

Navigating the Simple Starting Screen

Touch any of the MTR or M buttons on the Starters Overview screen to get to each individual starter screen such as these for the SMC-3 and VFD starter screens

TIP At this point you may choose to edit the Starters Overview screen and delete any buttons and status displays that are associated with non-existing starters or drives

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 25

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

The in the top-right corner exits the application and goes to the PVc Terminal Starters Overview screen

The 190E and 103T screens are similar to that for the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the fault button on the starter screen

The SMC-3 screen shows the following states

The right column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Start is a momentary start button which appears when the starterdrive is in Auto and the 140M is Ready Touching this button starts the starter or drive

bull Stop is also a momentary button Touching this button stops the starterdrive

If the HOA (Hand Off Auto) is not in Auto the Start and Stop buttons will not appear nor will they appear without a 3 Ph On signal In this building block a signal of lsquo1rsquo back to the PLC indicates an Auto position a signal of lsquo0rsquo back indicates a hand or off position You can add an additional contact block to the HOA for the hand position and feedback to the PLC to give that status also

The center column of the SMC-3 starter screen indicates the following

bull 3 Ph On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull 3 Ph Off indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOffrsquo position

bull Stopped indicates the SMC-3 controller is stopped

bull Starting indicates the motor is starting

bull At Speed indicates the motor is running and is at speed

bull Start Fail indicates the starter or drive received a start signal but did not start within the time set in the RSLogix program

CausesRemedies When getting a Start Fail indication check the starter drive andor motor for wiring issues or damage In addition the Start Fail indication may occur due to too short a time for the Timer On Delay in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller See Timer On Delay below

Reset procedure To reset the Start Fail on the PVc terminal when using the SMC-3 controller or the 103T or 190E starters turn the front knob on the 140M MPCB or MCP to off and then back to on to clear the indication To clear this indication on the drive press the stop button on the either on the PVc terminal in Auto mode or press the stop button in Hand mode

26 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Timer On Delay The timer is started when the Start signal is sent to the starter or drive At the end of the timing a comparison is done to see if the motor has actually started The time duration for the Timer On Delay is fully adjustable in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller For this building block the timers are set to 35 seconds for the SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive and 5 seconds for the 103T and 190E starters Check rung 3 or 4 of the default program for the timer

The left column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Fault indicates that the starter has detected a fault

Not all starters have this capability

The SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive can provide this information When the fault indication appears on the SMC-3 controller touching Fault takes you to the listed fault screen for the controller

The PF 4M drive VFD screen always has the Fault button displayed If a fault appears on the PF 4M drive the fault code is displayed on the drive You can press the Fault button on the PVc terminal to view the fault description You can scroll through the fault list just as with the SMC-3 controller

The fault indication on the 103T or 190E starter screen does not have this fault screen functionality since these starters do not provide additional information

bull OVLD indicates that there is an overload detected by the starter

bull SC indicates that there is a short circuit detected by the starter

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 27

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Understanding Faults

The Fault button is always present on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal This Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is merely a GoTo button and does not by itself indicate a fault condition with the PF 4M drive The SMC-3 controller however sends a signal back to the PVc terminal indicating a fault with the controller The Fault GOTO button is then displayed on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo screen on the PVc terminal Pressing the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo Fault screen or on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault screen takes you to the individual fault screens where you can scroll through to find the fault indicated on the PF 4M drive or the SMC-3 controller and its corresponding description

rsquoVFDrsquo Fault Screen (for PF 4M Drive)

lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault Screen

In both cases look at the fault code on the PF 4M drive or SMC-3 controller

bull For the PF 4M drive you must view the fault code on the drive Press the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal to view the fault listing Locate the specific fault for the drive To get a deeper description of the fault consult the user manual for the drive

bull The SMC-3 Controller will have a flashing LED and you need to count the number of flashes Then on the PVc terminal scroll through the fault listing screen and identify the fault using the number of flashes for identification

The button in the lower-right corner of the fault listings takes you back to the SMC-3 or VFD starter screen

28 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Test the SMC-3 Controller

Follow this procedure to test the SMC-3 controller

1 Make sure the motor is disconnected from the load for ease of testing in this procedure

2 Verify that the external HOA is in Auto mode

3 Verify that the 140M is in the ON position (I)

This enables the 3-phase power to the starter

4 Verify that there is no Fault OVLD or SC state If there is check the PVc terminal for the error condition The screen should look like this

5 Verify that the 3 Ph On indicator is present

6 Verify that the Start and Stop buttons are present

7 Make sure that the SMC-3 controller has the proper DIP switch setting for your application (for example ramp time current limit or soft start)

8 Touch the Start button

9 Verify the following

bull The isolation contactor pulls in

bull The motor starts according to the starting method selected for the SMC-3 controller

bull The Running indication appears when the motor is up to speed

10Touch the Stop button to stop the motor

11Unplug the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable from the PVc terminal going to the MicroLogix controller

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 29

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 4: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

Where to Start

Notes

4 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Table of Contents

PrefaceIntroduction 7Conventions Used in This Manual 8Additional Resources 9

Chapter 1Simple Motor Control Integration Introduction 11

Before You Begin 11What You Need 12Follow These Steps 12Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive 13Set up the SMC-3 Controller 16

Chapter 2System Validation and Application Tips

Introduction 19Before You Begin 19What You Need 20Follow These Steps 20Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer 21Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller

Communication 22Navigating the Starters Overview Page 24

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality 25Navigating the Simple Starting Screen 25Understanding Faults 28Test the SMC-3 Controller 29Testing Other Drives and Starters 30

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 5

Table of Contents

Notes

6 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Preface

Introduction This Quick Start is designed to provide a way to implement a connected component for simple motor control By using discrete information (simple on-off signals from contacts) from a PowerFlex 4M drive SMC-3 starter 103T starter or 190E starter this building block shows an example of extracting important basic information about the status of a motor and displaying it on a PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Any or all of these starters or drives can be used The PowerFlex 4M drive is used for this building block but the procedure is very similar for the PowerFlex 4 40 40P and 400 drives

To assist in the design and installation of your system application files and other information are provided on the Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001 The CD provides bills of materials (BOM) CAD drawings for panel layout and wiring control programs Human Machine Interface (HMI) screens and more With these tools and the built-in best-practices design the system designer is free to focus on the design of their machine control and not on design overhead tasks

The beginning of each chapter contains the following information Read these sections carefully before beginning work in each chapter

bull Before You Begin - This section lists the steps that must be completed and decisions that must be made before starting that chapter The chapters in this quick start do not have to be completed in the order in which they appear but this section defines the minimum amount of preparation required before completing the current chapter

bull What You Need - This section lists the tools that are required to complete the steps in the current chapter This includes but is not limited to hardware and software

bull Follow These Steps - This illustrates the steps in the current chapter and identifies which steps are required to complete the examples

IMPORTANT Use this Connected Components Building Block Quick Start in conjunction with the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001

Refer to Additional Resources on page 9 for a listing of Quick Start documents

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 7

Preface

Conventions Used in This Manual

This manual uses the following conventions

Convention Meaning Example

Click Click the left mouse button once Click Edit

Type What you type on the keyboard Type the IP address

Right-click Click the right mouse button once while the cursor is positioned on object or selection Right-click the 1768 Bus icon

Select Using the mouse to highlight a specific option Select the application name

Press Pressing a specific key on the keyboard or the PowerFlex 4M keypad Press Enter

Touch Touching a specific button on the PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Touch the Start button

8 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Preface

Additional Resources

Resource Description

Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001

Provides information on how to select products and gain access to panel and wiring information

Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

Provides files for the Connected Component Building Blocks

Bulletin 150 SMC-3 (1-37A)SMC-Delta (1-32A) Soft Starter Connecting Modules 41053-173-01 (1)

Provides information on the connecting modules with the SMC-3

Bulletin 150 SMC-3 Soft Starter (3-37A) 41053-167-01 (5)

Provides information on installation and settings of the SMC-3

Bulletin 193 E1 Plus Overload Relay 41053-358-01 (3)

Provides information on the installation and settings of the overload

Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Motor Circuit Protectors 21-301-951-01

Provides installation instructions for the MPCB and the MCP

Position Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start publication CC-QS003

Provides information on installing and setting up the PowerFlex 40P drive parameters with the pre-configured RSLogix 500 program that controls your base system including application tips as well as implementing the drive parameter backup and restore functionality

MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers User Manual publication 1763-UM001

Provides information on using the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controller

MicroLogix 1400 User Manual publication 1766-UM001

Provides information on using the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controller

PanelView Component Quick Start Manual publication 2711C-QS001A

Provides information on using the PanelView component

PanelView Component Operator Terminals User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

Provides information on using the PanelView Component HMI Terminals

PowerFlex 4M User Manual publication 22F-UM001

Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 4M Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 4 User Manual publication 22A-UM001 Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 4 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 40P User Manual publication 22D-UM001

Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 40P Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 400 User Manual publication 22C-UM001

Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 400 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

httpwwwabcomdrivesdriveexplorer Provides access to DriveExplorerLite software

httpwwwabcom Provides access to the Allen-Bradley website

httprockwellautomationcomknowledgebase Provides access to self-service support

httpwwwrockwellautomationcomcomponentsconnected

Provides access to the Connected Components website

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 9

Preface

Notes

10 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Chapter 1

Simple Motor Control Integration

Introduction

This chapter provides instructions to configure the PowerFlex 4M drive and SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller

You will configure two parameters in the PowerFlex 4M drive These are the basic parameters that need to be changed from the factory default settings in order to establish proper feedback to the MicroLogix controllers For your machine application there may be other drive parameters that need to be adjusted Consult your drive documentation for information on other drive parameters

You will also set the DIP switches on the SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller necessary to send appropriate discrete feedback to the MicroLogix controller

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed hardware design and installation recommendations as well as software installation

bull Apply power to your drive

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 11

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull One or more of these drives or startersndash PowerFlex 4-class drive (PowerFlex 4M drive is used in this document)

bull For PowerFlex 4M 4 40 and 400 drives there is a built-in keypad and display to edit parameters

bull For PowerFlex 40P drive to edit parameters you need either

- A hand-held interface catalog number 22-HIM-A3

or

- DriveExplorer software installed on the personal computer and a USB interface catalog number 1203-USB

ndash SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBRndash 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TEndash 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to configure the parameters in the drives and set the DIP switches on the SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller

Start

Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive page 13

Set up the SMC-3 Controller page 16

12 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive

Factory-default parameter values allow the drive to be controlled from the integral keypad No programming is required to start stop change direction and control speed directly from the integral keypad

However for this building block you will set parameter P106 [Start Source] for 2-wire control In the example for this building block the PF 4M drive is used in a 2-wire SRC Control (internal sourcing) Non-Reversing mode SRC is the default for a new drive If your drive has been used previously make sure the SNKSRC (SinkSource) switch under the front cover of the PF 4M drive is set to SRC See the PF 4M drive user manual for your specific needs other than shown in this example

In addition you will change parameter t221 [Relay Out Sel] to display lsquoMotorRunningrsquo since this building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive See Testing Other Drives and Starters page 30 for details

Follow this procedure to change parameters P106 [Start Source] and t221 [Relay Out Sel] using the PowerFlex 4M keypad explained below

PowerFlex 4M Keypad

Key Key Name Description

Escapebull Go back one step in Program mode

bull Cancel a change to a parameter value and exit Program mode

Selectbull Advance one step in the programming menu

bull Select a digit when viewing a parameter value

Up arrowbull Scroll through groups and parameters

bull Increase and decrease the value of a flashing digit

Down arrow

Enterbull Advance one step in the programming menu

bull Save a change to a parameter value

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 13

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

1 Press Esc until lsquo00rsquo is displayed

2 Press Sel until the leftmost character is flashing

3 Press the Down arrow until the leftmost character displayed is a flashing P

4 Press Enter

The P stops flashing and the rightmost numeric key is flashing

By default the first P parameter P101 is displayed Pressing the Up arrow increases and pressing the Down arrow decreases the value of the P parameters

5 Press the Up arrow five times to display P106

The current value of parameter P106 is displayed lsquo0rsquo in this case

6 Press Enter

The lsquo0rsquo flashes

7 Press the Up arrow twice to adjust the value to lsquo2rsquo

8 Press Enter

The value is accepted

The lsquo2rsquo should not be flashing any longer Notice that the green status indicator next to the green Start button is now off

9 Press Esc

P106 should be displayed with the lsquo6rsquo flashing

10Press Esc until the P is flashing on the leftmost alphanumeric character

11Press the Up arrow or Down arrow to scroll through the group menu to t

12Press Enter

The lsquo1rsquo flashes

Stop the drive before changing parameter P106

14 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

13Press and hold down the up arrow until you reach lsquo221rsquo

If you go past it push the down arrow until you return to lsquo221rsquo

14Press Enter twice so that lsquo0rsquo is flashing

15Press the up arrow to move to the value lsquo2rsquo

16Press Enter

The value is accepted The lsquo2rsquo should not be flashing any longer Notice that the green status indicator next to the green Start button is now off

17Press Esc

Parameter t221 should now be displayed with the lsquo1rsquo flashing

18Press Esc until lsquo00rsquo is displayed

19Power the drive off until the display goes blank and then power it back on

Your drive is now configured to be controlled by push buttons and communication commands initiated from the MicroLogix controller

As with all building blocks these are examples of getting information back discretely from a product You can change parameter t221 or other settings of the starters and drives to suit your application

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 15

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

Set up the SMC-3 Controller

The SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller needs to be set up for the isolation contactor and for the appropriate settings for the motor Below are the DIP switch settings used by the SMC-3 controller and the steps to change them

TIP The 140M MPCB specified in the BOM for this building block has a trip class of 10 However if you would like to use the overload trip class settings on the SMC-3 controller you can change out the 140M MPCB with the 140M MCP

16 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

1 Set the DIP switch settings to the starting needs of your motor using the chart below

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 17

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

2 Be sure that DIP switch 14 is set to Normal (off)

This will bring in the isolation contactor when the SMC-3 has received the input signal DIP switch 14 will also close the side-mounted NO aux contact when the starter comes up to speed The closure of this aux contact will send the signal back to the MicroLogix controller

3 If changing to an MCP set DIP switches 11 and 12 to the appropriate overload trip class

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

IMPORTANT The 103T starter uses a 140M MCP (Motor Circuit Protector) which uses a separate overload E1 Plus which must be set according to your system needs

The 190E starter the SMC-3 starter and the PF 4M drive must have the overload dial set on the 140M MPCB (Motor Protection Circuit Breakers)

18 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Chapter 2

System Validation and Application Tips

Introduction

In this chapter you validate that communication is occurring as intended between the MicroLogix controller and the individual discrete starters as well as between the MicroLogix controller and the PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Starting and stopping using the PVc terminal entails having the external HOA switch in Auto position In Hand mode the PVc terminal can still read status of the starters and drives but will not have startstop capabilities

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 3 of that document

bull Verify that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 1 of this document

bull Verify that all the devices are connected per the Simple Motor Control CAD wiring diagram on the Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Verify that the MicroLogix controller PowerFlex drive and PVc terminal have power applied to them

19Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 19

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Personal computer with either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox web browser

bull PanelView Component terminal

bull One or more of these drives or starters

bull PowerFlex 4M drive

bull SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBR

bull 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE

bull 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

bull MicroLogix 1100 or 1400 controller

bull Serial cable catalog number 1761-CBL-PM02

bull USB cable catalog number 2711C-CBL-UU02 or comparable

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to verify that communication is occurring between your devices and to test the system

Start

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer page 21

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller

Communication page 22

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality page 25

20 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer

The PanelView Explorer design-time environment is accessed through a web browser by connecting your computer to the PVc terminal with a USB connection Before connecting your computer to the USB port of the PVc terminal you must first install the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver on a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system After installing the driver you can connect the PVc terminal to your computer For details on how to install the driver refer to the PanelView Component Terminal User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

PVc Terminal USB Connections

All PanelView Component terminals support a USB port connection and require a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system and with the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver installed The driver cannot be installed on a computer with Windows 2000 operating system

1 Connect one end of a USB cable to the mini-USB device port on your PVc terminal

2 Connect the other end of the USB cable to a USB port on your personal computer

3 Power up the PVc terminal and the personal computer

PanelView Explorer Startup Window

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 21

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication

The 3-inch monochrome touch screen PanelView Component (PVc) terminal communicates with the MicroLogix controller over the DF1 network The PVc application reads from and writes to the data table of the MicroLogix controller When the PVc application writes to the MicroLogix controller the controller program detects the value change and writes that new value to the appropriate drive soft starter or discrete starter

1 Connect the personal computer to the PVc terminal using a USB cable

2 Connect the PVc terminal to MicroLogix controller using the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable

3 Start either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox 20

4 In the address bar of your browser type the IP address 1692542542 (This is a fixed IP address that the USB port uses)

5 Press Enter to connect your personal computer to the PVc terminal

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02

USB port

USB port

MicroLogix controller

1761-CBL-PM02

22 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

6 Select the application name in the PVc dashboard dialog box and then click Edit

7 In the Edit dialog box click the Communication tab

The following dialog box appears

8 Click Serial under Protocol and select DF1 from the pull-down list

9 Under PanelView Component Settings verify the Station Address is 2

Validate button

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 23

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

10Under Controller Settings

a Accept the default name lsquoPLC-1rsquo

b Select MicroLogix from the Controller Type field

c In the Address field type 1

11Click Validate

12Click Save

13Click Switch to PanelView Explorer Startup

14 In the Application Dashboard window select the Simple Starting Building Block application

15Click Run to run the application

Navigating the Starters Overview Page

When the PVc application is running any drive or starter that is enabled is shown on the Starters Overview screen as being lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo or lsquoFaultrsquo To ease the use of this program by the OEM the header for the starter is left generic for the ability to change starters without the need to change the PVc first page To change the buttons themselves please see the PanelView Component HMI Terminals user manual

bull lsquoM1rsquo is designated for the SMC-3 controller

bull lsquoM2rsquo is designated for the 103T starter

bull lsquoM3rsquo is designated for the PF 4M drive

bull lsquoM4rsquo is designated for the 190E starter

24 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

bull Stopped indicates the starter is stopped

bull 140M On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull Starting (not shown) indicates the starter or drive is starting

bull Running indicates that motor is running based on feedback from the starter or drive

bull Fault indicates that there is an overload short circuit or other fault the starter has detected

Touching anywhere on Stopped 140M On Running Fault or M takes you to the individual starter screens regardless of the status shown

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality

Now that the PVc terminal is successfully communicating with the MicroLogix controller you are ready to test the Simple Starting functionality

Navigating the Simple Starting Screen

Touch any of the MTR or M buttons on the Starters Overview screen to get to each individual starter screen such as these for the SMC-3 and VFD starter screens

TIP At this point you may choose to edit the Starters Overview screen and delete any buttons and status displays that are associated with non-existing starters or drives

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 25

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

The in the top-right corner exits the application and goes to the PVc Terminal Starters Overview screen

The 190E and 103T screens are similar to that for the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the fault button on the starter screen

The SMC-3 screen shows the following states

The right column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Start is a momentary start button which appears when the starterdrive is in Auto and the 140M is Ready Touching this button starts the starter or drive

bull Stop is also a momentary button Touching this button stops the starterdrive

If the HOA (Hand Off Auto) is not in Auto the Start and Stop buttons will not appear nor will they appear without a 3 Ph On signal In this building block a signal of lsquo1rsquo back to the PLC indicates an Auto position a signal of lsquo0rsquo back indicates a hand or off position You can add an additional contact block to the HOA for the hand position and feedback to the PLC to give that status also

The center column of the SMC-3 starter screen indicates the following

bull 3 Ph On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull 3 Ph Off indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOffrsquo position

bull Stopped indicates the SMC-3 controller is stopped

bull Starting indicates the motor is starting

bull At Speed indicates the motor is running and is at speed

bull Start Fail indicates the starter or drive received a start signal but did not start within the time set in the RSLogix program

CausesRemedies When getting a Start Fail indication check the starter drive andor motor for wiring issues or damage In addition the Start Fail indication may occur due to too short a time for the Timer On Delay in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller See Timer On Delay below

Reset procedure To reset the Start Fail on the PVc terminal when using the SMC-3 controller or the 103T or 190E starters turn the front knob on the 140M MPCB or MCP to off and then back to on to clear the indication To clear this indication on the drive press the stop button on the either on the PVc terminal in Auto mode or press the stop button in Hand mode

26 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Timer On Delay The timer is started when the Start signal is sent to the starter or drive At the end of the timing a comparison is done to see if the motor has actually started The time duration for the Timer On Delay is fully adjustable in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller For this building block the timers are set to 35 seconds for the SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive and 5 seconds for the 103T and 190E starters Check rung 3 or 4 of the default program for the timer

The left column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Fault indicates that the starter has detected a fault

Not all starters have this capability

The SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive can provide this information When the fault indication appears on the SMC-3 controller touching Fault takes you to the listed fault screen for the controller

The PF 4M drive VFD screen always has the Fault button displayed If a fault appears on the PF 4M drive the fault code is displayed on the drive You can press the Fault button on the PVc terminal to view the fault description You can scroll through the fault list just as with the SMC-3 controller

The fault indication on the 103T or 190E starter screen does not have this fault screen functionality since these starters do not provide additional information

bull OVLD indicates that there is an overload detected by the starter

bull SC indicates that there is a short circuit detected by the starter

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 27

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Understanding Faults

The Fault button is always present on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal This Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is merely a GoTo button and does not by itself indicate a fault condition with the PF 4M drive The SMC-3 controller however sends a signal back to the PVc terminal indicating a fault with the controller The Fault GOTO button is then displayed on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo screen on the PVc terminal Pressing the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo Fault screen or on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault screen takes you to the individual fault screens where you can scroll through to find the fault indicated on the PF 4M drive or the SMC-3 controller and its corresponding description

rsquoVFDrsquo Fault Screen (for PF 4M Drive)

lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault Screen

In both cases look at the fault code on the PF 4M drive or SMC-3 controller

bull For the PF 4M drive you must view the fault code on the drive Press the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal to view the fault listing Locate the specific fault for the drive To get a deeper description of the fault consult the user manual for the drive

bull The SMC-3 Controller will have a flashing LED and you need to count the number of flashes Then on the PVc terminal scroll through the fault listing screen and identify the fault using the number of flashes for identification

The button in the lower-right corner of the fault listings takes you back to the SMC-3 or VFD starter screen

28 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Test the SMC-3 Controller

Follow this procedure to test the SMC-3 controller

1 Make sure the motor is disconnected from the load for ease of testing in this procedure

2 Verify that the external HOA is in Auto mode

3 Verify that the 140M is in the ON position (I)

This enables the 3-phase power to the starter

4 Verify that there is no Fault OVLD or SC state If there is check the PVc terminal for the error condition The screen should look like this

5 Verify that the 3 Ph On indicator is present

6 Verify that the Start and Stop buttons are present

7 Make sure that the SMC-3 controller has the proper DIP switch setting for your application (for example ramp time current limit or soft start)

8 Touch the Start button

9 Verify the following

bull The isolation contactor pulls in

bull The motor starts according to the starting method selected for the SMC-3 controller

bull The Running indication appears when the motor is up to speed

10Touch the Stop button to stop the motor

11Unplug the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable from the PVc terminal going to the MicroLogix controller

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 29

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 5: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

Table of Contents

PrefaceIntroduction 7Conventions Used in This Manual 8Additional Resources 9

Chapter 1Simple Motor Control Integration Introduction 11

Before You Begin 11What You Need 12Follow These Steps 12Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive 13Set up the SMC-3 Controller 16

Chapter 2System Validation and Application Tips

Introduction 19Before You Begin 19What You Need 20Follow These Steps 20Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer 21Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller

Communication 22Navigating the Starters Overview Page 24

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality 25Navigating the Simple Starting Screen 25Understanding Faults 28Test the SMC-3 Controller 29Testing Other Drives and Starters 30

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 5

Table of Contents

Notes

6 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Preface

Introduction This Quick Start is designed to provide a way to implement a connected component for simple motor control By using discrete information (simple on-off signals from contacts) from a PowerFlex 4M drive SMC-3 starter 103T starter or 190E starter this building block shows an example of extracting important basic information about the status of a motor and displaying it on a PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Any or all of these starters or drives can be used The PowerFlex 4M drive is used for this building block but the procedure is very similar for the PowerFlex 4 40 40P and 400 drives

To assist in the design and installation of your system application files and other information are provided on the Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001 The CD provides bills of materials (BOM) CAD drawings for panel layout and wiring control programs Human Machine Interface (HMI) screens and more With these tools and the built-in best-practices design the system designer is free to focus on the design of their machine control and not on design overhead tasks

The beginning of each chapter contains the following information Read these sections carefully before beginning work in each chapter

bull Before You Begin - This section lists the steps that must be completed and decisions that must be made before starting that chapter The chapters in this quick start do not have to be completed in the order in which they appear but this section defines the minimum amount of preparation required before completing the current chapter

bull What You Need - This section lists the tools that are required to complete the steps in the current chapter This includes but is not limited to hardware and software

bull Follow These Steps - This illustrates the steps in the current chapter and identifies which steps are required to complete the examples

IMPORTANT Use this Connected Components Building Block Quick Start in conjunction with the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001

Refer to Additional Resources on page 9 for a listing of Quick Start documents

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 7

Preface

Conventions Used in This Manual

This manual uses the following conventions

Convention Meaning Example

Click Click the left mouse button once Click Edit

Type What you type on the keyboard Type the IP address

Right-click Click the right mouse button once while the cursor is positioned on object or selection Right-click the 1768 Bus icon

Select Using the mouse to highlight a specific option Select the application name

Press Pressing a specific key on the keyboard or the PowerFlex 4M keypad Press Enter

Touch Touching a specific button on the PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Touch the Start button

8 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Preface

Additional Resources

Resource Description

Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001

Provides information on how to select products and gain access to panel and wiring information

Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

Provides files for the Connected Component Building Blocks

Bulletin 150 SMC-3 (1-37A)SMC-Delta (1-32A) Soft Starter Connecting Modules 41053-173-01 (1)

Provides information on the connecting modules with the SMC-3

Bulletin 150 SMC-3 Soft Starter (3-37A) 41053-167-01 (5)

Provides information on installation and settings of the SMC-3

Bulletin 193 E1 Plus Overload Relay 41053-358-01 (3)

Provides information on the installation and settings of the overload

Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Motor Circuit Protectors 21-301-951-01

Provides installation instructions for the MPCB and the MCP

Position Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start publication CC-QS003

Provides information on installing and setting up the PowerFlex 40P drive parameters with the pre-configured RSLogix 500 program that controls your base system including application tips as well as implementing the drive parameter backup and restore functionality

MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers User Manual publication 1763-UM001

Provides information on using the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controller

MicroLogix 1400 User Manual publication 1766-UM001

Provides information on using the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controller

PanelView Component Quick Start Manual publication 2711C-QS001A

Provides information on using the PanelView component

PanelView Component Operator Terminals User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

Provides information on using the PanelView Component HMI Terminals

PowerFlex 4M User Manual publication 22F-UM001

Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 4M Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 4 User Manual publication 22A-UM001 Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 4 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 40P User Manual publication 22D-UM001

Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 40P Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 400 User Manual publication 22C-UM001

Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 400 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

httpwwwabcomdrivesdriveexplorer Provides access to DriveExplorerLite software

httpwwwabcom Provides access to the Allen-Bradley website

httprockwellautomationcomknowledgebase Provides access to self-service support

httpwwwrockwellautomationcomcomponentsconnected

Provides access to the Connected Components website

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 9

Preface

Notes

10 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Chapter 1

Simple Motor Control Integration

Introduction

This chapter provides instructions to configure the PowerFlex 4M drive and SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller

You will configure two parameters in the PowerFlex 4M drive These are the basic parameters that need to be changed from the factory default settings in order to establish proper feedback to the MicroLogix controllers For your machine application there may be other drive parameters that need to be adjusted Consult your drive documentation for information on other drive parameters

You will also set the DIP switches on the SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller necessary to send appropriate discrete feedback to the MicroLogix controller

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed hardware design and installation recommendations as well as software installation

bull Apply power to your drive

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 11

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull One or more of these drives or startersndash PowerFlex 4-class drive (PowerFlex 4M drive is used in this document)

bull For PowerFlex 4M 4 40 and 400 drives there is a built-in keypad and display to edit parameters

bull For PowerFlex 40P drive to edit parameters you need either

- A hand-held interface catalog number 22-HIM-A3

or

- DriveExplorer software installed on the personal computer and a USB interface catalog number 1203-USB

ndash SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBRndash 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TEndash 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to configure the parameters in the drives and set the DIP switches on the SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller

Start

Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive page 13

Set up the SMC-3 Controller page 16

12 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive

Factory-default parameter values allow the drive to be controlled from the integral keypad No programming is required to start stop change direction and control speed directly from the integral keypad

However for this building block you will set parameter P106 [Start Source] for 2-wire control In the example for this building block the PF 4M drive is used in a 2-wire SRC Control (internal sourcing) Non-Reversing mode SRC is the default for a new drive If your drive has been used previously make sure the SNKSRC (SinkSource) switch under the front cover of the PF 4M drive is set to SRC See the PF 4M drive user manual for your specific needs other than shown in this example

In addition you will change parameter t221 [Relay Out Sel] to display lsquoMotorRunningrsquo since this building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive See Testing Other Drives and Starters page 30 for details

Follow this procedure to change parameters P106 [Start Source] and t221 [Relay Out Sel] using the PowerFlex 4M keypad explained below

PowerFlex 4M Keypad

Key Key Name Description

Escapebull Go back one step in Program mode

bull Cancel a change to a parameter value and exit Program mode

Selectbull Advance one step in the programming menu

bull Select a digit when viewing a parameter value

Up arrowbull Scroll through groups and parameters

bull Increase and decrease the value of a flashing digit

Down arrow

Enterbull Advance one step in the programming menu

bull Save a change to a parameter value

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 13

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

1 Press Esc until lsquo00rsquo is displayed

2 Press Sel until the leftmost character is flashing

3 Press the Down arrow until the leftmost character displayed is a flashing P

4 Press Enter

The P stops flashing and the rightmost numeric key is flashing

By default the first P parameter P101 is displayed Pressing the Up arrow increases and pressing the Down arrow decreases the value of the P parameters

5 Press the Up arrow five times to display P106

The current value of parameter P106 is displayed lsquo0rsquo in this case

6 Press Enter

The lsquo0rsquo flashes

7 Press the Up arrow twice to adjust the value to lsquo2rsquo

8 Press Enter

The value is accepted

The lsquo2rsquo should not be flashing any longer Notice that the green status indicator next to the green Start button is now off

9 Press Esc

P106 should be displayed with the lsquo6rsquo flashing

10Press Esc until the P is flashing on the leftmost alphanumeric character

11Press the Up arrow or Down arrow to scroll through the group menu to t

12Press Enter

The lsquo1rsquo flashes

Stop the drive before changing parameter P106

14 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

13Press and hold down the up arrow until you reach lsquo221rsquo

If you go past it push the down arrow until you return to lsquo221rsquo

14Press Enter twice so that lsquo0rsquo is flashing

15Press the up arrow to move to the value lsquo2rsquo

16Press Enter

The value is accepted The lsquo2rsquo should not be flashing any longer Notice that the green status indicator next to the green Start button is now off

17Press Esc

Parameter t221 should now be displayed with the lsquo1rsquo flashing

18Press Esc until lsquo00rsquo is displayed

19Power the drive off until the display goes blank and then power it back on

Your drive is now configured to be controlled by push buttons and communication commands initiated from the MicroLogix controller

As with all building blocks these are examples of getting information back discretely from a product You can change parameter t221 or other settings of the starters and drives to suit your application

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 15

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

Set up the SMC-3 Controller

The SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller needs to be set up for the isolation contactor and for the appropriate settings for the motor Below are the DIP switch settings used by the SMC-3 controller and the steps to change them

TIP The 140M MPCB specified in the BOM for this building block has a trip class of 10 However if you would like to use the overload trip class settings on the SMC-3 controller you can change out the 140M MPCB with the 140M MCP

16 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

1 Set the DIP switch settings to the starting needs of your motor using the chart below

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 17

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

2 Be sure that DIP switch 14 is set to Normal (off)

This will bring in the isolation contactor when the SMC-3 has received the input signal DIP switch 14 will also close the side-mounted NO aux contact when the starter comes up to speed The closure of this aux contact will send the signal back to the MicroLogix controller

3 If changing to an MCP set DIP switches 11 and 12 to the appropriate overload trip class

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

IMPORTANT The 103T starter uses a 140M MCP (Motor Circuit Protector) which uses a separate overload E1 Plus which must be set according to your system needs

The 190E starter the SMC-3 starter and the PF 4M drive must have the overload dial set on the 140M MPCB (Motor Protection Circuit Breakers)

18 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Chapter 2

System Validation and Application Tips

Introduction

In this chapter you validate that communication is occurring as intended between the MicroLogix controller and the individual discrete starters as well as between the MicroLogix controller and the PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Starting and stopping using the PVc terminal entails having the external HOA switch in Auto position In Hand mode the PVc terminal can still read status of the starters and drives but will not have startstop capabilities

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 3 of that document

bull Verify that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 1 of this document

bull Verify that all the devices are connected per the Simple Motor Control CAD wiring diagram on the Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Verify that the MicroLogix controller PowerFlex drive and PVc terminal have power applied to them

19Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 19

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Personal computer with either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox web browser

bull PanelView Component terminal

bull One or more of these drives or starters

bull PowerFlex 4M drive

bull SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBR

bull 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE

bull 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

bull MicroLogix 1100 or 1400 controller

bull Serial cable catalog number 1761-CBL-PM02

bull USB cable catalog number 2711C-CBL-UU02 or comparable

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to verify that communication is occurring between your devices and to test the system

Start

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer page 21

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller

Communication page 22

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality page 25

20 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer

The PanelView Explorer design-time environment is accessed through a web browser by connecting your computer to the PVc terminal with a USB connection Before connecting your computer to the USB port of the PVc terminal you must first install the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver on a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system After installing the driver you can connect the PVc terminal to your computer For details on how to install the driver refer to the PanelView Component Terminal User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

PVc Terminal USB Connections

All PanelView Component terminals support a USB port connection and require a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system and with the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver installed The driver cannot be installed on a computer with Windows 2000 operating system

1 Connect one end of a USB cable to the mini-USB device port on your PVc terminal

2 Connect the other end of the USB cable to a USB port on your personal computer

3 Power up the PVc terminal and the personal computer

PanelView Explorer Startup Window

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 21

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication

The 3-inch monochrome touch screen PanelView Component (PVc) terminal communicates with the MicroLogix controller over the DF1 network The PVc application reads from and writes to the data table of the MicroLogix controller When the PVc application writes to the MicroLogix controller the controller program detects the value change and writes that new value to the appropriate drive soft starter or discrete starter

1 Connect the personal computer to the PVc terminal using a USB cable

2 Connect the PVc terminal to MicroLogix controller using the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable

3 Start either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox 20

4 In the address bar of your browser type the IP address 1692542542 (This is a fixed IP address that the USB port uses)

5 Press Enter to connect your personal computer to the PVc terminal

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02

USB port

USB port

MicroLogix controller

1761-CBL-PM02

22 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

6 Select the application name in the PVc dashboard dialog box and then click Edit

7 In the Edit dialog box click the Communication tab

The following dialog box appears

8 Click Serial under Protocol and select DF1 from the pull-down list

9 Under PanelView Component Settings verify the Station Address is 2

Validate button

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 23

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

10Under Controller Settings

a Accept the default name lsquoPLC-1rsquo

b Select MicroLogix from the Controller Type field

c In the Address field type 1

11Click Validate

12Click Save

13Click Switch to PanelView Explorer Startup

14 In the Application Dashboard window select the Simple Starting Building Block application

15Click Run to run the application

Navigating the Starters Overview Page

When the PVc application is running any drive or starter that is enabled is shown on the Starters Overview screen as being lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo or lsquoFaultrsquo To ease the use of this program by the OEM the header for the starter is left generic for the ability to change starters without the need to change the PVc first page To change the buttons themselves please see the PanelView Component HMI Terminals user manual

bull lsquoM1rsquo is designated for the SMC-3 controller

bull lsquoM2rsquo is designated for the 103T starter

bull lsquoM3rsquo is designated for the PF 4M drive

bull lsquoM4rsquo is designated for the 190E starter

24 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

bull Stopped indicates the starter is stopped

bull 140M On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull Starting (not shown) indicates the starter or drive is starting

bull Running indicates that motor is running based on feedback from the starter or drive

bull Fault indicates that there is an overload short circuit or other fault the starter has detected

Touching anywhere on Stopped 140M On Running Fault or M takes you to the individual starter screens regardless of the status shown

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality

Now that the PVc terminal is successfully communicating with the MicroLogix controller you are ready to test the Simple Starting functionality

Navigating the Simple Starting Screen

Touch any of the MTR or M buttons on the Starters Overview screen to get to each individual starter screen such as these for the SMC-3 and VFD starter screens

TIP At this point you may choose to edit the Starters Overview screen and delete any buttons and status displays that are associated with non-existing starters or drives

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 25

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

The in the top-right corner exits the application and goes to the PVc Terminal Starters Overview screen

The 190E and 103T screens are similar to that for the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the fault button on the starter screen

The SMC-3 screen shows the following states

The right column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Start is a momentary start button which appears when the starterdrive is in Auto and the 140M is Ready Touching this button starts the starter or drive

bull Stop is also a momentary button Touching this button stops the starterdrive

If the HOA (Hand Off Auto) is not in Auto the Start and Stop buttons will not appear nor will they appear without a 3 Ph On signal In this building block a signal of lsquo1rsquo back to the PLC indicates an Auto position a signal of lsquo0rsquo back indicates a hand or off position You can add an additional contact block to the HOA for the hand position and feedback to the PLC to give that status also

The center column of the SMC-3 starter screen indicates the following

bull 3 Ph On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull 3 Ph Off indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOffrsquo position

bull Stopped indicates the SMC-3 controller is stopped

bull Starting indicates the motor is starting

bull At Speed indicates the motor is running and is at speed

bull Start Fail indicates the starter or drive received a start signal but did not start within the time set in the RSLogix program

CausesRemedies When getting a Start Fail indication check the starter drive andor motor for wiring issues or damage In addition the Start Fail indication may occur due to too short a time for the Timer On Delay in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller See Timer On Delay below

Reset procedure To reset the Start Fail on the PVc terminal when using the SMC-3 controller or the 103T or 190E starters turn the front knob on the 140M MPCB or MCP to off and then back to on to clear the indication To clear this indication on the drive press the stop button on the either on the PVc terminal in Auto mode or press the stop button in Hand mode

26 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Timer On Delay The timer is started when the Start signal is sent to the starter or drive At the end of the timing a comparison is done to see if the motor has actually started The time duration for the Timer On Delay is fully adjustable in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller For this building block the timers are set to 35 seconds for the SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive and 5 seconds for the 103T and 190E starters Check rung 3 or 4 of the default program for the timer

The left column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Fault indicates that the starter has detected a fault

Not all starters have this capability

The SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive can provide this information When the fault indication appears on the SMC-3 controller touching Fault takes you to the listed fault screen for the controller

The PF 4M drive VFD screen always has the Fault button displayed If a fault appears on the PF 4M drive the fault code is displayed on the drive You can press the Fault button on the PVc terminal to view the fault description You can scroll through the fault list just as with the SMC-3 controller

The fault indication on the 103T or 190E starter screen does not have this fault screen functionality since these starters do not provide additional information

bull OVLD indicates that there is an overload detected by the starter

bull SC indicates that there is a short circuit detected by the starter

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 27

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Understanding Faults

The Fault button is always present on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal This Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is merely a GoTo button and does not by itself indicate a fault condition with the PF 4M drive The SMC-3 controller however sends a signal back to the PVc terminal indicating a fault with the controller The Fault GOTO button is then displayed on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo screen on the PVc terminal Pressing the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo Fault screen or on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault screen takes you to the individual fault screens where you can scroll through to find the fault indicated on the PF 4M drive or the SMC-3 controller and its corresponding description

rsquoVFDrsquo Fault Screen (for PF 4M Drive)

lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault Screen

In both cases look at the fault code on the PF 4M drive or SMC-3 controller

bull For the PF 4M drive you must view the fault code on the drive Press the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal to view the fault listing Locate the specific fault for the drive To get a deeper description of the fault consult the user manual for the drive

bull The SMC-3 Controller will have a flashing LED and you need to count the number of flashes Then on the PVc terminal scroll through the fault listing screen and identify the fault using the number of flashes for identification

The button in the lower-right corner of the fault listings takes you back to the SMC-3 or VFD starter screen

28 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Test the SMC-3 Controller

Follow this procedure to test the SMC-3 controller

1 Make sure the motor is disconnected from the load for ease of testing in this procedure

2 Verify that the external HOA is in Auto mode

3 Verify that the 140M is in the ON position (I)

This enables the 3-phase power to the starter

4 Verify that there is no Fault OVLD or SC state If there is check the PVc terminal for the error condition The screen should look like this

5 Verify that the 3 Ph On indicator is present

6 Verify that the Start and Stop buttons are present

7 Make sure that the SMC-3 controller has the proper DIP switch setting for your application (for example ramp time current limit or soft start)

8 Touch the Start button

9 Verify the following

bull The isolation contactor pulls in

bull The motor starts according to the starting method selected for the SMC-3 controller

bull The Running indication appears when the motor is up to speed

10Touch the Stop button to stop the motor

11Unplug the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable from the PVc terminal going to the MicroLogix controller

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 29

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 6: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

Table of Contents

Notes

6 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Preface

Introduction This Quick Start is designed to provide a way to implement a connected component for simple motor control By using discrete information (simple on-off signals from contacts) from a PowerFlex 4M drive SMC-3 starter 103T starter or 190E starter this building block shows an example of extracting important basic information about the status of a motor and displaying it on a PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Any or all of these starters or drives can be used The PowerFlex 4M drive is used for this building block but the procedure is very similar for the PowerFlex 4 40 40P and 400 drives

To assist in the design and installation of your system application files and other information are provided on the Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001 The CD provides bills of materials (BOM) CAD drawings for panel layout and wiring control programs Human Machine Interface (HMI) screens and more With these tools and the built-in best-practices design the system designer is free to focus on the design of their machine control and not on design overhead tasks

The beginning of each chapter contains the following information Read these sections carefully before beginning work in each chapter

bull Before You Begin - This section lists the steps that must be completed and decisions that must be made before starting that chapter The chapters in this quick start do not have to be completed in the order in which they appear but this section defines the minimum amount of preparation required before completing the current chapter

bull What You Need - This section lists the tools that are required to complete the steps in the current chapter This includes but is not limited to hardware and software

bull Follow These Steps - This illustrates the steps in the current chapter and identifies which steps are required to complete the examples

IMPORTANT Use this Connected Components Building Block Quick Start in conjunction with the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001

Refer to Additional Resources on page 9 for a listing of Quick Start documents

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 7

Preface

Conventions Used in This Manual

This manual uses the following conventions

Convention Meaning Example

Click Click the left mouse button once Click Edit

Type What you type on the keyboard Type the IP address

Right-click Click the right mouse button once while the cursor is positioned on object or selection Right-click the 1768 Bus icon

Select Using the mouse to highlight a specific option Select the application name

Press Pressing a specific key on the keyboard or the PowerFlex 4M keypad Press Enter

Touch Touching a specific button on the PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Touch the Start button

8 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Preface

Additional Resources

Resource Description

Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001

Provides information on how to select products and gain access to panel and wiring information

Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

Provides files for the Connected Component Building Blocks

Bulletin 150 SMC-3 (1-37A)SMC-Delta (1-32A) Soft Starter Connecting Modules 41053-173-01 (1)

Provides information on the connecting modules with the SMC-3

Bulletin 150 SMC-3 Soft Starter (3-37A) 41053-167-01 (5)

Provides information on installation and settings of the SMC-3

Bulletin 193 E1 Plus Overload Relay 41053-358-01 (3)

Provides information on the installation and settings of the overload

Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Motor Circuit Protectors 21-301-951-01

Provides installation instructions for the MPCB and the MCP

Position Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start publication CC-QS003

Provides information on installing and setting up the PowerFlex 40P drive parameters with the pre-configured RSLogix 500 program that controls your base system including application tips as well as implementing the drive parameter backup and restore functionality

MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers User Manual publication 1763-UM001

Provides information on using the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controller

MicroLogix 1400 User Manual publication 1766-UM001

Provides information on using the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controller

PanelView Component Quick Start Manual publication 2711C-QS001A

Provides information on using the PanelView component

PanelView Component Operator Terminals User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

Provides information on using the PanelView Component HMI Terminals

PowerFlex 4M User Manual publication 22F-UM001

Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 4M Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 4 User Manual publication 22A-UM001 Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 4 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 40P User Manual publication 22D-UM001

Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 40P Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 400 User Manual publication 22C-UM001

Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 400 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

httpwwwabcomdrivesdriveexplorer Provides access to DriveExplorerLite software

httpwwwabcom Provides access to the Allen-Bradley website

httprockwellautomationcomknowledgebase Provides access to self-service support

httpwwwrockwellautomationcomcomponentsconnected

Provides access to the Connected Components website

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 9

Preface

Notes

10 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Chapter 1

Simple Motor Control Integration

Introduction

This chapter provides instructions to configure the PowerFlex 4M drive and SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller

You will configure two parameters in the PowerFlex 4M drive These are the basic parameters that need to be changed from the factory default settings in order to establish proper feedback to the MicroLogix controllers For your machine application there may be other drive parameters that need to be adjusted Consult your drive documentation for information on other drive parameters

You will also set the DIP switches on the SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller necessary to send appropriate discrete feedback to the MicroLogix controller

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed hardware design and installation recommendations as well as software installation

bull Apply power to your drive

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 11

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull One or more of these drives or startersndash PowerFlex 4-class drive (PowerFlex 4M drive is used in this document)

bull For PowerFlex 4M 4 40 and 400 drives there is a built-in keypad and display to edit parameters

bull For PowerFlex 40P drive to edit parameters you need either

- A hand-held interface catalog number 22-HIM-A3

or

- DriveExplorer software installed on the personal computer and a USB interface catalog number 1203-USB

ndash SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBRndash 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TEndash 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to configure the parameters in the drives and set the DIP switches on the SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller

Start

Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive page 13

Set up the SMC-3 Controller page 16

12 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive

Factory-default parameter values allow the drive to be controlled from the integral keypad No programming is required to start stop change direction and control speed directly from the integral keypad

However for this building block you will set parameter P106 [Start Source] for 2-wire control In the example for this building block the PF 4M drive is used in a 2-wire SRC Control (internal sourcing) Non-Reversing mode SRC is the default for a new drive If your drive has been used previously make sure the SNKSRC (SinkSource) switch under the front cover of the PF 4M drive is set to SRC See the PF 4M drive user manual for your specific needs other than shown in this example

In addition you will change parameter t221 [Relay Out Sel] to display lsquoMotorRunningrsquo since this building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive See Testing Other Drives and Starters page 30 for details

Follow this procedure to change parameters P106 [Start Source] and t221 [Relay Out Sel] using the PowerFlex 4M keypad explained below

PowerFlex 4M Keypad

Key Key Name Description

Escapebull Go back one step in Program mode

bull Cancel a change to a parameter value and exit Program mode

Selectbull Advance one step in the programming menu

bull Select a digit when viewing a parameter value

Up arrowbull Scroll through groups and parameters

bull Increase and decrease the value of a flashing digit

Down arrow

Enterbull Advance one step in the programming menu

bull Save a change to a parameter value

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 13

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

1 Press Esc until lsquo00rsquo is displayed

2 Press Sel until the leftmost character is flashing

3 Press the Down arrow until the leftmost character displayed is a flashing P

4 Press Enter

The P stops flashing and the rightmost numeric key is flashing

By default the first P parameter P101 is displayed Pressing the Up arrow increases and pressing the Down arrow decreases the value of the P parameters

5 Press the Up arrow five times to display P106

The current value of parameter P106 is displayed lsquo0rsquo in this case

6 Press Enter

The lsquo0rsquo flashes

7 Press the Up arrow twice to adjust the value to lsquo2rsquo

8 Press Enter

The value is accepted

The lsquo2rsquo should not be flashing any longer Notice that the green status indicator next to the green Start button is now off

9 Press Esc

P106 should be displayed with the lsquo6rsquo flashing

10Press Esc until the P is flashing on the leftmost alphanumeric character

11Press the Up arrow or Down arrow to scroll through the group menu to t

12Press Enter

The lsquo1rsquo flashes

Stop the drive before changing parameter P106

14 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

13Press and hold down the up arrow until you reach lsquo221rsquo

If you go past it push the down arrow until you return to lsquo221rsquo

14Press Enter twice so that lsquo0rsquo is flashing

15Press the up arrow to move to the value lsquo2rsquo

16Press Enter

The value is accepted The lsquo2rsquo should not be flashing any longer Notice that the green status indicator next to the green Start button is now off

17Press Esc

Parameter t221 should now be displayed with the lsquo1rsquo flashing

18Press Esc until lsquo00rsquo is displayed

19Power the drive off until the display goes blank and then power it back on

Your drive is now configured to be controlled by push buttons and communication commands initiated from the MicroLogix controller

As with all building blocks these are examples of getting information back discretely from a product You can change parameter t221 or other settings of the starters and drives to suit your application

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 15

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

Set up the SMC-3 Controller

The SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller needs to be set up for the isolation contactor and for the appropriate settings for the motor Below are the DIP switch settings used by the SMC-3 controller and the steps to change them

TIP The 140M MPCB specified in the BOM for this building block has a trip class of 10 However if you would like to use the overload trip class settings on the SMC-3 controller you can change out the 140M MPCB with the 140M MCP

16 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

1 Set the DIP switch settings to the starting needs of your motor using the chart below

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 17

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

2 Be sure that DIP switch 14 is set to Normal (off)

This will bring in the isolation contactor when the SMC-3 has received the input signal DIP switch 14 will also close the side-mounted NO aux contact when the starter comes up to speed The closure of this aux contact will send the signal back to the MicroLogix controller

3 If changing to an MCP set DIP switches 11 and 12 to the appropriate overload trip class

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

IMPORTANT The 103T starter uses a 140M MCP (Motor Circuit Protector) which uses a separate overload E1 Plus which must be set according to your system needs

The 190E starter the SMC-3 starter and the PF 4M drive must have the overload dial set on the 140M MPCB (Motor Protection Circuit Breakers)

18 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Chapter 2

System Validation and Application Tips

Introduction

In this chapter you validate that communication is occurring as intended between the MicroLogix controller and the individual discrete starters as well as between the MicroLogix controller and the PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Starting and stopping using the PVc terminal entails having the external HOA switch in Auto position In Hand mode the PVc terminal can still read status of the starters and drives but will not have startstop capabilities

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 3 of that document

bull Verify that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 1 of this document

bull Verify that all the devices are connected per the Simple Motor Control CAD wiring diagram on the Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Verify that the MicroLogix controller PowerFlex drive and PVc terminal have power applied to them

19Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 19

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Personal computer with either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox web browser

bull PanelView Component terminal

bull One or more of these drives or starters

bull PowerFlex 4M drive

bull SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBR

bull 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE

bull 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

bull MicroLogix 1100 or 1400 controller

bull Serial cable catalog number 1761-CBL-PM02

bull USB cable catalog number 2711C-CBL-UU02 or comparable

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to verify that communication is occurring between your devices and to test the system

Start

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer page 21

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller

Communication page 22

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality page 25

20 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer

The PanelView Explorer design-time environment is accessed through a web browser by connecting your computer to the PVc terminal with a USB connection Before connecting your computer to the USB port of the PVc terminal you must first install the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver on a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system After installing the driver you can connect the PVc terminal to your computer For details on how to install the driver refer to the PanelView Component Terminal User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

PVc Terminal USB Connections

All PanelView Component terminals support a USB port connection and require a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system and with the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver installed The driver cannot be installed on a computer with Windows 2000 operating system

1 Connect one end of a USB cable to the mini-USB device port on your PVc terminal

2 Connect the other end of the USB cable to a USB port on your personal computer

3 Power up the PVc terminal and the personal computer

PanelView Explorer Startup Window

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 21

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication

The 3-inch monochrome touch screen PanelView Component (PVc) terminal communicates with the MicroLogix controller over the DF1 network The PVc application reads from and writes to the data table of the MicroLogix controller When the PVc application writes to the MicroLogix controller the controller program detects the value change and writes that new value to the appropriate drive soft starter or discrete starter

1 Connect the personal computer to the PVc terminal using a USB cable

2 Connect the PVc terminal to MicroLogix controller using the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable

3 Start either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox 20

4 In the address bar of your browser type the IP address 1692542542 (This is a fixed IP address that the USB port uses)

5 Press Enter to connect your personal computer to the PVc terminal

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02

USB port

USB port

MicroLogix controller

1761-CBL-PM02

22 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

6 Select the application name in the PVc dashboard dialog box and then click Edit

7 In the Edit dialog box click the Communication tab

The following dialog box appears

8 Click Serial under Protocol and select DF1 from the pull-down list

9 Under PanelView Component Settings verify the Station Address is 2

Validate button

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 23

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

10Under Controller Settings

a Accept the default name lsquoPLC-1rsquo

b Select MicroLogix from the Controller Type field

c In the Address field type 1

11Click Validate

12Click Save

13Click Switch to PanelView Explorer Startup

14 In the Application Dashboard window select the Simple Starting Building Block application

15Click Run to run the application

Navigating the Starters Overview Page

When the PVc application is running any drive or starter that is enabled is shown on the Starters Overview screen as being lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo or lsquoFaultrsquo To ease the use of this program by the OEM the header for the starter is left generic for the ability to change starters without the need to change the PVc first page To change the buttons themselves please see the PanelView Component HMI Terminals user manual

bull lsquoM1rsquo is designated for the SMC-3 controller

bull lsquoM2rsquo is designated for the 103T starter

bull lsquoM3rsquo is designated for the PF 4M drive

bull lsquoM4rsquo is designated for the 190E starter

24 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

bull Stopped indicates the starter is stopped

bull 140M On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull Starting (not shown) indicates the starter or drive is starting

bull Running indicates that motor is running based on feedback from the starter or drive

bull Fault indicates that there is an overload short circuit or other fault the starter has detected

Touching anywhere on Stopped 140M On Running Fault or M takes you to the individual starter screens regardless of the status shown

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality

Now that the PVc terminal is successfully communicating with the MicroLogix controller you are ready to test the Simple Starting functionality

Navigating the Simple Starting Screen

Touch any of the MTR or M buttons on the Starters Overview screen to get to each individual starter screen such as these for the SMC-3 and VFD starter screens

TIP At this point you may choose to edit the Starters Overview screen and delete any buttons and status displays that are associated with non-existing starters or drives

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 25

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

The in the top-right corner exits the application and goes to the PVc Terminal Starters Overview screen

The 190E and 103T screens are similar to that for the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the fault button on the starter screen

The SMC-3 screen shows the following states

The right column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Start is a momentary start button which appears when the starterdrive is in Auto and the 140M is Ready Touching this button starts the starter or drive

bull Stop is also a momentary button Touching this button stops the starterdrive

If the HOA (Hand Off Auto) is not in Auto the Start and Stop buttons will not appear nor will they appear without a 3 Ph On signal In this building block a signal of lsquo1rsquo back to the PLC indicates an Auto position a signal of lsquo0rsquo back indicates a hand or off position You can add an additional contact block to the HOA for the hand position and feedback to the PLC to give that status also

The center column of the SMC-3 starter screen indicates the following

bull 3 Ph On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull 3 Ph Off indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOffrsquo position

bull Stopped indicates the SMC-3 controller is stopped

bull Starting indicates the motor is starting

bull At Speed indicates the motor is running and is at speed

bull Start Fail indicates the starter or drive received a start signal but did not start within the time set in the RSLogix program

CausesRemedies When getting a Start Fail indication check the starter drive andor motor for wiring issues or damage In addition the Start Fail indication may occur due to too short a time for the Timer On Delay in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller See Timer On Delay below

Reset procedure To reset the Start Fail on the PVc terminal when using the SMC-3 controller or the 103T or 190E starters turn the front knob on the 140M MPCB or MCP to off and then back to on to clear the indication To clear this indication on the drive press the stop button on the either on the PVc terminal in Auto mode or press the stop button in Hand mode

26 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Timer On Delay The timer is started when the Start signal is sent to the starter or drive At the end of the timing a comparison is done to see if the motor has actually started The time duration for the Timer On Delay is fully adjustable in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller For this building block the timers are set to 35 seconds for the SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive and 5 seconds for the 103T and 190E starters Check rung 3 or 4 of the default program for the timer

The left column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Fault indicates that the starter has detected a fault

Not all starters have this capability

The SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive can provide this information When the fault indication appears on the SMC-3 controller touching Fault takes you to the listed fault screen for the controller

The PF 4M drive VFD screen always has the Fault button displayed If a fault appears on the PF 4M drive the fault code is displayed on the drive You can press the Fault button on the PVc terminal to view the fault description You can scroll through the fault list just as with the SMC-3 controller

The fault indication on the 103T or 190E starter screen does not have this fault screen functionality since these starters do not provide additional information

bull OVLD indicates that there is an overload detected by the starter

bull SC indicates that there is a short circuit detected by the starter

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 27

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Understanding Faults

The Fault button is always present on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal This Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is merely a GoTo button and does not by itself indicate a fault condition with the PF 4M drive The SMC-3 controller however sends a signal back to the PVc terminal indicating a fault with the controller The Fault GOTO button is then displayed on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo screen on the PVc terminal Pressing the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo Fault screen or on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault screen takes you to the individual fault screens where you can scroll through to find the fault indicated on the PF 4M drive or the SMC-3 controller and its corresponding description

rsquoVFDrsquo Fault Screen (for PF 4M Drive)

lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault Screen

In both cases look at the fault code on the PF 4M drive or SMC-3 controller

bull For the PF 4M drive you must view the fault code on the drive Press the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal to view the fault listing Locate the specific fault for the drive To get a deeper description of the fault consult the user manual for the drive

bull The SMC-3 Controller will have a flashing LED and you need to count the number of flashes Then on the PVc terminal scroll through the fault listing screen and identify the fault using the number of flashes for identification

The button in the lower-right corner of the fault listings takes you back to the SMC-3 or VFD starter screen

28 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Test the SMC-3 Controller

Follow this procedure to test the SMC-3 controller

1 Make sure the motor is disconnected from the load for ease of testing in this procedure

2 Verify that the external HOA is in Auto mode

3 Verify that the 140M is in the ON position (I)

This enables the 3-phase power to the starter

4 Verify that there is no Fault OVLD or SC state If there is check the PVc terminal for the error condition The screen should look like this

5 Verify that the 3 Ph On indicator is present

6 Verify that the Start and Stop buttons are present

7 Make sure that the SMC-3 controller has the proper DIP switch setting for your application (for example ramp time current limit or soft start)

8 Touch the Start button

9 Verify the following

bull The isolation contactor pulls in

bull The motor starts according to the starting method selected for the SMC-3 controller

bull The Running indication appears when the motor is up to speed

10Touch the Stop button to stop the motor

11Unplug the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable from the PVc terminal going to the MicroLogix controller

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 29

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 7: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

Preface

Introduction This Quick Start is designed to provide a way to implement a connected component for simple motor control By using discrete information (simple on-off signals from contacts) from a PowerFlex 4M drive SMC-3 starter 103T starter or 190E starter this building block shows an example of extracting important basic information about the status of a motor and displaying it on a PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Any or all of these starters or drives can be used The PowerFlex 4M drive is used for this building block but the procedure is very similar for the PowerFlex 4 40 40P and 400 drives

To assist in the design and installation of your system application files and other information are provided on the Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001 The CD provides bills of materials (BOM) CAD drawings for panel layout and wiring control programs Human Machine Interface (HMI) screens and more With these tools and the built-in best-practices design the system designer is free to focus on the design of their machine control and not on design overhead tasks

The beginning of each chapter contains the following information Read these sections carefully before beginning work in each chapter

bull Before You Begin - This section lists the steps that must be completed and decisions that must be made before starting that chapter The chapters in this quick start do not have to be completed in the order in which they appear but this section defines the minimum amount of preparation required before completing the current chapter

bull What You Need - This section lists the tools that are required to complete the steps in the current chapter This includes but is not limited to hardware and software

bull Follow These Steps - This illustrates the steps in the current chapter and identifies which steps are required to complete the examples

IMPORTANT Use this Connected Components Building Block Quick Start in conjunction with the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001

Refer to Additional Resources on page 9 for a listing of Quick Start documents

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 7

Preface

Conventions Used in This Manual

This manual uses the following conventions

Convention Meaning Example

Click Click the left mouse button once Click Edit

Type What you type on the keyboard Type the IP address

Right-click Click the right mouse button once while the cursor is positioned on object or selection Right-click the 1768 Bus icon

Select Using the mouse to highlight a specific option Select the application name

Press Pressing a specific key on the keyboard or the PowerFlex 4M keypad Press Enter

Touch Touching a specific button on the PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Touch the Start button

8 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Preface

Additional Resources

Resource Description

Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001

Provides information on how to select products and gain access to panel and wiring information

Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

Provides files for the Connected Component Building Blocks

Bulletin 150 SMC-3 (1-37A)SMC-Delta (1-32A) Soft Starter Connecting Modules 41053-173-01 (1)

Provides information on the connecting modules with the SMC-3

Bulletin 150 SMC-3 Soft Starter (3-37A) 41053-167-01 (5)

Provides information on installation and settings of the SMC-3

Bulletin 193 E1 Plus Overload Relay 41053-358-01 (3)

Provides information on the installation and settings of the overload

Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Motor Circuit Protectors 21-301-951-01

Provides installation instructions for the MPCB and the MCP

Position Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start publication CC-QS003

Provides information on installing and setting up the PowerFlex 40P drive parameters with the pre-configured RSLogix 500 program that controls your base system including application tips as well as implementing the drive parameter backup and restore functionality

MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers User Manual publication 1763-UM001

Provides information on using the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controller

MicroLogix 1400 User Manual publication 1766-UM001

Provides information on using the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controller

PanelView Component Quick Start Manual publication 2711C-QS001A

Provides information on using the PanelView component

PanelView Component Operator Terminals User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

Provides information on using the PanelView Component HMI Terminals

PowerFlex 4M User Manual publication 22F-UM001

Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 4M Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 4 User Manual publication 22A-UM001 Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 4 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 40P User Manual publication 22D-UM001

Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 40P Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 400 User Manual publication 22C-UM001

Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 400 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

httpwwwabcomdrivesdriveexplorer Provides access to DriveExplorerLite software

httpwwwabcom Provides access to the Allen-Bradley website

httprockwellautomationcomknowledgebase Provides access to self-service support

httpwwwrockwellautomationcomcomponentsconnected

Provides access to the Connected Components website

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 9

Preface

Notes

10 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Chapter 1

Simple Motor Control Integration

Introduction

This chapter provides instructions to configure the PowerFlex 4M drive and SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller

You will configure two parameters in the PowerFlex 4M drive These are the basic parameters that need to be changed from the factory default settings in order to establish proper feedback to the MicroLogix controllers For your machine application there may be other drive parameters that need to be adjusted Consult your drive documentation for information on other drive parameters

You will also set the DIP switches on the SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller necessary to send appropriate discrete feedback to the MicroLogix controller

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed hardware design and installation recommendations as well as software installation

bull Apply power to your drive

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 11

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull One or more of these drives or startersndash PowerFlex 4-class drive (PowerFlex 4M drive is used in this document)

bull For PowerFlex 4M 4 40 and 400 drives there is a built-in keypad and display to edit parameters

bull For PowerFlex 40P drive to edit parameters you need either

- A hand-held interface catalog number 22-HIM-A3

or

- DriveExplorer software installed on the personal computer and a USB interface catalog number 1203-USB

ndash SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBRndash 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TEndash 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to configure the parameters in the drives and set the DIP switches on the SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller

Start

Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive page 13

Set up the SMC-3 Controller page 16

12 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive

Factory-default parameter values allow the drive to be controlled from the integral keypad No programming is required to start stop change direction and control speed directly from the integral keypad

However for this building block you will set parameter P106 [Start Source] for 2-wire control In the example for this building block the PF 4M drive is used in a 2-wire SRC Control (internal sourcing) Non-Reversing mode SRC is the default for a new drive If your drive has been used previously make sure the SNKSRC (SinkSource) switch under the front cover of the PF 4M drive is set to SRC See the PF 4M drive user manual for your specific needs other than shown in this example

In addition you will change parameter t221 [Relay Out Sel] to display lsquoMotorRunningrsquo since this building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive See Testing Other Drives and Starters page 30 for details

Follow this procedure to change parameters P106 [Start Source] and t221 [Relay Out Sel] using the PowerFlex 4M keypad explained below

PowerFlex 4M Keypad

Key Key Name Description

Escapebull Go back one step in Program mode

bull Cancel a change to a parameter value and exit Program mode

Selectbull Advance one step in the programming menu

bull Select a digit when viewing a parameter value

Up arrowbull Scroll through groups and parameters

bull Increase and decrease the value of a flashing digit

Down arrow

Enterbull Advance one step in the programming menu

bull Save a change to a parameter value

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 13

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

1 Press Esc until lsquo00rsquo is displayed

2 Press Sel until the leftmost character is flashing

3 Press the Down arrow until the leftmost character displayed is a flashing P

4 Press Enter

The P stops flashing and the rightmost numeric key is flashing

By default the first P parameter P101 is displayed Pressing the Up arrow increases and pressing the Down arrow decreases the value of the P parameters

5 Press the Up arrow five times to display P106

The current value of parameter P106 is displayed lsquo0rsquo in this case

6 Press Enter

The lsquo0rsquo flashes

7 Press the Up arrow twice to adjust the value to lsquo2rsquo

8 Press Enter

The value is accepted

The lsquo2rsquo should not be flashing any longer Notice that the green status indicator next to the green Start button is now off

9 Press Esc

P106 should be displayed with the lsquo6rsquo flashing

10Press Esc until the P is flashing on the leftmost alphanumeric character

11Press the Up arrow or Down arrow to scroll through the group menu to t

12Press Enter

The lsquo1rsquo flashes

Stop the drive before changing parameter P106

14 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

13Press and hold down the up arrow until you reach lsquo221rsquo

If you go past it push the down arrow until you return to lsquo221rsquo

14Press Enter twice so that lsquo0rsquo is flashing

15Press the up arrow to move to the value lsquo2rsquo

16Press Enter

The value is accepted The lsquo2rsquo should not be flashing any longer Notice that the green status indicator next to the green Start button is now off

17Press Esc

Parameter t221 should now be displayed with the lsquo1rsquo flashing

18Press Esc until lsquo00rsquo is displayed

19Power the drive off until the display goes blank and then power it back on

Your drive is now configured to be controlled by push buttons and communication commands initiated from the MicroLogix controller

As with all building blocks these are examples of getting information back discretely from a product You can change parameter t221 or other settings of the starters and drives to suit your application

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 15

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

Set up the SMC-3 Controller

The SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller needs to be set up for the isolation contactor and for the appropriate settings for the motor Below are the DIP switch settings used by the SMC-3 controller and the steps to change them

TIP The 140M MPCB specified in the BOM for this building block has a trip class of 10 However if you would like to use the overload trip class settings on the SMC-3 controller you can change out the 140M MPCB with the 140M MCP

16 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

1 Set the DIP switch settings to the starting needs of your motor using the chart below

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 17

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

2 Be sure that DIP switch 14 is set to Normal (off)

This will bring in the isolation contactor when the SMC-3 has received the input signal DIP switch 14 will also close the side-mounted NO aux contact when the starter comes up to speed The closure of this aux contact will send the signal back to the MicroLogix controller

3 If changing to an MCP set DIP switches 11 and 12 to the appropriate overload trip class

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

IMPORTANT The 103T starter uses a 140M MCP (Motor Circuit Protector) which uses a separate overload E1 Plus which must be set according to your system needs

The 190E starter the SMC-3 starter and the PF 4M drive must have the overload dial set on the 140M MPCB (Motor Protection Circuit Breakers)

18 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Chapter 2

System Validation and Application Tips

Introduction

In this chapter you validate that communication is occurring as intended between the MicroLogix controller and the individual discrete starters as well as between the MicroLogix controller and the PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Starting and stopping using the PVc terminal entails having the external HOA switch in Auto position In Hand mode the PVc terminal can still read status of the starters and drives but will not have startstop capabilities

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 3 of that document

bull Verify that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 1 of this document

bull Verify that all the devices are connected per the Simple Motor Control CAD wiring diagram on the Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Verify that the MicroLogix controller PowerFlex drive and PVc terminal have power applied to them

19Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 19

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Personal computer with either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox web browser

bull PanelView Component terminal

bull One or more of these drives or starters

bull PowerFlex 4M drive

bull SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBR

bull 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE

bull 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

bull MicroLogix 1100 or 1400 controller

bull Serial cable catalog number 1761-CBL-PM02

bull USB cable catalog number 2711C-CBL-UU02 or comparable

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to verify that communication is occurring between your devices and to test the system

Start

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer page 21

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller

Communication page 22

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality page 25

20 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer

The PanelView Explorer design-time environment is accessed through a web browser by connecting your computer to the PVc terminal with a USB connection Before connecting your computer to the USB port of the PVc terminal you must first install the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver on a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system After installing the driver you can connect the PVc terminal to your computer For details on how to install the driver refer to the PanelView Component Terminal User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

PVc Terminal USB Connections

All PanelView Component terminals support a USB port connection and require a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system and with the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver installed The driver cannot be installed on a computer with Windows 2000 operating system

1 Connect one end of a USB cable to the mini-USB device port on your PVc terminal

2 Connect the other end of the USB cable to a USB port on your personal computer

3 Power up the PVc terminal and the personal computer

PanelView Explorer Startup Window

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 21

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication

The 3-inch monochrome touch screen PanelView Component (PVc) terminal communicates with the MicroLogix controller over the DF1 network The PVc application reads from and writes to the data table of the MicroLogix controller When the PVc application writes to the MicroLogix controller the controller program detects the value change and writes that new value to the appropriate drive soft starter or discrete starter

1 Connect the personal computer to the PVc terminal using a USB cable

2 Connect the PVc terminal to MicroLogix controller using the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable

3 Start either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox 20

4 In the address bar of your browser type the IP address 1692542542 (This is a fixed IP address that the USB port uses)

5 Press Enter to connect your personal computer to the PVc terminal

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02

USB port

USB port

MicroLogix controller

1761-CBL-PM02

22 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

6 Select the application name in the PVc dashboard dialog box and then click Edit

7 In the Edit dialog box click the Communication tab

The following dialog box appears

8 Click Serial under Protocol and select DF1 from the pull-down list

9 Under PanelView Component Settings verify the Station Address is 2

Validate button

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 23

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

10Under Controller Settings

a Accept the default name lsquoPLC-1rsquo

b Select MicroLogix from the Controller Type field

c In the Address field type 1

11Click Validate

12Click Save

13Click Switch to PanelView Explorer Startup

14 In the Application Dashboard window select the Simple Starting Building Block application

15Click Run to run the application

Navigating the Starters Overview Page

When the PVc application is running any drive or starter that is enabled is shown on the Starters Overview screen as being lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo or lsquoFaultrsquo To ease the use of this program by the OEM the header for the starter is left generic for the ability to change starters without the need to change the PVc first page To change the buttons themselves please see the PanelView Component HMI Terminals user manual

bull lsquoM1rsquo is designated for the SMC-3 controller

bull lsquoM2rsquo is designated for the 103T starter

bull lsquoM3rsquo is designated for the PF 4M drive

bull lsquoM4rsquo is designated for the 190E starter

24 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

bull Stopped indicates the starter is stopped

bull 140M On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull Starting (not shown) indicates the starter or drive is starting

bull Running indicates that motor is running based on feedback from the starter or drive

bull Fault indicates that there is an overload short circuit or other fault the starter has detected

Touching anywhere on Stopped 140M On Running Fault or M takes you to the individual starter screens regardless of the status shown

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality

Now that the PVc terminal is successfully communicating with the MicroLogix controller you are ready to test the Simple Starting functionality

Navigating the Simple Starting Screen

Touch any of the MTR or M buttons on the Starters Overview screen to get to each individual starter screen such as these for the SMC-3 and VFD starter screens

TIP At this point you may choose to edit the Starters Overview screen and delete any buttons and status displays that are associated with non-existing starters or drives

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 25

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

The in the top-right corner exits the application and goes to the PVc Terminal Starters Overview screen

The 190E and 103T screens are similar to that for the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the fault button on the starter screen

The SMC-3 screen shows the following states

The right column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Start is a momentary start button which appears when the starterdrive is in Auto and the 140M is Ready Touching this button starts the starter or drive

bull Stop is also a momentary button Touching this button stops the starterdrive

If the HOA (Hand Off Auto) is not in Auto the Start and Stop buttons will not appear nor will they appear without a 3 Ph On signal In this building block a signal of lsquo1rsquo back to the PLC indicates an Auto position a signal of lsquo0rsquo back indicates a hand or off position You can add an additional contact block to the HOA for the hand position and feedback to the PLC to give that status also

The center column of the SMC-3 starter screen indicates the following

bull 3 Ph On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull 3 Ph Off indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOffrsquo position

bull Stopped indicates the SMC-3 controller is stopped

bull Starting indicates the motor is starting

bull At Speed indicates the motor is running and is at speed

bull Start Fail indicates the starter or drive received a start signal but did not start within the time set in the RSLogix program

CausesRemedies When getting a Start Fail indication check the starter drive andor motor for wiring issues or damage In addition the Start Fail indication may occur due to too short a time for the Timer On Delay in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller See Timer On Delay below

Reset procedure To reset the Start Fail on the PVc terminal when using the SMC-3 controller or the 103T or 190E starters turn the front knob on the 140M MPCB or MCP to off and then back to on to clear the indication To clear this indication on the drive press the stop button on the either on the PVc terminal in Auto mode or press the stop button in Hand mode

26 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Timer On Delay The timer is started when the Start signal is sent to the starter or drive At the end of the timing a comparison is done to see if the motor has actually started The time duration for the Timer On Delay is fully adjustable in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller For this building block the timers are set to 35 seconds for the SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive and 5 seconds for the 103T and 190E starters Check rung 3 or 4 of the default program for the timer

The left column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Fault indicates that the starter has detected a fault

Not all starters have this capability

The SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive can provide this information When the fault indication appears on the SMC-3 controller touching Fault takes you to the listed fault screen for the controller

The PF 4M drive VFD screen always has the Fault button displayed If a fault appears on the PF 4M drive the fault code is displayed on the drive You can press the Fault button on the PVc terminal to view the fault description You can scroll through the fault list just as with the SMC-3 controller

The fault indication on the 103T or 190E starter screen does not have this fault screen functionality since these starters do not provide additional information

bull OVLD indicates that there is an overload detected by the starter

bull SC indicates that there is a short circuit detected by the starter

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 27

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Understanding Faults

The Fault button is always present on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal This Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is merely a GoTo button and does not by itself indicate a fault condition with the PF 4M drive The SMC-3 controller however sends a signal back to the PVc terminal indicating a fault with the controller The Fault GOTO button is then displayed on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo screen on the PVc terminal Pressing the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo Fault screen or on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault screen takes you to the individual fault screens where you can scroll through to find the fault indicated on the PF 4M drive or the SMC-3 controller and its corresponding description

rsquoVFDrsquo Fault Screen (for PF 4M Drive)

lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault Screen

In both cases look at the fault code on the PF 4M drive or SMC-3 controller

bull For the PF 4M drive you must view the fault code on the drive Press the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal to view the fault listing Locate the specific fault for the drive To get a deeper description of the fault consult the user manual for the drive

bull The SMC-3 Controller will have a flashing LED and you need to count the number of flashes Then on the PVc terminal scroll through the fault listing screen and identify the fault using the number of flashes for identification

The button in the lower-right corner of the fault listings takes you back to the SMC-3 or VFD starter screen

28 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Test the SMC-3 Controller

Follow this procedure to test the SMC-3 controller

1 Make sure the motor is disconnected from the load for ease of testing in this procedure

2 Verify that the external HOA is in Auto mode

3 Verify that the 140M is in the ON position (I)

This enables the 3-phase power to the starter

4 Verify that there is no Fault OVLD or SC state If there is check the PVc terminal for the error condition The screen should look like this

5 Verify that the 3 Ph On indicator is present

6 Verify that the Start and Stop buttons are present

7 Make sure that the SMC-3 controller has the proper DIP switch setting for your application (for example ramp time current limit or soft start)

8 Touch the Start button

9 Verify the following

bull The isolation contactor pulls in

bull The motor starts according to the starting method selected for the SMC-3 controller

bull The Running indication appears when the motor is up to speed

10Touch the Stop button to stop the motor

11Unplug the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable from the PVc terminal going to the MicroLogix controller

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 29

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 8: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

Preface

Conventions Used in This Manual

This manual uses the following conventions

Convention Meaning Example

Click Click the left mouse button once Click Edit

Type What you type on the keyboard Type the IP address

Right-click Click the right mouse button once while the cursor is positioned on object or selection Right-click the 1768 Bus icon

Select Using the mouse to highlight a specific option Select the application name

Press Pressing a specific key on the keyboard or the PowerFlex 4M keypad Press Enter

Touch Touching a specific button on the PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Touch the Start button

8 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Preface

Additional Resources

Resource Description

Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001

Provides information on how to select products and gain access to panel and wiring information

Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

Provides files for the Connected Component Building Blocks

Bulletin 150 SMC-3 (1-37A)SMC-Delta (1-32A) Soft Starter Connecting Modules 41053-173-01 (1)

Provides information on the connecting modules with the SMC-3

Bulletin 150 SMC-3 Soft Starter (3-37A) 41053-167-01 (5)

Provides information on installation and settings of the SMC-3

Bulletin 193 E1 Plus Overload Relay 41053-358-01 (3)

Provides information on the installation and settings of the overload

Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Motor Circuit Protectors 21-301-951-01

Provides installation instructions for the MPCB and the MCP

Position Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start publication CC-QS003

Provides information on installing and setting up the PowerFlex 40P drive parameters with the pre-configured RSLogix 500 program that controls your base system including application tips as well as implementing the drive parameter backup and restore functionality

MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers User Manual publication 1763-UM001

Provides information on using the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controller

MicroLogix 1400 User Manual publication 1766-UM001

Provides information on using the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controller

PanelView Component Quick Start Manual publication 2711C-QS001A

Provides information on using the PanelView component

PanelView Component Operator Terminals User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

Provides information on using the PanelView Component HMI Terminals

PowerFlex 4M User Manual publication 22F-UM001

Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 4M Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 4 User Manual publication 22A-UM001 Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 4 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 40P User Manual publication 22D-UM001

Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 40P Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 400 User Manual publication 22C-UM001

Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 400 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

httpwwwabcomdrivesdriveexplorer Provides access to DriveExplorerLite software

httpwwwabcom Provides access to the Allen-Bradley website

httprockwellautomationcomknowledgebase Provides access to self-service support

httpwwwrockwellautomationcomcomponentsconnected

Provides access to the Connected Components website

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 9

Preface

Notes

10 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Chapter 1

Simple Motor Control Integration

Introduction

This chapter provides instructions to configure the PowerFlex 4M drive and SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller

You will configure two parameters in the PowerFlex 4M drive These are the basic parameters that need to be changed from the factory default settings in order to establish proper feedback to the MicroLogix controllers For your machine application there may be other drive parameters that need to be adjusted Consult your drive documentation for information on other drive parameters

You will also set the DIP switches on the SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller necessary to send appropriate discrete feedback to the MicroLogix controller

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed hardware design and installation recommendations as well as software installation

bull Apply power to your drive

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 11

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull One or more of these drives or startersndash PowerFlex 4-class drive (PowerFlex 4M drive is used in this document)

bull For PowerFlex 4M 4 40 and 400 drives there is a built-in keypad and display to edit parameters

bull For PowerFlex 40P drive to edit parameters you need either

- A hand-held interface catalog number 22-HIM-A3

or

- DriveExplorer software installed on the personal computer and a USB interface catalog number 1203-USB

ndash SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBRndash 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TEndash 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to configure the parameters in the drives and set the DIP switches on the SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller

Start

Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive page 13

Set up the SMC-3 Controller page 16

12 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive

Factory-default parameter values allow the drive to be controlled from the integral keypad No programming is required to start stop change direction and control speed directly from the integral keypad

However for this building block you will set parameter P106 [Start Source] for 2-wire control In the example for this building block the PF 4M drive is used in a 2-wire SRC Control (internal sourcing) Non-Reversing mode SRC is the default for a new drive If your drive has been used previously make sure the SNKSRC (SinkSource) switch under the front cover of the PF 4M drive is set to SRC See the PF 4M drive user manual for your specific needs other than shown in this example

In addition you will change parameter t221 [Relay Out Sel] to display lsquoMotorRunningrsquo since this building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive See Testing Other Drives and Starters page 30 for details

Follow this procedure to change parameters P106 [Start Source] and t221 [Relay Out Sel] using the PowerFlex 4M keypad explained below

PowerFlex 4M Keypad

Key Key Name Description

Escapebull Go back one step in Program mode

bull Cancel a change to a parameter value and exit Program mode

Selectbull Advance one step in the programming menu

bull Select a digit when viewing a parameter value

Up arrowbull Scroll through groups and parameters

bull Increase and decrease the value of a flashing digit

Down arrow

Enterbull Advance one step in the programming menu

bull Save a change to a parameter value

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 13

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

1 Press Esc until lsquo00rsquo is displayed

2 Press Sel until the leftmost character is flashing

3 Press the Down arrow until the leftmost character displayed is a flashing P

4 Press Enter

The P stops flashing and the rightmost numeric key is flashing

By default the first P parameter P101 is displayed Pressing the Up arrow increases and pressing the Down arrow decreases the value of the P parameters

5 Press the Up arrow five times to display P106

The current value of parameter P106 is displayed lsquo0rsquo in this case

6 Press Enter

The lsquo0rsquo flashes

7 Press the Up arrow twice to adjust the value to lsquo2rsquo

8 Press Enter

The value is accepted

The lsquo2rsquo should not be flashing any longer Notice that the green status indicator next to the green Start button is now off

9 Press Esc

P106 should be displayed with the lsquo6rsquo flashing

10Press Esc until the P is flashing on the leftmost alphanumeric character

11Press the Up arrow or Down arrow to scroll through the group menu to t

12Press Enter

The lsquo1rsquo flashes

Stop the drive before changing parameter P106

14 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

13Press and hold down the up arrow until you reach lsquo221rsquo

If you go past it push the down arrow until you return to lsquo221rsquo

14Press Enter twice so that lsquo0rsquo is flashing

15Press the up arrow to move to the value lsquo2rsquo

16Press Enter

The value is accepted The lsquo2rsquo should not be flashing any longer Notice that the green status indicator next to the green Start button is now off

17Press Esc

Parameter t221 should now be displayed with the lsquo1rsquo flashing

18Press Esc until lsquo00rsquo is displayed

19Power the drive off until the display goes blank and then power it back on

Your drive is now configured to be controlled by push buttons and communication commands initiated from the MicroLogix controller

As with all building blocks these are examples of getting information back discretely from a product You can change parameter t221 or other settings of the starters and drives to suit your application

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 15

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

Set up the SMC-3 Controller

The SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller needs to be set up for the isolation contactor and for the appropriate settings for the motor Below are the DIP switch settings used by the SMC-3 controller and the steps to change them

TIP The 140M MPCB specified in the BOM for this building block has a trip class of 10 However if you would like to use the overload trip class settings on the SMC-3 controller you can change out the 140M MPCB with the 140M MCP

16 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

1 Set the DIP switch settings to the starting needs of your motor using the chart below

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 17

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

2 Be sure that DIP switch 14 is set to Normal (off)

This will bring in the isolation contactor when the SMC-3 has received the input signal DIP switch 14 will also close the side-mounted NO aux contact when the starter comes up to speed The closure of this aux contact will send the signal back to the MicroLogix controller

3 If changing to an MCP set DIP switches 11 and 12 to the appropriate overload trip class

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

IMPORTANT The 103T starter uses a 140M MCP (Motor Circuit Protector) which uses a separate overload E1 Plus which must be set according to your system needs

The 190E starter the SMC-3 starter and the PF 4M drive must have the overload dial set on the 140M MPCB (Motor Protection Circuit Breakers)

18 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Chapter 2

System Validation and Application Tips

Introduction

In this chapter you validate that communication is occurring as intended between the MicroLogix controller and the individual discrete starters as well as between the MicroLogix controller and the PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Starting and stopping using the PVc terminal entails having the external HOA switch in Auto position In Hand mode the PVc terminal can still read status of the starters and drives but will not have startstop capabilities

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 3 of that document

bull Verify that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 1 of this document

bull Verify that all the devices are connected per the Simple Motor Control CAD wiring diagram on the Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Verify that the MicroLogix controller PowerFlex drive and PVc terminal have power applied to them

19Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 19

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Personal computer with either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox web browser

bull PanelView Component terminal

bull One or more of these drives or starters

bull PowerFlex 4M drive

bull SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBR

bull 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE

bull 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

bull MicroLogix 1100 or 1400 controller

bull Serial cable catalog number 1761-CBL-PM02

bull USB cable catalog number 2711C-CBL-UU02 or comparable

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to verify that communication is occurring between your devices and to test the system

Start

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer page 21

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller

Communication page 22

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality page 25

20 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer

The PanelView Explorer design-time environment is accessed through a web browser by connecting your computer to the PVc terminal with a USB connection Before connecting your computer to the USB port of the PVc terminal you must first install the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver on a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system After installing the driver you can connect the PVc terminal to your computer For details on how to install the driver refer to the PanelView Component Terminal User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

PVc Terminal USB Connections

All PanelView Component terminals support a USB port connection and require a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system and with the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver installed The driver cannot be installed on a computer with Windows 2000 operating system

1 Connect one end of a USB cable to the mini-USB device port on your PVc terminal

2 Connect the other end of the USB cable to a USB port on your personal computer

3 Power up the PVc terminal and the personal computer

PanelView Explorer Startup Window

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 21

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication

The 3-inch monochrome touch screen PanelView Component (PVc) terminal communicates with the MicroLogix controller over the DF1 network The PVc application reads from and writes to the data table of the MicroLogix controller When the PVc application writes to the MicroLogix controller the controller program detects the value change and writes that new value to the appropriate drive soft starter or discrete starter

1 Connect the personal computer to the PVc terminal using a USB cable

2 Connect the PVc terminal to MicroLogix controller using the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable

3 Start either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox 20

4 In the address bar of your browser type the IP address 1692542542 (This is a fixed IP address that the USB port uses)

5 Press Enter to connect your personal computer to the PVc terminal

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02

USB port

USB port

MicroLogix controller

1761-CBL-PM02

22 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

6 Select the application name in the PVc dashboard dialog box and then click Edit

7 In the Edit dialog box click the Communication tab

The following dialog box appears

8 Click Serial under Protocol and select DF1 from the pull-down list

9 Under PanelView Component Settings verify the Station Address is 2

Validate button

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 23

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

10Under Controller Settings

a Accept the default name lsquoPLC-1rsquo

b Select MicroLogix from the Controller Type field

c In the Address field type 1

11Click Validate

12Click Save

13Click Switch to PanelView Explorer Startup

14 In the Application Dashboard window select the Simple Starting Building Block application

15Click Run to run the application

Navigating the Starters Overview Page

When the PVc application is running any drive or starter that is enabled is shown on the Starters Overview screen as being lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo or lsquoFaultrsquo To ease the use of this program by the OEM the header for the starter is left generic for the ability to change starters without the need to change the PVc first page To change the buttons themselves please see the PanelView Component HMI Terminals user manual

bull lsquoM1rsquo is designated for the SMC-3 controller

bull lsquoM2rsquo is designated for the 103T starter

bull lsquoM3rsquo is designated for the PF 4M drive

bull lsquoM4rsquo is designated for the 190E starter

24 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

bull Stopped indicates the starter is stopped

bull 140M On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull Starting (not shown) indicates the starter or drive is starting

bull Running indicates that motor is running based on feedback from the starter or drive

bull Fault indicates that there is an overload short circuit or other fault the starter has detected

Touching anywhere on Stopped 140M On Running Fault or M takes you to the individual starter screens regardless of the status shown

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality

Now that the PVc terminal is successfully communicating with the MicroLogix controller you are ready to test the Simple Starting functionality

Navigating the Simple Starting Screen

Touch any of the MTR or M buttons on the Starters Overview screen to get to each individual starter screen such as these for the SMC-3 and VFD starter screens

TIP At this point you may choose to edit the Starters Overview screen and delete any buttons and status displays that are associated with non-existing starters or drives

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 25

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

The in the top-right corner exits the application and goes to the PVc Terminal Starters Overview screen

The 190E and 103T screens are similar to that for the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the fault button on the starter screen

The SMC-3 screen shows the following states

The right column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Start is a momentary start button which appears when the starterdrive is in Auto and the 140M is Ready Touching this button starts the starter or drive

bull Stop is also a momentary button Touching this button stops the starterdrive

If the HOA (Hand Off Auto) is not in Auto the Start and Stop buttons will not appear nor will they appear without a 3 Ph On signal In this building block a signal of lsquo1rsquo back to the PLC indicates an Auto position a signal of lsquo0rsquo back indicates a hand or off position You can add an additional contact block to the HOA for the hand position and feedback to the PLC to give that status also

The center column of the SMC-3 starter screen indicates the following

bull 3 Ph On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull 3 Ph Off indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOffrsquo position

bull Stopped indicates the SMC-3 controller is stopped

bull Starting indicates the motor is starting

bull At Speed indicates the motor is running and is at speed

bull Start Fail indicates the starter or drive received a start signal but did not start within the time set in the RSLogix program

CausesRemedies When getting a Start Fail indication check the starter drive andor motor for wiring issues or damage In addition the Start Fail indication may occur due to too short a time for the Timer On Delay in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller See Timer On Delay below

Reset procedure To reset the Start Fail on the PVc terminal when using the SMC-3 controller or the 103T or 190E starters turn the front knob on the 140M MPCB or MCP to off and then back to on to clear the indication To clear this indication on the drive press the stop button on the either on the PVc terminal in Auto mode or press the stop button in Hand mode

26 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Timer On Delay The timer is started when the Start signal is sent to the starter or drive At the end of the timing a comparison is done to see if the motor has actually started The time duration for the Timer On Delay is fully adjustable in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller For this building block the timers are set to 35 seconds for the SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive and 5 seconds for the 103T and 190E starters Check rung 3 or 4 of the default program for the timer

The left column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Fault indicates that the starter has detected a fault

Not all starters have this capability

The SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive can provide this information When the fault indication appears on the SMC-3 controller touching Fault takes you to the listed fault screen for the controller

The PF 4M drive VFD screen always has the Fault button displayed If a fault appears on the PF 4M drive the fault code is displayed on the drive You can press the Fault button on the PVc terminal to view the fault description You can scroll through the fault list just as with the SMC-3 controller

The fault indication on the 103T or 190E starter screen does not have this fault screen functionality since these starters do not provide additional information

bull OVLD indicates that there is an overload detected by the starter

bull SC indicates that there is a short circuit detected by the starter

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 27

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Understanding Faults

The Fault button is always present on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal This Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is merely a GoTo button and does not by itself indicate a fault condition with the PF 4M drive The SMC-3 controller however sends a signal back to the PVc terminal indicating a fault with the controller The Fault GOTO button is then displayed on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo screen on the PVc terminal Pressing the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo Fault screen or on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault screen takes you to the individual fault screens where you can scroll through to find the fault indicated on the PF 4M drive or the SMC-3 controller and its corresponding description

rsquoVFDrsquo Fault Screen (for PF 4M Drive)

lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault Screen

In both cases look at the fault code on the PF 4M drive or SMC-3 controller

bull For the PF 4M drive you must view the fault code on the drive Press the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal to view the fault listing Locate the specific fault for the drive To get a deeper description of the fault consult the user manual for the drive

bull The SMC-3 Controller will have a flashing LED and you need to count the number of flashes Then on the PVc terminal scroll through the fault listing screen and identify the fault using the number of flashes for identification

The button in the lower-right corner of the fault listings takes you back to the SMC-3 or VFD starter screen

28 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Test the SMC-3 Controller

Follow this procedure to test the SMC-3 controller

1 Make sure the motor is disconnected from the load for ease of testing in this procedure

2 Verify that the external HOA is in Auto mode

3 Verify that the 140M is in the ON position (I)

This enables the 3-phase power to the starter

4 Verify that there is no Fault OVLD or SC state If there is check the PVc terminal for the error condition The screen should look like this

5 Verify that the 3 Ph On indicator is present

6 Verify that the Start and Stop buttons are present

7 Make sure that the SMC-3 controller has the proper DIP switch setting for your application (for example ramp time current limit or soft start)

8 Touch the Start button

9 Verify the following

bull The isolation contactor pulls in

bull The motor starts according to the starting method selected for the SMC-3 controller

bull The Running indication appears when the motor is up to speed

10Touch the Stop button to stop the motor

11Unplug the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable from the PVc terminal going to the MicroLogix controller

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 29

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 9: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

Preface

Additional Resources

Resource Description

Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001

Provides information on how to select products and gain access to panel and wiring information

Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

Provides files for the Connected Component Building Blocks

Bulletin 150 SMC-3 (1-37A)SMC-Delta (1-32A) Soft Starter Connecting Modules 41053-173-01 (1)

Provides information on the connecting modules with the SMC-3

Bulletin 150 SMC-3 Soft Starter (3-37A) 41053-167-01 (5)

Provides information on installation and settings of the SMC-3

Bulletin 193 E1 Plus Overload Relay 41053-358-01 (3)

Provides information on the installation and settings of the overload

Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Motor Circuit Protectors 21-301-951-01

Provides installation instructions for the MPCB and the MCP

Position Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start publication CC-QS003

Provides information on installing and setting up the PowerFlex 40P drive parameters with the pre-configured RSLogix 500 program that controls your base system including application tips as well as implementing the drive parameter backup and restore functionality

MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers User Manual publication 1763-UM001

Provides information on using the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controller

MicroLogix 1400 User Manual publication 1766-UM001

Provides information on using the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controller

PanelView Component Quick Start Manual publication 2711C-QS001A

Provides information on using the PanelView component

PanelView Component Operator Terminals User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

Provides information on using the PanelView Component HMI Terminals

PowerFlex 4M User Manual publication 22F-UM001

Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 4M Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 4 User Manual publication 22A-UM001 Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 4 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 40 User Manual publication 22B-UM001 Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 40P User Manual publication 22D-UM001

Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 40P Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

PowerFlex 400 User Manual publication 22C-UM001

Provides information on installing the PowerFlex 400 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive including wiring and parameter setup

httpwwwabcomdrivesdriveexplorer Provides access to DriveExplorerLite software

httpwwwabcom Provides access to the Allen-Bradley website

httprockwellautomationcomknowledgebase Provides access to self-service support

httpwwwrockwellautomationcomcomponentsconnected

Provides access to the Connected Components website

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 9

Preface

Notes

10 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Chapter 1

Simple Motor Control Integration

Introduction

This chapter provides instructions to configure the PowerFlex 4M drive and SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller

You will configure two parameters in the PowerFlex 4M drive These are the basic parameters that need to be changed from the factory default settings in order to establish proper feedback to the MicroLogix controllers For your machine application there may be other drive parameters that need to be adjusted Consult your drive documentation for information on other drive parameters

You will also set the DIP switches on the SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller necessary to send appropriate discrete feedback to the MicroLogix controller

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed hardware design and installation recommendations as well as software installation

bull Apply power to your drive

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 11

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull One or more of these drives or startersndash PowerFlex 4-class drive (PowerFlex 4M drive is used in this document)

bull For PowerFlex 4M 4 40 and 400 drives there is a built-in keypad and display to edit parameters

bull For PowerFlex 40P drive to edit parameters you need either

- A hand-held interface catalog number 22-HIM-A3

or

- DriveExplorer software installed on the personal computer and a USB interface catalog number 1203-USB

ndash SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBRndash 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TEndash 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to configure the parameters in the drives and set the DIP switches on the SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller

Start

Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive page 13

Set up the SMC-3 Controller page 16

12 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive

Factory-default parameter values allow the drive to be controlled from the integral keypad No programming is required to start stop change direction and control speed directly from the integral keypad

However for this building block you will set parameter P106 [Start Source] for 2-wire control In the example for this building block the PF 4M drive is used in a 2-wire SRC Control (internal sourcing) Non-Reversing mode SRC is the default for a new drive If your drive has been used previously make sure the SNKSRC (SinkSource) switch under the front cover of the PF 4M drive is set to SRC See the PF 4M drive user manual for your specific needs other than shown in this example

In addition you will change parameter t221 [Relay Out Sel] to display lsquoMotorRunningrsquo since this building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive See Testing Other Drives and Starters page 30 for details

Follow this procedure to change parameters P106 [Start Source] and t221 [Relay Out Sel] using the PowerFlex 4M keypad explained below

PowerFlex 4M Keypad

Key Key Name Description

Escapebull Go back one step in Program mode

bull Cancel a change to a parameter value and exit Program mode

Selectbull Advance one step in the programming menu

bull Select a digit when viewing a parameter value

Up arrowbull Scroll through groups and parameters

bull Increase and decrease the value of a flashing digit

Down arrow

Enterbull Advance one step in the programming menu

bull Save a change to a parameter value

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 13

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

1 Press Esc until lsquo00rsquo is displayed

2 Press Sel until the leftmost character is flashing

3 Press the Down arrow until the leftmost character displayed is a flashing P

4 Press Enter

The P stops flashing and the rightmost numeric key is flashing

By default the first P parameter P101 is displayed Pressing the Up arrow increases and pressing the Down arrow decreases the value of the P parameters

5 Press the Up arrow five times to display P106

The current value of parameter P106 is displayed lsquo0rsquo in this case

6 Press Enter

The lsquo0rsquo flashes

7 Press the Up arrow twice to adjust the value to lsquo2rsquo

8 Press Enter

The value is accepted

The lsquo2rsquo should not be flashing any longer Notice that the green status indicator next to the green Start button is now off

9 Press Esc

P106 should be displayed with the lsquo6rsquo flashing

10Press Esc until the P is flashing on the leftmost alphanumeric character

11Press the Up arrow or Down arrow to scroll through the group menu to t

12Press Enter

The lsquo1rsquo flashes

Stop the drive before changing parameter P106

14 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

13Press and hold down the up arrow until you reach lsquo221rsquo

If you go past it push the down arrow until you return to lsquo221rsquo

14Press Enter twice so that lsquo0rsquo is flashing

15Press the up arrow to move to the value lsquo2rsquo

16Press Enter

The value is accepted The lsquo2rsquo should not be flashing any longer Notice that the green status indicator next to the green Start button is now off

17Press Esc

Parameter t221 should now be displayed with the lsquo1rsquo flashing

18Press Esc until lsquo00rsquo is displayed

19Power the drive off until the display goes blank and then power it back on

Your drive is now configured to be controlled by push buttons and communication commands initiated from the MicroLogix controller

As with all building blocks these are examples of getting information back discretely from a product You can change parameter t221 or other settings of the starters and drives to suit your application

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 15

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

Set up the SMC-3 Controller

The SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller needs to be set up for the isolation contactor and for the appropriate settings for the motor Below are the DIP switch settings used by the SMC-3 controller and the steps to change them

TIP The 140M MPCB specified in the BOM for this building block has a trip class of 10 However if you would like to use the overload trip class settings on the SMC-3 controller you can change out the 140M MPCB with the 140M MCP

16 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

1 Set the DIP switch settings to the starting needs of your motor using the chart below

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 17

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

2 Be sure that DIP switch 14 is set to Normal (off)

This will bring in the isolation contactor when the SMC-3 has received the input signal DIP switch 14 will also close the side-mounted NO aux contact when the starter comes up to speed The closure of this aux contact will send the signal back to the MicroLogix controller

3 If changing to an MCP set DIP switches 11 and 12 to the appropriate overload trip class

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

IMPORTANT The 103T starter uses a 140M MCP (Motor Circuit Protector) which uses a separate overload E1 Plus which must be set according to your system needs

The 190E starter the SMC-3 starter and the PF 4M drive must have the overload dial set on the 140M MPCB (Motor Protection Circuit Breakers)

18 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Chapter 2

System Validation and Application Tips

Introduction

In this chapter you validate that communication is occurring as intended between the MicroLogix controller and the individual discrete starters as well as between the MicroLogix controller and the PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Starting and stopping using the PVc terminal entails having the external HOA switch in Auto position In Hand mode the PVc terminal can still read status of the starters and drives but will not have startstop capabilities

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 3 of that document

bull Verify that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 1 of this document

bull Verify that all the devices are connected per the Simple Motor Control CAD wiring diagram on the Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Verify that the MicroLogix controller PowerFlex drive and PVc terminal have power applied to them

19Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 19

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Personal computer with either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox web browser

bull PanelView Component terminal

bull One or more of these drives or starters

bull PowerFlex 4M drive

bull SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBR

bull 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE

bull 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

bull MicroLogix 1100 or 1400 controller

bull Serial cable catalog number 1761-CBL-PM02

bull USB cable catalog number 2711C-CBL-UU02 or comparable

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to verify that communication is occurring between your devices and to test the system

Start

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer page 21

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller

Communication page 22

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality page 25

20 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer

The PanelView Explorer design-time environment is accessed through a web browser by connecting your computer to the PVc terminal with a USB connection Before connecting your computer to the USB port of the PVc terminal you must first install the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver on a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system After installing the driver you can connect the PVc terminal to your computer For details on how to install the driver refer to the PanelView Component Terminal User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

PVc Terminal USB Connections

All PanelView Component terminals support a USB port connection and require a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system and with the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver installed The driver cannot be installed on a computer with Windows 2000 operating system

1 Connect one end of a USB cable to the mini-USB device port on your PVc terminal

2 Connect the other end of the USB cable to a USB port on your personal computer

3 Power up the PVc terminal and the personal computer

PanelView Explorer Startup Window

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 21

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication

The 3-inch monochrome touch screen PanelView Component (PVc) terminal communicates with the MicroLogix controller over the DF1 network The PVc application reads from and writes to the data table of the MicroLogix controller When the PVc application writes to the MicroLogix controller the controller program detects the value change and writes that new value to the appropriate drive soft starter or discrete starter

1 Connect the personal computer to the PVc terminal using a USB cable

2 Connect the PVc terminal to MicroLogix controller using the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable

3 Start either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox 20

4 In the address bar of your browser type the IP address 1692542542 (This is a fixed IP address that the USB port uses)

5 Press Enter to connect your personal computer to the PVc terminal

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02

USB port

USB port

MicroLogix controller

1761-CBL-PM02

22 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

6 Select the application name in the PVc dashboard dialog box and then click Edit

7 In the Edit dialog box click the Communication tab

The following dialog box appears

8 Click Serial under Protocol and select DF1 from the pull-down list

9 Under PanelView Component Settings verify the Station Address is 2

Validate button

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 23

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

10Under Controller Settings

a Accept the default name lsquoPLC-1rsquo

b Select MicroLogix from the Controller Type field

c In the Address field type 1

11Click Validate

12Click Save

13Click Switch to PanelView Explorer Startup

14 In the Application Dashboard window select the Simple Starting Building Block application

15Click Run to run the application

Navigating the Starters Overview Page

When the PVc application is running any drive or starter that is enabled is shown on the Starters Overview screen as being lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo or lsquoFaultrsquo To ease the use of this program by the OEM the header for the starter is left generic for the ability to change starters without the need to change the PVc first page To change the buttons themselves please see the PanelView Component HMI Terminals user manual

bull lsquoM1rsquo is designated for the SMC-3 controller

bull lsquoM2rsquo is designated for the 103T starter

bull lsquoM3rsquo is designated for the PF 4M drive

bull lsquoM4rsquo is designated for the 190E starter

24 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

bull Stopped indicates the starter is stopped

bull 140M On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull Starting (not shown) indicates the starter or drive is starting

bull Running indicates that motor is running based on feedback from the starter or drive

bull Fault indicates that there is an overload short circuit or other fault the starter has detected

Touching anywhere on Stopped 140M On Running Fault or M takes you to the individual starter screens regardless of the status shown

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality

Now that the PVc terminal is successfully communicating with the MicroLogix controller you are ready to test the Simple Starting functionality

Navigating the Simple Starting Screen

Touch any of the MTR or M buttons on the Starters Overview screen to get to each individual starter screen such as these for the SMC-3 and VFD starter screens

TIP At this point you may choose to edit the Starters Overview screen and delete any buttons and status displays that are associated with non-existing starters or drives

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 25

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

The in the top-right corner exits the application and goes to the PVc Terminal Starters Overview screen

The 190E and 103T screens are similar to that for the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the fault button on the starter screen

The SMC-3 screen shows the following states

The right column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Start is a momentary start button which appears when the starterdrive is in Auto and the 140M is Ready Touching this button starts the starter or drive

bull Stop is also a momentary button Touching this button stops the starterdrive

If the HOA (Hand Off Auto) is not in Auto the Start and Stop buttons will not appear nor will they appear without a 3 Ph On signal In this building block a signal of lsquo1rsquo back to the PLC indicates an Auto position a signal of lsquo0rsquo back indicates a hand or off position You can add an additional contact block to the HOA for the hand position and feedback to the PLC to give that status also

The center column of the SMC-3 starter screen indicates the following

bull 3 Ph On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull 3 Ph Off indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOffrsquo position

bull Stopped indicates the SMC-3 controller is stopped

bull Starting indicates the motor is starting

bull At Speed indicates the motor is running and is at speed

bull Start Fail indicates the starter or drive received a start signal but did not start within the time set in the RSLogix program

CausesRemedies When getting a Start Fail indication check the starter drive andor motor for wiring issues or damage In addition the Start Fail indication may occur due to too short a time for the Timer On Delay in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller See Timer On Delay below

Reset procedure To reset the Start Fail on the PVc terminal when using the SMC-3 controller or the 103T or 190E starters turn the front knob on the 140M MPCB or MCP to off and then back to on to clear the indication To clear this indication on the drive press the stop button on the either on the PVc terminal in Auto mode or press the stop button in Hand mode

26 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Timer On Delay The timer is started when the Start signal is sent to the starter or drive At the end of the timing a comparison is done to see if the motor has actually started The time duration for the Timer On Delay is fully adjustable in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller For this building block the timers are set to 35 seconds for the SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive and 5 seconds for the 103T and 190E starters Check rung 3 or 4 of the default program for the timer

The left column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Fault indicates that the starter has detected a fault

Not all starters have this capability

The SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive can provide this information When the fault indication appears on the SMC-3 controller touching Fault takes you to the listed fault screen for the controller

The PF 4M drive VFD screen always has the Fault button displayed If a fault appears on the PF 4M drive the fault code is displayed on the drive You can press the Fault button on the PVc terminal to view the fault description You can scroll through the fault list just as with the SMC-3 controller

The fault indication on the 103T or 190E starter screen does not have this fault screen functionality since these starters do not provide additional information

bull OVLD indicates that there is an overload detected by the starter

bull SC indicates that there is a short circuit detected by the starter

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 27

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Understanding Faults

The Fault button is always present on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal This Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is merely a GoTo button and does not by itself indicate a fault condition with the PF 4M drive The SMC-3 controller however sends a signal back to the PVc terminal indicating a fault with the controller The Fault GOTO button is then displayed on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo screen on the PVc terminal Pressing the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo Fault screen or on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault screen takes you to the individual fault screens where you can scroll through to find the fault indicated on the PF 4M drive or the SMC-3 controller and its corresponding description

rsquoVFDrsquo Fault Screen (for PF 4M Drive)

lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault Screen

In both cases look at the fault code on the PF 4M drive or SMC-3 controller

bull For the PF 4M drive you must view the fault code on the drive Press the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal to view the fault listing Locate the specific fault for the drive To get a deeper description of the fault consult the user manual for the drive

bull The SMC-3 Controller will have a flashing LED and you need to count the number of flashes Then on the PVc terminal scroll through the fault listing screen and identify the fault using the number of flashes for identification

The button in the lower-right corner of the fault listings takes you back to the SMC-3 or VFD starter screen

28 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Test the SMC-3 Controller

Follow this procedure to test the SMC-3 controller

1 Make sure the motor is disconnected from the load for ease of testing in this procedure

2 Verify that the external HOA is in Auto mode

3 Verify that the 140M is in the ON position (I)

This enables the 3-phase power to the starter

4 Verify that there is no Fault OVLD or SC state If there is check the PVc terminal for the error condition The screen should look like this

5 Verify that the 3 Ph On indicator is present

6 Verify that the Start and Stop buttons are present

7 Make sure that the SMC-3 controller has the proper DIP switch setting for your application (for example ramp time current limit or soft start)

8 Touch the Start button

9 Verify the following

bull The isolation contactor pulls in

bull The motor starts according to the starting method selected for the SMC-3 controller

bull The Running indication appears when the motor is up to speed

10Touch the Stop button to stop the motor

11Unplug the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable from the PVc terminal going to the MicroLogix controller

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 29

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 10: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

Preface

Notes

10 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Chapter 1

Simple Motor Control Integration

Introduction

This chapter provides instructions to configure the PowerFlex 4M drive and SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller

You will configure two parameters in the PowerFlex 4M drive These are the basic parameters that need to be changed from the factory default settings in order to establish proper feedback to the MicroLogix controllers For your machine application there may be other drive parameters that need to be adjusted Consult your drive documentation for information on other drive parameters

You will also set the DIP switches on the SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller necessary to send appropriate discrete feedback to the MicroLogix controller

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed hardware design and installation recommendations as well as software installation

bull Apply power to your drive

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 11

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull One or more of these drives or startersndash PowerFlex 4-class drive (PowerFlex 4M drive is used in this document)

bull For PowerFlex 4M 4 40 and 400 drives there is a built-in keypad and display to edit parameters

bull For PowerFlex 40P drive to edit parameters you need either

- A hand-held interface catalog number 22-HIM-A3

or

- DriveExplorer software installed on the personal computer and a USB interface catalog number 1203-USB

ndash SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBRndash 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TEndash 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to configure the parameters in the drives and set the DIP switches on the SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller

Start

Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive page 13

Set up the SMC-3 Controller page 16

12 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive

Factory-default parameter values allow the drive to be controlled from the integral keypad No programming is required to start stop change direction and control speed directly from the integral keypad

However for this building block you will set parameter P106 [Start Source] for 2-wire control In the example for this building block the PF 4M drive is used in a 2-wire SRC Control (internal sourcing) Non-Reversing mode SRC is the default for a new drive If your drive has been used previously make sure the SNKSRC (SinkSource) switch under the front cover of the PF 4M drive is set to SRC See the PF 4M drive user manual for your specific needs other than shown in this example

In addition you will change parameter t221 [Relay Out Sel] to display lsquoMotorRunningrsquo since this building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive See Testing Other Drives and Starters page 30 for details

Follow this procedure to change parameters P106 [Start Source] and t221 [Relay Out Sel] using the PowerFlex 4M keypad explained below

PowerFlex 4M Keypad

Key Key Name Description

Escapebull Go back one step in Program mode

bull Cancel a change to a parameter value and exit Program mode

Selectbull Advance one step in the programming menu

bull Select a digit when viewing a parameter value

Up arrowbull Scroll through groups and parameters

bull Increase and decrease the value of a flashing digit

Down arrow

Enterbull Advance one step in the programming menu

bull Save a change to a parameter value

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 13

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

1 Press Esc until lsquo00rsquo is displayed

2 Press Sel until the leftmost character is flashing

3 Press the Down arrow until the leftmost character displayed is a flashing P

4 Press Enter

The P stops flashing and the rightmost numeric key is flashing

By default the first P parameter P101 is displayed Pressing the Up arrow increases and pressing the Down arrow decreases the value of the P parameters

5 Press the Up arrow five times to display P106

The current value of parameter P106 is displayed lsquo0rsquo in this case

6 Press Enter

The lsquo0rsquo flashes

7 Press the Up arrow twice to adjust the value to lsquo2rsquo

8 Press Enter

The value is accepted

The lsquo2rsquo should not be flashing any longer Notice that the green status indicator next to the green Start button is now off

9 Press Esc

P106 should be displayed with the lsquo6rsquo flashing

10Press Esc until the P is flashing on the leftmost alphanumeric character

11Press the Up arrow or Down arrow to scroll through the group menu to t

12Press Enter

The lsquo1rsquo flashes

Stop the drive before changing parameter P106

14 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

13Press and hold down the up arrow until you reach lsquo221rsquo

If you go past it push the down arrow until you return to lsquo221rsquo

14Press Enter twice so that lsquo0rsquo is flashing

15Press the up arrow to move to the value lsquo2rsquo

16Press Enter

The value is accepted The lsquo2rsquo should not be flashing any longer Notice that the green status indicator next to the green Start button is now off

17Press Esc

Parameter t221 should now be displayed with the lsquo1rsquo flashing

18Press Esc until lsquo00rsquo is displayed

19Power the drive off until the display goes blank and then power it back on

Your drive is now configured to be controlled by push buttons and communication commands initiated from the MicroLogix controller

As with all building blocks these are examples of getting information back discretely from a product You can change parameter t221 or other settings of the starters and drives to suit your application

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 15

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

Set up the SMC-3 Controller

The SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller needs to be set up for the isolation contactor and for the appropriate settings for the motor Below are the DIP switch settings used by the SMC-3 controller and the steps to change them

TIP The 140M MPCB specified in the BOM for this building block has a trip class of 10 However if you would like to use the overload trip class settings on the SMC-3 controller you can change out the 140M MPCB with the 140M MCP

16 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

1 Set the DIP switch settings to the starting needs of your motor using the chart below

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 17

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

2 Be sure that DIP switch 14 is set to Normal (off)

This will bring in the isolation contactor when the SMC-3 has received the input signal DIP switch 14 will also close the side-mounted NO aux contact when the starter comes up to speed The closure of this aux contact will send the signal back to the MicroLogix controller

3 If changing to an MCP set DIP switches 11 and 12 to the appropriate overload trip class

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

IMPORTANT The 103T starter uses a 140M MCP (Motor Circuit Protector) which uses a separate overload E1 Plus which must be set according to your system needs

The 190E starter the SMC-3 starter and the PF 4M drive must have the overload dial set on the 140M MPCB (Motor Protection Circuit Breakers)

18 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Chapter 2

System Validation and Application Tips

Introduction

In this chapter you validate that communication is occurring as intended between the MicroLogix controller and the individual discrete starters as well as between the MicroLogix controller and the PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Starting and stopping using the PVc terminal entails having the external HOA switch in Auto position In Hand mode the PVc terminal can still read status of the starters and drives but will not have startstop capabilities

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 3 of that document

bull Verify that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 1 of this document

bull Verify that all the devices are connected per the Simple Motor Control CAD wiring diagram on the Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Verify that the MicroLogix controller PowerFlex drive and PVc terminal have power applied to them

19Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 19

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Personal computer with either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox web browser

bull PanelView Component terminal

bull One or more of these drives or starters

bull PowerFlex 4M drive

bull SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBR

bull 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE

bull 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

bull MicroLogix 1100 or 1400 controller

bull Serial cable catalog number 1761-CBL-PM02

bull USB cable catalog number 2711C-CBL-UU02 or comparable

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to verify that communication is occurring between your devices and to test the system

Start

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer page 21

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller

Communication page 22

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality page 25

20 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer

The PanelView Explorer design-time environment is accessed through a web browser by connecting your computer to the PVc terminal with a USB connection Before connecting your computer to the USB port of the PVc terminal you must first install the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver on a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system After installing the driver you can connect the PVc terminal to your computer For details on how to install the driver refer to the PanelView Component Terminal User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

PVc Terminal USB Connections

All PanelView Component terminals support a USB port connection and require a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system and with the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver installed The driver cannot be installed on a computer with Windows 2000 operating system

1 Connect one end of a USB cable to the mini-USB device port on your PVc terminal

2 Connect the other end of the USB cable to a USB port on your personal computer

3 Power up the PVc terminal and the personal computer

PanelView Explorer Startup Window

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 21

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication

The 3-inch monochrome touch screen PanelView Component (PVc) terminal communicates with the MicroLogix controller over the DF1 network The PVc application reads from and writes to the data table of the MicroLogix controller When the PVc application writes to the MicroLogix controller the controller program detects the value change and writes that new value to the appropriate drive soft starter or discrete starter

1 Connect the personal computer to the PVc terminal using a USB cable

2 Connect the PVc terminal to MicroLogix controller using the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable

3 Start either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox 20

4 In the address bar of your browser type the IP address 1692542542 (This is a fixed IP address that the USB port uses)

5 Press Enter to connect your personal computer to the PVc terminal

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02

USB port

USB port

MicroLogix controller

1761-CBL-PM02

22 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

6 Select the application name in the PVc dashboard dialog box and then click Edit

7 In the Edit dialog box click the Communication tab

The following dialog box appears

8 Click Serial under Protocol and select DF1 from the pull-down list

9 Under PanelView Component Settings verify the Station Address is 2

Validate button

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 23

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

10Under Controller Settings

a Accept the default name lsquoPLC-1rsquo

b Select MicroLogix from the Controller Type field

c In the Address field type 1

11Click Validate

12Click Save

13Click Switch to PanelView Explorer Startup

14 In the Application Dashboard window select the Simple Starting Building Block application

15Click Run to run the application

Navigating the Starters Overview Page

When the PVc application is running any drive or starter that is enabled is shown on the Starters Overview screen as being lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo or lsquoFaultrsquo To ease the use of this program by the OEM the header for the starter is left generic for the ability to change starters without the need to change the PVc first page To change the buttons themselves please see the PanelView Component HMI Terminals user manual

bull lsquoM1rsquo is designated for the SMC-3 controller

bull lsquoM2rsquo is designated for the 103T starter

bull lsquoM3rsquo is designated for the PF 4M drive

bull lsquoM4rsquo is designated for the 190E starter

24 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

bull Stopped indicates the starter is stopped

bull 140M On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull Starting (not shown) indicates the starter or drive is starting

bull Running indicates that motor is running based on feedback from the starter or drive

bull Fault indicates that there is an overload short circuit or other fault the starter has detected

Touching anywhere on Stopped 140M On Running Fault or M takes you to the individual starter screens regardless of the status shown

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality

Now that the PVc terminal is successfully communicating with the MicroLogix controller you are ready to test the Simple Starting functionality

Navigating the Simple Starting Screen

Touch any of the MTR or M buttons on the Starters Overview screen to get to each individual starter screen such as these for the SMC-3 and VFD starter screens

TIP At this point you may choose to edit the Starters Overview screen and delete any buttons and status displays that are associated with non-existing starters or drives

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 25

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

The in the top-right corner exits the application and goes to the PVc Terminal Starters Overview screen

The 190E and 103T screens are similar to that for the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the fault button on the starter screen

The SMC-3 screen shows the following states

The right column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Start is a momentary start button which appears when the starterdrive is in Auto and the 140M is Ready Touching this button starts the starter or drive

bull Stop is also a momentary button Touching this button stops the starterdrive

If the HOA (Hand Off Auto) is not in Auto the Start and Stop buttons will not appear nor will they appear without a 3 Ph On signal In this building block a signal of lsquo1rsquo back to the PLC indicates an Auto position a signal of lsquo0rsquo back indicates a hand or off position You can add an additional contact block to the HOA for the hand position and feedback to the PLC to give that status also

The center column of the SMC-3 starter screen indicates the following

bull 3 Ph On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull 3 Ph Off indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOffrsquo position

bull Stopped indicates the SMC-3 controller is stopped

bull Starting indicates the motor is starting

bull At Speed indicates the motor is running and is at speed

bull Start Fail indicates the starter or drive received a start signal but did not start within the time set in the RSLogix program

CausesRemedies When getting a Start Fail indication check the starter drive andor motor for wiring issues or damage In addition the Start Fail indication may occur due to too short a time for the Timer On Delay in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller See Timer On Delay below

Reset procedure To reset the Start Fail on the PVc terminal when using the SMC-3 controller or the 103T or 190E starters turn the front knob on the 140M MPCB or MCP to off and then back to on to clear the indication To clear this indication on the drive press the stop button on the either on the PVc terminal in Auto mode or press the stop button in Hand mode

26 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Timer On Delay The timer is started when the Start signal is sent to the starter or drive At the end of the timing a comparison is done to see if the motor has actually started The time duration for the Timer On Delay is fully adjustable in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller For this building block the timers are set to 35 seconds for the SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive and 5 seconds for the 103T and 190E starters Check rung 3 or 4 of the default program for the timer

The left column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Fault indicates that the starter has detected a fault

Not all starters have this capability

The SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive can provide this information When the fault indication appears on the SMC-3 controller touching Fault takes you to the listed fault screen for the controller

The PF 4M drive VFD screen always has the Fault button displayed If a fault appears on the PF 4M drive the fault code is displayed on the drive You can press the Fault button on the PVc terminal to view the fault description You can scroll through the fault list just as with the SMC-3 controller

The fault indication on the 103T or 190E starter screen does not have this fault screen functionality since these starters do not provide additional information

bull OVLD indicates that there is an overload detected by the starter

bull SC indicates that there is a short circuit detected by the starter

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 27

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Understanding Faults

The Fault button is always present on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal This Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is merely a GoTo button and does not by itself indicate a fault condition with the PF 4M drive The SMC-3 controller however sends a signal back to the PVc terminal indicating a fault with the controller The Fault GOTO button is then displayed on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo screen on the PVc terminal Pressing the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo Fault screen or on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault screen takes you to the individual fault screens where you can scroll through to find the fault indicated on the PF 4M drive or the SMC-3 controller and its corresponding description

rsquoVFDrsquo Fault Screen (for PF 4M Drive)

lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault Screen

In both cases look at the fault code on the PF 4M drive or SMC-3 controller

bull For the PF 4M drive you must view the fault code on the drive Press the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal to view the fault listing Locate the specific fault for the drive To get a deeper description of the fault consult the user manual for the drive

bull The SMC-3 Controller will have a flashing LED and you need to count the number of flashes Then on the PVc terminal scroll through the fault listing screen and identify the fault using the number of flashes for identification

The button in the lower-right corner of the fault listings takes you back to the SMC-3 or VFD starter screen

28 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Test the SMC-3 Controller

Follow this procedure to test the SMC-3 controller

1 Make sure the motor is disconnected from the load for ease of testing in this procedure

2 Verify that the external HOA is in Auto mode

3 Verify that the 140M is in the ON position (I)

This enables the 3-phase power to the starter

4 Verify that there is no Fault OVLD or SC state If there is check the PVc terminal for the error condition The screen should look like this

5 Verify that the 3 Ph On indicator is present

6 Verify that the Start and Stop buttons are present

7 Make sure that the SMC-3 controller has the proper DIP switch setting for your application (for example ramp time current limit or soft start)

8 Touch the Start button

9 Verify the following

bull The isolation contactor pulls in

bull The motor starts according to the starting method selected for the SMC-3 controller

bull The Running indication appears when the motor is up to speed

10Touch the Stop button to stop the motor

11Unplug the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable from the PVc terminal going to the MicroLogix controller

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 29

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA ltFEFF004f007000740069006f006e00730020007000650072006d0065007400740061006e007400200064006500200063007200e900650072002000640065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e007400730020005000440046002000700072006f00660065007300730069006f006e006e0065006c007300200066006900610062006c0065007300200070006f007500720020006c0061002000760069007300750061006c00690073006100740069006f006e0020006500740020006c00270069006d007000720065007300730069006f006e002e00200049006c002000650073007400200070006f0073007300690062006c0065002000640027006f00750076007200690072002000630065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e007400730020005000440046002000640061006e00730020004100630072006f0062006100740020006500740020005200650061006400650072002c002000760065007200730069006f006e002000200035002e00300020006f007500200075006c007400e9007200690065007500720065002egt PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 11: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

Chapter 1

Simple Motor Control Integration

Introduction

This chapter provides instructions to configure the PowerFlex 4M drive and SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller

You will configure two parameters in the PowerFlex 4M drive These are the basic parameters that need to be changed from the factory default settings in order to establish proper feedback to the MicroLogix controllers For your machine application there may be other drive parameters that need to be adjusted Consult your drive documentation for information on other drive parameters

You will also set the DIP switches on the SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller necessary to send appropriate discrete feedback to the MicroLogix controller

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed hardware design and installation recommendations as well as software installation

bull Apply power to your drive

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 11

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull One or more of these drives or startersndash PowerFlex 4-class drive (PowerFlex 4M drive is used in this document)

bull For PowerFlex 4M 4 40 and 400 drives there is a built-in keypad and display to edit parameters

bull For PowerFlex 40P drive to edit parameters you need either

- A hand-held interface catalog number 22-HIM-A3

or

- DriveExplorer software installed on the personal computer and a USB interface catalog number 1203-USB

ndash SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBRndash 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TEndash 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to configure the parameters in the drives and set the DIP switches on the SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller

Start

Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive page 13

Set up the SMC-3 Controller page 16

12 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive

Factory-default parameter values allow the drive to be controlled from the integral keypad No programming is required to start stop change direction and control speed directly from the integral keypad

However for this building block you will set parameter P106 [Start Source] for 2-wire control In the example for this building block the PF 4M drive is used in a 2-wire SRC Control (internal sourcing) Non-Reversing mode SRC is the default for a new drive If your drive has been used previously make sure the SNKSRC (SinkSource) switch under the front cover of the PF 4M drive is set to SRC See the PF 4M drive user manual for your specific needs other than shown in this example

In addition you will change parameter t221 [Relay Out Sel] to display lsquoMotorRunningrsquo since this building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive See Testing Other Drives and Starters page 30 for details

Follow this procedure to change parameters P106 [Start Source] and t221 [Relay Out Sel] using the PowerFlex 4M keypad explained below

PowerFlex 4M Keypad

Key Key Name Description

Escapebull Go back one step in Program mode

bull Cancel a change to a parameter value and exit Program mode

Selectbull Advance one step in the programming menu

bull Select a digit when viewing a parameter value

Up arrowbull Scroll through groups and parameters

bull Increase and decrease the value of a flashing digit

Down arrow

Enterbull Advance one step in the programming menu

bull Save a change to a parameter value

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 13

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

1 Press Esc until lsquo00rsquo is displayed

2 Press Sel until the leftmost character is flashing

3 Press the Down arrow until the leftmost character displayed is a flashing P

4 Press Enter

The P stops flashing and the rightmost numeric key is flashing

By default the first P parameter P101 is displayed Pressing the Up arrow increases and pressing the Down arrow decreases the value of the P parameters

5 Press the Up arrow five times to display P106

The current value of parameter P106 is displayed lsquo0rsquo in this case

6 Press Enter

The lsquo0rsquo flashes

7 Press the Up arrow twice to adjust the value to lsquo2rsquo

8 Press Enter

The value is accepted

The lsquo2rsquo should not be flashing any longer Notice that the green status indicator next to the green Start button is now off

9 Press Esc

P106 should be displayed with the lsquo6rsquo flashing

10Press Esc until the P is flashing on the leftmost alphanumeric character

11Press the Up arrow or Down arrow to scroll through the group menu to t

12Press Enter

The lsquo1rsquo flashes

Stop the drive before changing parameter P106

14 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

13Press and hold down the up arrow until you reach lsquo221rsquo

If you go past it push the down arrow until you return to lsquo221rsquo

14Press Enter twice so that lsquo0rsquo is flashing

15Press the up arrow to move to the value lsquo2rsquo

16Press Enter

The value is accepted The lsquo2rsquo should not be flashing any longer Notice that the green status indicator next to the green Start button is now off

17Press Esc

Parameter t221 should now be displayed with the lsquo1rsquo flashing

18Press Esc until lsquo00rsquo is displayed

19Power the drive off until the display goes blank and then power it back on

Your drive is now configured to be controlled by push buttons and communication commands initiated from the MicroLogix controller

As with all building blocks these are examples of getting information back discretely from a product You can change parameter t221 or other settings of the starters and drives to suit your application

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 15

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

Set up the SMC-3 Controller

The SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller needs to be set up for the isolation contactor and for the appropriate settings for the motor Below are the DIP switch settings used by the SMC-3 controller and the steps to change them

TIP The 140M MPCB specified in the BOM for this building block has a trip class of 10 However if you would like to use the overload trip class settings on the SMC-3 controller you can change out the 140M MPCB with the 140M MCP

16 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

1 Set the DIP switch settings to the starting needs of your motor using the chart below

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 17

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

2 Be sure that DIP switch 14 is set to Normal (off)

This will bring in the isolation contactor when the SMC-3 has received the input signal DIP switch 14 will also close the side-mounted NO aux contact when the starter comes up to speed The closure of this aux contact will send the signal back to the MicroLogix controller

3 If changing to an MCP set DIP switches 11 and 12 to the appropriate overload trip class

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

IMPORTANT The 103T starter uses a 140M MCP (Motor Circuit Protector) which uses a separate overload E1 Plus which must be set according to your system needs

The 190E starter the SMC-3 starter and the PF 4M drive must have the overload dial set on the 140M MPCB (Motor Protection Circuit Breakers)

18 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Chapter 2

System Validation and Application Tips

Introduction

In this chapter you validate that communication is occurring as intended between the MicroLogix controller and the individual discrete starters as well as between the MicroLogix controller and the PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Starting and stopping using the PVc terminal entails having the external HOA switch in Auto position In Hand mode the PVc terminal can still read status of the starters and drives but will not have startstop capabilities

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 3 of that document

bull Verify that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 1 of this document

bull Verify that all the devices are connected per the Simple Motor Control CAD wiring diagram on the Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Verify that the MicroLogix controller PowerFlex drive and PVc terminal have power applied to them

19Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 19

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Personal computer with either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox web browser

bull PanelView Component terminal

bull One or more of these drives or starters

bull PowerFlex 4M drive

bull SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBR

bull 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE

bull 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

bull MicroLogix 1100 or 1400 controller

bull Serial cable catalog number 1761-CBL-PM02

bull USB cable catalog number 2711C-CBL-UU02 or comparable

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to verify that communication is occurring between your devices and to test the system

Start

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer page 21

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller

Communication page 22

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality page 25

20 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer

The PanelView Explorer design-time environment is accessed through a web browser by connecting your computer to the PVc terminal with a USB connection Before connecting your computer to the USB port of the PVc terminal you must first install the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver on a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system After installing the driver you can connect the PVc terminal to your computer For details on how to install the driver refer to the PanelView Component Terminal User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

PVc Terminal USB Connections

All PanelView Component terminals support a USB port connection and require a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system and with the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver installed The driver cannot be installed on a computer with Windows 2000 operating system

1 Connect one end of a USB cable to the mini-USB device port on your PVc terminal

2 Connect the other end of the USB cable to a USB port on your personal computer

3 Power up the PVc terminal and the personal computer

PanelView Explorer Startup Window

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 21

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication

The 3-inch monochrome touch screen PanelView Component (PVc) terminal communicates with the MicroLogix controller over the DF1 network The PVc application reads from and writes to the data table of the MicroLogix controller When the PVc application writes to the MicroLogix controller the controller program detects the value change and writes that new value to the appropriate drive soft starter or discrete starter

1 Connect the personal computer to the PVc terminal using a USB cable

2 Connect the PVc terminal to MicroLogix controller using the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable

3 Start either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox 20

4 In the address bar of your browser type the IP address 1692542542 (This is a fixed IP address that the USB port uses)

5 Press Enter to connect your personal computer to the PVc terminal

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02

USB port

USB port

MicroLogix controller

1761-CBL-PM02

22 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

6 Select the application name in the PVc dashboard dialog box and then click Edit

7 In the Edit dialog box click the Communication tab

The following dialog box appears

8 Click Serial under Protocol and select DF1 from the pull-down list

9 Under PanelView Component Settings verify the Station Address is 2

Validate button

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 23

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

10Under Controller Settings

a Accept the default name lsquoPLC-1rsquo

b Select MicroLogix from the Controller Type field

c In the Address field type 1

11Click Validate

12Click Save

13Click Switch to PanelView Explorer Startup

14 In the Application Dashboard window select the Simple Starting Building Block application

15Click Run to run the application

Navigating the Starters Overview Page

When the PVc application is running any drive or starter that is enabled is shown on the Starters Overview screen as being lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo or lsquoFaultrsquo To ease the use of this program by the OEM the header for the starter is left generic for the ability to change starters without the need to change the PVc first page To change the buttons themselves please see the PanelView Component HMI Terminals user manual

bull lsquoM1rsquo is designated for the SMC-3 controller

bull lsquoM2rsquo is designated for the 103T starter

bull lsquoM3rsquo is designated for the PF 4M drive

bull lsquoM4rsquo is designated for the 190E starter

24 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

bull Stopped indicates the starter is stopped

bull 140M On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull Starting (not shown) indicates the starter or drive is starting

bull Running indicates that motor is running based on feedback from the starter or drive

bull Fault indicates that there is an overload short circuit or other fault the starter has detected

Touching anywhere on Stopped 140M On Running Fault or M takes you to the individual starter screens regardless of the status shown

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality

Now that the PVc terminal is successfully communicating with the MicroLogix controller you are ready to test the Simple Starting functionality

Navigating the Simple Starting Screen

Touch any of the MTR or M buttons on the Starters Overview screen to get to each individual starter screen such as these for the SMC-3 and VFD starter screens

TIP At this point you may choose to edit the Starters Overview screen and delete any buttons and status displays that are associated with non-existing starters or drives

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 25

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

The in the top-right corner exits the application and goes to the PVc Terminal Starters Overview screen

The 190E and 103T screens are similar to that for the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the fault button on the starter screen

The SMC-3 screen shows the following states

The right column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Start is a momentary start button which appears when the starterdrive is in Auto and the 140M is Ready Touching this button starts the starter or drive

bull Stop is also a momentary button Touching this button stops the starterdrive

If the HOA (Hand Off Auto) is not in Auto the Start and Stop buttons will not appear nor will they appear without a 3 Ph On signal In this building block a signal of lsquo1rsquo back to the PLC indicates an Auto position a signal of lsquo0rsquo back indicates a hand or off position You can add an additional contact block to the HOA for the hand position and feedback to the PLC to give that status also

The center column of the SMC-3 starter screen indicates the following

bull 3 Ph On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull 3 Ph Off indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOffrsquo position

bull Stopped indicates the SMC-3 controller is stopped

bull Starting indicates the motor is starting

bull At Speed indicates the motor is running and is at speed

bull Start Fail indicates the starter or drive received a start signal but did not start within the time set in the RSLogix program

CausesRemedies When getting a Start Fail indication check the starter drive andor motor for wiring issues or damage In addition the Start Fail indication may occur due to too short a time for the Timer On Delay in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller See Timer On Delay below

Reset procedure To reset the Start Fail on the PVc terminal when using the SMC-3 controller or the 103T or 190E starters turn the front knob on the 140M MPCB or MCP to off and then back to on to clear the indication To clear this indication on the drive press the stop button on the either on the PVc terminal in Auto mode or press the stop button in Hand mode

26 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Timer On Delay The timer is started when the Start signal is sent to the starter or drive At the end of the timing a comparison is done to see if the motor has actually started The time duration for the Timer On Delay is fully adjustable in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller For this building block the timers are set to 35 seconds for the SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive and 5 seconds for the 103T and 190E starters Check rung 3 or 4 of the default program for the timer

The left column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Fault indicates that the starter has detected a fault

Not all starters have this capability

The SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive can provide this information When the fault indication appears on the SMC-3 controller touching Fault takes you to the listed fault screen for the controller

The PF 4M drive VFD screen always has the Fault button displayed If a fault appears on the PF 4M drive the fault code is displayed on the drive You can press the Fault button on the PVc terminal to view the fault description You can scroll through the fault list just as with the SMC-3 controller

The fault indication on the 103T or 190E starter screen does not have this fault screen functionality since these starters do not provide additional information

bull OVLD indicates that there is an overload detected by the starter

bull SC indicates that there is a short circuit detected by the starter

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 27

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Understanding Faults

The Fault button is always present on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal This Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is merely a GoTo button and does not by itself indicate a fault condition with the PF 4M drive The SMC-3 controller however sends a signal back to the PVc terminal indicating a fault with the controller The Fault GOTO button is then displayed on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo screen on the PVc terminal Pressing the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo Fault screen or on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault screen takes you to the individual fault screens where you can scroll through to find the fault indicated on the PF 4M drive or the SMC-3 controller and its corresponding description

rsquoVFDrsquo Fault Screen (for PF 4M Drive)

lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault Screen

In both cases look at the fault code on the PF 4M drive or SMC-3 controller

bull For the PF 4M drive you must view the fault code on the drive Press the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal to view the fault listing Locate the specific fault for the drive To get a deeper description of the fault consult the user manual for the drive

bull The SMC-3 Controller will have a flashing LED and you need to count the number of flashes Then on the PVc terminal scroll through the fault listing screen and identify the fault using the number of flashes for identification

The button in the lower-right corner of the fault listings takes you back to the SMC-3 or VFD starter screen

28 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Test the SMC-3 Controller

Follow this procedure to test the SMC-3 controller

1 Make sure the motor is disconnected from the load for ease of testing in this procedure

2 Verify that the external HOA is in Auto mode

3 Verify that the 140M is in the ON position (I)

This enables the 3-phase power to the starter

4 Verify that there is no Fault OVLD or SC state If there is check the PVc terminal for the error condition The screen should look like this

5 Verify that the 3 Ph On indicator is present

6 Verify that the Start and Stop buttons are present

7 Make sure that the SMC-3 controller has the proper DIP switch setting for your application (for example ramp time current limit or soft start)

8 Touch the Start button

9 Verify the following

bull The isolation contactor pulls in

bull The motor starts according to the starting method selected for the SMC-3 controller

bull The Running indication appears when the motor is up to speed

10Touch the Stop button to stop the motor

11Unplug the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable from the PVc terminal going to the MicroLogix controller

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 29

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN ltFEFF004200720075006700200064006900730073006500200069006e0064007300740069006c006c0069006e006700650072002000740069006c0020006100740020006f0070007200650074007400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002c0020006400650072002000650072002000650067006e006500640065002000740069006c0020007000e5006c006900640065006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f00670020007500640073006b007200690076006e0069006e006700200061006600200066006f0072007200650074006e0069006e006700730064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072006e00650020006b0061006e002000e50062006e006500730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0067002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f00670020006e0079006500720065002egt NLD ltFEFF004700650062007200750069006b002000640065007a006500200069006e007300740065006c006c0069006e00670065006e0020006f006d0020005000440046002d0064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e0020007400650020006d0061006b0065006e00200064006900650020006700650073006300680069006b00740020007a0069006a006e0020006f006d0020007a0061006b0065006c0069006a006b006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e00200062006500740072006f0075007700620061006100720020007700650065007200200074006500200067006500760065006e00200065006e0020006100660020007400650020006400720075006b006b0065006e002e0020004400650020005000440046002d0064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e0020006b0075006e006e0065006e00200077006f007200640065006e002000670065006f00700065006e00640020006d006500740020004100630072006f00620061007400200065006e002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006e00200068006f006700650072002egt ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 12: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull One or more of these drives or startersndash PowerFlex 4-class drive (PowerFlex 4M drive is used in this document)

bull For PowerFlex 4M 4 40 and 400 drives there is a built-in keypad and display to edit parameters

bull For PowerFlex 40P drive to edit parameters you need either

- A hand-held interface catalog number 22-HIM-A3

or

- DriveExplorer software installed on the personal computer and a USB interface catalog number 1203-USB

ndash SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBRndash 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TEndash 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to configure the parameters in the drives and set the DIP switches on the SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller

Start

Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive page 13

Set up the SMC-3 Controller page 16

12 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive

Factory-default parameter values allow the drive to be controlled from the integral keypad No programming is required to start stop change direction and control speed directly from the integral keypad

However for this building block you will set parameter P106 [Start Source] for 2-wire control In the example for this building block the PF 4M drive is used in a 2-wire SRC Control (internal sourcing) Non-Reversing mode SRC is the default for a new drive If your drive has been used previously make sure the SNKSRC (SinkSource) switch under the front cover of the PF 4M drive is set to SRC See the PF 4M drive user manual for your specific needs other than shown in this example

In addition you will change parameter t221 [Relay Out Sel] to display lsquoMotorRunningrsquo since this building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive See Testing Other Drives and Starters page 30 for details

Follow this procedure to change parameters P106 [Start Source] and t221 [Relay Out Sel] using the PowerFlex 4M keypad explained below

PowerFlex 4M Keypad

Key Key Name Description

Escapebull Go back one step in Program mode

bull Cancel a change to a parameter value and exit Program mode

Selectbull Advance one step in the programming menu

bull Select a digit when viewing a parameter value

Up arrowbull Scroll through groups and parameters

bull Increase and decrease the value of a flashing digit

Down arrow

Enterbull Advance one step in the programming menu

bull Save a change to a parameter value

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 13

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

1 Press Esc until lsquo00rsquo is displayed

2 Press Sel until the leftmost character is flashing

3 Press the Down arrow until the leftmost character displayed is a flashing P

4 Press Enter

The P stops flashing and the rightmost numeric key is flashing

By default the first P parameter P101 is displayed Pressing the Up arrow increases and pressing the Down arrow decreases the value of the P parameters

5 Press the Up arrow five times to display P106

The current value of parameter P106 is displayed lsquo0rsquo in this case

6 Press Enter

The lsquo0rsquo flashes

7 Press the Up arrow twice to adjust the value to lsquo2rsquo

8 Press Enter

The value is accepted

The lsquo2rsquo should not be flashing any longer Notice that the green status indicator next to the green Start button is now off

9 Press Esc

P106 should be displayed with the lsquo6rsquo flashing

10Press Esc until the P is flashing on the leftmost alphanumeric character

11Press the Up arrow or Down arrow to scroll through the group menu to t

12Press Enter

The lsquo1rsquo flashes

Stop the drive before changing parameter P106

14 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

13Press and hold down the up arrow until you reach lsquo221rsquo

If you go past it push the down arrow until you return to lsquo221rsquo

14Press Enter twice so that lsquo0rsquo is flashing

15Press the up arrow to move to the value lsquo2rsquo

16Press Enter

The value is accepted The lsquo2rsquo should not be flashing any longer Notice that the green status indicator next to the green Start button is now off

17Press Esc

Parameter t221 should now be displayed with the lsquo1rsquo flashing

18Press Esc until lsquo00rsquo is displayed

19Power the drive off until the display goes blank and then power it back on

Your drive is now configured to be controlled by push buttons and communication commands initiated from the MicroLogix controller

As with all building blocks these are examples of getting information back discretely from a product You can change parameter t221 or other settings of the starters and drives to suit your application

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 15

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

Set up the SMC-3 Controller

The SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller needs to be set up for the isolation contactor and for the appropriate settings for the motor Below are the DIP switch settings used by the SMC-3 controller and the steps to change them

TIP The 140M MPCB specified in the BOM for this building block has a trip class of 10 However if you would like to use the overload trip class settings on the SMC-3 controller you can change out the 140M MPCB with the 140M MCP

16 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

1 Set the DIP switch settings to the starting needs of your motor using the chart below

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 17

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

2 Be sure that DIP switch 14 is set to Normal (off)

This will bring in the isolation contactor when the SMC-3 has received the input signal DIP switch 14 will also close the side-mounted NO aux contact when the starter comes up to speed The closure of this aux contact will send the signal back to the MicroLogix controller

3 If changing to an MCP set DIP switches 11 and 12 to the appropriate overload trip class

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

IMPORTANT The 103T starter uses a 140M MCP (Motor Circuit Protector) which uses a separate overload E1 Plus which must be set according to your system needs

The 190E starter the SMC-3 starter and the PF 4M drive must have the overload dial set on the 140M MPCB (Motor Protection Circuit Breakers)

18 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Chapter 2

System Validation and Application Tips

Introduction

In this chapter you validate that communication is occurring as intended between the MicroLogix controller and the individual discrete starters as well as between the MicroLogix controller and the PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Starting and stopping using the PVc terminal entails having the external HOA switch in Auto position In Hand mode the PVc terminal can still read status of the starters and drives but will not have startstop capabilities

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 3 of that document

bull Verify that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 1 of this document

bull Verify that all the devices are connected per the Simple Motor Control CAD wiring diagram on the Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Verify that the MicroLogix controller PowerFlex drive and PVc terminal have power applied to them

19Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 19

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Personal computer with either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox web browser

bull PanelView Component terminal

bull One or more of these drives or starters

bull PowerFlex 4M drive

bull SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBR

bull 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE

bull 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

bull MicroLogix 1100 or 1400 controller

bull Serial cable catalog number 1761-CBL-PM02

bull USB cable catalog number 2711C-CBL-UU02 or comparable

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to verify that communication is occurring between your devices and to test the system

Start

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer page 21

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller

Communication page 22

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality page 25

20 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer

The PanelView Explorer design-time environment is accessed through a web browser by connecting your computer to the PVc terminal with a USB connection Before connecting your computer to the USB port of the PVc terminal you must first install the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver on a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system After installing the driver you can connect the PVc terminal to your computer For details on how to install the driver refer to the PanelView Component Terminal User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

PVc Terminal USB Connections

All PanelView Component terminals support a USB port connection and require a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system and with the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver installed The driver cannot be installed on a computer with Windows 2000 operating system

1 Connect one end of a USB cable to the mini-USB device port on your PVc terminal

2 Connect the other end of the USB cable to a USB port on your personal computer

3 Power up the PVc terminal and the personal computer

PanelView Explorer Startup Window

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 21

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication

The 3-inch monochrome touch screen PanelView Component (PVc) terminal communicates with the MicroLogix controller over the DF1 network The PVc application reads from and writes to the data table of the MicroLogix controller When the PVc application writes to the MicroLogix controller the controller program detects the value change and writes that new value to the appropriate drive soft starter or discrete starter

1 Connect the personal computer to the PVc terminal using a USB cable

2 Connect the PVc terminal to MicroLogix controller using the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable

3 Start either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox 20

4 In the address bar of your browser type the IP address 1692542542 (This is a fixed IP address that the USB port uses)

5 Press Enter to connect your personal computer to the PVc terminal

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02

USB port

USB port

MicroLogix controller

1761-CBL-PM02

22 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

6 Select the application name in the PVc dashboard dialog box and then click Edit

7 In the Edit dialog box click the Communication tab

The following dialog box appears

8 Click Serial under Protocol and select DF1 from the pull-down list

9 Under PanelView Component Settings verify the Station Address is 2

Validate button

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 23

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

10Under Controller Settings

a Accept the default name lsquoPLC-1rsquo

b Select MicroLogix from the Controller Type field

c In the Address field type 1

11Click Validate

12Click Save

13Click Switch to PanelView Explorer Startup

14 In the Application Dashboard window select the Simple Starting Building Block application

15Click Run to run the application

Navigating the Starters Overview Page

When the PVc application is running any drive or starter that is enabled is shown on the Starters Overview screen as being lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo or lsquoFaultrsquo To ease the use of this program by the OEM the header for the starter is left generic for the ability to change starters without the need to change the PVc first page To change the buttons themselves please see the PanelView Component HMI Terminals user manual

bull lsquoM1rsquo is designated for the SMC-3 controller

bull lsquoM2rsquo is designated for the 103T starter

bull lsquoM3rsquo is designated for the PF 4M drive

bull lsquoM4rsquo is designated for the 190E starter

24 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

bull Stopped indicates the starter is stopped

bull 140M On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull Starting (not shown) indicates the starter or drive is starting

bull Running indicates that motor is running based on feedback from the starter or drive

bull Fault indicates that there is an overload short circuit or other fault the starter has detected

Touching anywhere on Stopped 140M On Running Fault or M takes you to the individual starter screens regardless of the status shown

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality

Now that the PVc terminal is successfully communicating with the MicroLogix controller you are ready to test the Simple Starting functionality

Navigating the Simple Starting Screen

Touch any of the MTR or M buttons on the Starters Overview screen to get to each individual starter screen such as these for the SMC-3 and VFD starter screens

TIP At this point you may choose to edit the Starters Overview screen and delete any buttons and status displays that are associated with non-existing starters or drives

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 25

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

The in the top-right corner exits the application and goes to the PVc Terminal Starters Overview screen

The 190E and 103T screens are similar to that for the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the fault button on the starter screen

The SMC-3 screen shows the following states

The right column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Start is a momentary start button which appears when the starterdrive is in Auto and the 140M is Ready Touching this button starts the starter or drive

bull Stop is also a momentary button Touching this button stops the starterdrive

If the HOA (Hand Off Auto) is not in Auto the Start and Stop buttons will not appear nor will they appear without a 3 Ph On signal In this building block a signal of lsquo1rsquo back to the PLC indicates an Auto position a signal of lsquo0rsquo back indicates a hand or off position You can add an additional contact block to the HOA for the hand position and feedback to the PLC to give that status also

The center column of the SMC-3 starter screen indicates the following

bull 3 Ph On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull 3 Ph Off indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOffrsquo position

bull Stopped indicates the SMC-3 controller is stopped

bull Starting indicates the motor is starting

bull At Speed indicates the motor is running and is at speed

bull Start Fail indicates the starter or drive received a start signal but did not start within the time set in the RSLogix program

CausesRemedies When getting a Start Fail indication check the starter drive andor motor for wiring issues or damage In addition the Start Fail indication may occur due to too short a time for the Timer On Delay in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller See Timer On Delay below

Reset procedure To reset the Start Fail on the PVc terminal when using the SMC-3 controller or the 103T or 190E starters turn the front knob on the 140M MPCB or MCP to off and then back to on to clear the indication To clear this indication on the drive press the stop button on the either on the PVc terminal in Auto mode or press the stop button in Hand mode

26 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Timer On Delay The timer is started when the Start signal is sent to the starter or drive At the end of the timing a comparison is done to see if the motor has actually started The time duration for the Timer On Delay is fully adjustable in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller For this building block the timers are set to 35 seconds for the SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive and 5 seconds for the 103T and 190E starters Check rung 3 or 4 of the default program for the timer

The left column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Fault indicates that the starter has detected a fault

Not all starters have this capability

The SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive can provide this information When the fault indication appears on the SMC-3 controller touching Fault takes you to the listed fault screen for the controller

The PF 4M drive VFD screen always has the Fault button displayed If a fault appears on the PF 4M drive the fault code is displayed on the drive You can press the Fault button on the PVc terminal to view the fault description You can scroll through the fault list just as with the SMC-3 controller

The fault indication on the 103T or 190E starter screen does not have this fault screen functionality since these starters do not provide additional information

bull OVLD indicates that there is an overload detected by the starter

bull SC indicates that there is a short circuit detected by the starter

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 27

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Understanding Faults

The Fault button is always present on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal This Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is merely a GoTo button and does not by itself indicate a fault condition with the PF 4M drive The SMC-3 controller however sends a signal back to the PVc terminal indicating a fault with the controller The Fault GOTO button is then displayed on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo screen on the PVc terminal Pressing the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo Fault screen or on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault screen takes you to the individual fault screens where you can scroll through to find the fault indicated on the PF 4M drive or the SMC-3 controller and its corresponding description

rsquoVFDrsquo Fault Screen (for PF 4M Drive)

lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault Screen

In both cases look at the fault code on the PF 4M drive or SMC-3 controller

bull For the PF 4M drive you must view the fault code on the drive Press the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal to view the fault listing Locate the specific fault for the drive To get a deeper description of the fault consult the user manual for the drive

bull The SMC-3 Controller will have a flashing LED and you need to count the number of flashes Then on the PVc terminal scroll through the fault listing screen and identify the fault using the number of flashes for identification

The button in the lower-right corner of the fault listings takes you back to the SMC-3 or VFD starter screen

28 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Test the SMC-3 Controller

Follow this procedure to test the SMC-3 controller

1 Make sure the motor is disconnected from the load for ease of testing in this procedure

2 Verify that the external HOA is in Auto mode

3 Verify that the 140M is in the ON position (I)

This enables the 3-phase power to the starter

4 Verify that there is no Fault OVLD or SC state If there is check the PVc terminal for the error condition The screen should look like this

5 Verify that the 3 Ph On indicator is present

6 Verify that the Start and Stop buttons are present

7 Make sure that the SMC-3 controller has the proper DIP switch setting for your application (for example ramp time current limit or soft start)

8 Touch the Start button

9 Verify the following

bull The isolation contactor pulls in

bull The motor starts according to the starting method selected for the SMC-3 controller

bull The Running indication appears when the motor is up to speed

10Touch the Stop button to stop the motor

11Unplug the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable from the PVc terminal going to the MicroLogix controller

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 29

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD ltFEFF004700650062007200750069006b002000640065007a006500200069006e007300740065006c006c0069006e00670065006e0020006f006d0020005000440046002d0064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e0020007400650020006d0061006b0065006e00200064006900650020006700650073006300680069006b00740020007a0069006a006e0020006f006d0020007a0061006b0065006c0069006a006b006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e00200062006500740072006f0075007700620061006100720020007700650065007200200074006500200067006500760065006e00200065006e0020006100660020007400650020006400720075006b006b0065006e002e0020004400650020005000440046002d0064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e0020006b0075006e006e0065006e00200077006f007200640065006e002000670065006f00700065006e00640020006d006500740020004100630072006f00620061007400200065006e002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006e00200068006f006700650072002egt ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 13: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive

Factory-default parameter values allow the drive to be controlled from the integral keypad No programming is required to start stop change direction and control speed directly from the integral keypad

However for this building block you will set parameter P106 [Start Source] for 2-wire control In the example for this building block the PF 4M drive is used in a 2-wire SRC Control (internal sourcing) Non-Reversing mode SRC is the default for a new drive If your drive has been used previously make sure the SNKSRC (SinkSource) switch under the front cover of the PF 4M drive is set to SRC See the PF 4M drive user manual for your specific needs other than shown in this example

In addition you will change parameter t221 [Relay Out Sel] to display lsquoMotorRunningrsquo since this building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive See Testing Other Drives and Starters page 30 for details

Follow this procedure to change parameters P106 [Start Source] and t221 [Relay Out Sel] using the PowerFlex 4M keypad explained below

PowerFlex 4M Keypad

Key Key Name Description

Escapebull Go back one step in Program mode

bull Cancel a change to a parameter value and exit Program mode

Selectbull Advance one step in the programming menu

bull Select a digit when viewing a parameter value

Up arrowbull Scroll through groups and parameters

bull Increase and decrease the value of a flashing digit

Down arrow

Enterbull Advance one step in the programming menu

bull Save a change to a parameter value

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 13

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

1 Press Esc until lsquo00rsquo is displayed

2 Press Sel until the leftmost character is flashing

3 Press the Down arrow until the leftmost character displayed is a flashing P

4 Press Enter

The P stops flashing and the rightmost numeric key is flashing

By default the first P parameter P101 is displayed Pressing the Up arrow increases and pressing the Down arrow decreases the value of the P parameters

5 Press the Up arrow five times to display P106

The current value of parameter P106 is displayed lsquo0rsquo in this case

6 Press Enter

The lsquo0rsquo flashes

7 Press the Up arrow twice to adjust the value to lsquo2rsquo

8 Press Enter

The value is accepted

The lsquo2rsquo should not be flashing any longer Notice that the green status indicator next to the green Start button is now off

9 Press Esc

P106 should be displayed with the lsquo6rsquo flashing

10Press Esc until the P is flashing on the leftmost alphanumeric character

11Press the Up arrow or Down arrow to scroll through the group menu to t

12Press Enter

The lsquo1rsquo flashes

Stop the drive before changing parameter P106

14 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

13Press and hold down the up arrow until you reach lsquo221rsquo

If you go past it push the down arrow until you return to lsquo221rsquo

14Press Enter twice so that lsquo0rsquo is flashing

15Press the up arrow to move to the value lsquo2rsquo

16Press Enter

The value is accepted The lsquo2rsquo should not be flashing any longer Notice that the green status indicator next to the green Start button is now off

17Press Esc

Parameter t221 should now be displayed with the lsquo1rsquo flashing

18Press Esc until lsquo00rsquo is displayed

19Power the drive off until the display goes blank and then power it back on

Your drive is now configured to be controlled by push buttons and communication commands initiated from the MicroLogix controller

As with all building blocks these are examples of getting information back discretely from a product You can change parameter t221 or other settings of the starters and drives to suit your application

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 15

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

Set up the SMC-3 Controller

The SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller needs to be set up for the isolation contactor and for the appropriate settings for the motor Below are the DIP switch settings used by the SMC-3 controller and the steps to change them

TIP The 140M MPCB specified in the BOM for this building block has a trip class of 10 However if you would like to use the overload trip class settings on the SMC-3 controller you can change out the 140M MPCB with the 140M MCP

16 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

1 Set the DIP switch settings to the starting needs of your motor using the chart below

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 17

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

2 Be sure that DIP switch 14 is set to Normal (off)

This will bring in the isolation contactor when the SMC-3 has received the input signal DIP switch 14 will also close the side-mounted NO aux contact when the starter comes up to speed The closure of this aux contact will send the signal back to the MicroLogix controller

3 If changing to an MCP set DIP switches 11 and 12 to the appropriate overload trip class

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

IMPORTANT The 103T starter uses a 140M MCP (Motor Circuit Protector) which uses a separate overload E1 Plus which must be set according to your system needs

The 190E starter the SMC-3 starter and the PF 4M drive must have the overload dial set on the 140M MPCB (Motor Protection Circuit Breakers)

18 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Chapter 2

System Validation and Application Tips

Introduction

In this chapter you validate that communication is occurring as intended between the MicroLogix controller and the individual discrete starters as well as between the MicroLogix controller and the PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Starting and stopping using the PVc terminal entails having the external HOA switch in Auto position In Hand mode the PVc terminal can still read status of the starters and drives but will not have startstop capabilities

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 3 of that document

bull Verify that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 1 of this document

bull Verify that all the devices are connected per the Simple Motor Control CAD wiring diagram on the Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Verify that the MicroLogix controller PowerFlex drive and PVc terminal have power applied to them

19Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 19

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Personal computer with either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox web browser

bull PanelView Component terminal

bull One or more of these drives or starters

bull PowerFlex 4M drive

bull SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBR

bull 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE

bull 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

bull MicroLogix 1100 or 1400 controller

bull Serial cable catalog number 1761-CBL-PM02

bull USB cable catalog number 2711C-CBL-UU02 or comparable

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to verify that communication is occurring between your devices and to test the system

Start

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer page 21

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller

Communication page 22

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality page 25

20 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer

The PanelView Explorer design-time environment is accessed through a web browser by connecting your computer to the PVc terminal with a USB connection Before connecting your computer to the USB port of the PVc terminal you must first install the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver on a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system After installing the driver you can connect the PVc terminal to your computer For details on how to install the driver refer to the PanelView Component Terminal User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

PVc Terminal USB Connections

All PanelView Component terminals support a USB port connection and require a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system and with the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver installed The driver cannot be installed on a computer with Windows 2000 operating system

1 Connect one end of a USB cable to the mini-USB device port on your PVc terminal

2 Connect the other end of the USB cable to a USB port on your personal computer

3 Power up the PVc terminal and the personal computer

PanelView Explorer Startup Window

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 21

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication

The 3-inch monochrome touch screen PanelView Component (PVc) terminal communicates with the MicroLogix controller over the DF1 network The PVc application reads from and writes to the data table of the MicroLogix controller When the PVc application writes to the MicroLogix controller the controller program detects the value change and writes that new value to the appropriate drive soft starter or discrete starter

1 Connect the personal computer to the PVc terminal using a USB cable

2 Connect the PVc terminal to MicroLogix controller using the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable

3 Start either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox 20

4 In the address bar of your browser type the IP address 1692542542 (This is a fixed IP address that the USB port uses)

5 Press Enter to connect your personal computer to the PVc terminal

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02

USB port

USB port

MicroLogix controller

1761-CBL-PM02

22 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

6 Select the application name in the PVc dashboard dialog box and then click Edit

7 In the Edit dialog box click the Communication tab

The following dialog box appears

8 Click Serial under Protocol and select DF1 from the pull-down list

9 Under PanelView Component Settings verify the Station Address is 2

Validate button

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 23

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

10Under Controller Settings

a Accept the default name lsquoPLC-1rsquo

b Select MicroLogix from the Controller Type field

c In the Address field type 1

11Click Validate

12Click Save

13Click Switch to PanelView Explorer Startup

14 In the Application Dashboard window select the Simple Starting Building Block application

15Click Run to run the application

Navigating the Starters Overview Page

When the PVc application is running any drive or starter that is enabled is shown on the Starters Overview screen as being lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo or lsquoFaultrsquo To ease the use of this program by the OEM the header for the starter is left generic for the ability to change starters without the need to change the PVc first page To change the buttons themselves please see the PanelView Component HMI Terminals user manual

bull lsquoM1rsquo is designated for the SMC-3 controller

bull lsquoM2rsquo is designated for the 103T starter

bull lsquoM3rsquo is designated for the PF 4M drive

bull lsquoM4rsquo is designated for the 190E starter

24 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

bull Stopped indicates the starter is stopped

bull 140M On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull Starting (not shown) indicates the starter or drive is starting

bull Running indicates that motor is running based on feedback from the starter or drive

bull Fault indicates that there is an overload short circuit or other fault the starter has detected

Touching anywhere on Stopped 140M On Running Fault or M takes you to the individual starter screens regardless of the status shown

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality

Now that the PVc terminal is successfully communicating with the MicroLogix controller you are ready to test the Simple Starting functionality

Navigating the Simple Starting Screen

Touch any of the MTR or M buttons on the Starters Overview screen to get to each individual starter screen such as these for the SMC-3 and VFD starter screens

TIP At this point you may choose to edit the Starters Overview screen and delete any buttons and status displays that are associated with non-existing starters or drives

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 25

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

The in the top-right corner exits the application and goes to the PVc Terminal Starters Overview screen

The 190E and 103T screens are similar to that for the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the fault button on the starter screen

The SMC-3 screen shows the following states

The right column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Start is a momentary start button which appears when the starterdrive is in Auto and the 140M is Ready Touching this button starts the starter or drive

bull Stop is also a momentary button Touching this button stops the starterdrive

If the HOA (Hand Off Auto) is not in Auto the Start and Stop buttons will not appear nor will they appear without a 3 Ph On signal In this building block a signal of lsquo1rsquo back to the PLC indicates an Auto position a signal of lsquo0rsquo back indicates a hand or off position You can add an additional contact block to the HOA for the hand position and feedback to the PLC to give that status also

The center column of the SMC-3 starter screen indicates the following

bull 3 Ph On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull 3 Ph Off indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOffrsquo position

bull Stopped indicates the SMC-3 controller is stopped

bull Starting indicates the motor is starting

bull At Speed indicates the motor is running and is at speed

bull Start Fail indicates the starter or drive received a start signal but did not start within the time set in the RSLogix program

CausesRemedies When getting a Start Fail indication check the starter drive andor motor for wiring issues or damage In addition the Start Fail indication may occur due to too short a time for the Timer On Delay in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller See Timer On Delay below

Reset procedure To reset the Start Fail on the PVc terminal when using the SMC-3 controller or the 103T or 190E starters turn the front knob on the 140M MPCB or MCP to off and then back to on to clear the indication To clear this indication on the drive press the stop button on the either on the PVc terminal in Auto mode or press the stop button in Hand mode

26 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Timer On Delay The timer is started when the Start signal is sent to the starter or drive At the end of the timing a comparison is done to see if the motor has actually started The time duration for the Timer On Delay is fully adjustable in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller For this building block the timers are set to 35 seconds for the SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive and 5 seconds for the 103T and 190E starters Check rung 3 or 4 of the default program for the timer

The left column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Fault indicates that the starter has detected a fault

Not all starters have this capability

The SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive can provide this information When the fault indication appears on the SMC-3 controller touching Fault takes you to the listed fault screen for the controller

The PF 4M drive VFD screen always has the Fault button displayed If a fault appears on the PF 4M drive the fault code is displayed on the drive You can press the Fault button on the PVc terminal to view the fault description You can scroll through the fault list just as with the SMC-3 controller

The fault indication on the 103T or 190E starter screen does not have this fault screen functionality since these starters do not provide additional information

bull OVLD indicates that there is an overload detected by the starter

bull SC indicates that there is a short circuit detected by the starter

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 27

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Understanding Faults

The Fault button is always present on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal This Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is merely a GoTo button and does not by itself indicate a fault condition with the PF 4M drive The SMC-3 controller however sends a signal back to the PVc terminal indicating a fault with the controller The Fault GOTO button is then displayed on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo screen on the PVc terminal Pressing the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo Fault screen or on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault screen takes you to the individual fault screens where you can scroll through to find the fault indicated on the PF 4M drive or the SMC-3 controller and its corresponding description

rsquoVFDrsquo Fault Screen (for PF 4M Drive)

lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault Screen

In both cases look at the fault code on the PF 4M drive or SMC-3 controller

bull For the PF 4M drive you must view the fault code on the drive Press the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal to view the fault listing Locate the specific fault for the drive To get a deeper description of the fault consult the user manual for the drive

bull The SMC-3 Controller will have a flashing LED and you need to count the number of flashes Then on the PVc terminal scroll through the fault listing screen and identify the fault using the number of flashes for identification

The button in the lower-right corner of the fault listings takes you back to the SMC-3 or VFD starter screen

28 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Test the SMC-3 Controller

Follow this procedure to test the SMC-3 controller

1 Make sure the motor is disconnected from the load for ease of testing in this procedure

2 Verify that the external HOA is in Auto mode

3 Verify that the 140M is in the ON position (I)

This enables the 3-phase power to the starter

4 Verify that there is no Fault OVLD or SC state If there is check the PVc terminal for the error condition The screen should look like this

5 Verify that the 3 Ph On indicator is present

6 Verify that the Start and Stop buttons are present

7 Make sure that the SMC-3 controller has the proper DIP switch setting for your application (for example ramp time current limit or soft start)

8 Touch the Start button

9 Verify the following

bull The isolation contactor pulls in

bull The motor starts according to the starting method selected for the SMC-3 controller

bull The Running indication appears when the motor is up to speed

10Touch the Stop button to stop the motor

11Unplug the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable from the PVc terminal going to the MicroLogix controller

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 29

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 14: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

1 Press Esc until lsquo00rsquo is displayed

2 Press Sel until the leftmost character is flashing

3 Press the Down arrow until the leftmost character displayed is a flashing P

4 Press Enter

The P stops flashing and the rightmost numeric key is flashing

By default the first P parameter P101 is displayed Pressing the Up arrow increases and pressing the Down arrow decreases the value of the P parameters

5 Press the Up arrow five times to display P106

The current value of parameter P106 is displayed lsquo0rsquo in this case

6 Press Enter

The lsquo0rsquo flashes

7 Press the Up arrow twice to adjust the value to lsquo2rsquo

8 Press Enter

The value is accepted

The lsquo2rsquo should not be flashing any longer Notice that the green status indicator next to the green Start button is now off

9 Press Esc

P106 should be displayed with the lsquo6rsquo flashing

10Press Esc until the P is flashing on the leftmost alphanumeric character

11Press the Up arrow or Down arrow to scroll through the group menu to t

12Press Enter

The lsquo1rsquo flashes

Stop the drive before changing parameter P106

14 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

13Press and hold down the up arrow until you reach lsquo221rsquo

If you go past it push the down arrow until you return to lsquo221rsquo

14Press Enter twice so that lsquo0rsquo is flashing

15Press the up arrow to move to the value lsquo2rsquo

16Press Enter

The value is accepted The lsquo2rsquo should not be flashing any longer Notice that the green status indicator next to the green Start button is now off

17Press Esc

Parameter t221 should now be displayed with the lsquo1rsquo flashing

18Press Esc until lsquo00rsquo is displayed

19Power the drive off until the display goes blank and then power it back on

Your drive is now configured to be controlled by push buttons and communication commands initiated from the MicroLogix controller

As with all building blocks these are examples of getting information back discretely from a product You can change parameter t221 or other settings of the starters and drives to suit your application

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 15

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

Set up the SMC-3 Controller

The SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller needs to be set up for the isolation contactor and for the appropriate settings for the motor Below are the DIP switch settings used by the SMC-3 controller and the steps to change them

TIP The 140M MPCB specified in the BOM for this building block has a trip class of 10 However if you would like to use the overload trip class settings on the SMC-3 controller you can change out the 140M MPCB with the 140M MCP

16 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

1 Set the DIP switch settings to the starting needs of your motor using the chart below

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 17

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

2 Be sure that DIP switch 14 is set to Normal (off)

This will bring in the isolation contactor when the SMC-3 has received the input signal DIP switch 14 will also close the side-mounted NO aux contact when the starter comes up to speed The closure of this aux contact will send the signal back to the MicroLogix controller

3 If changing to an MCP set DIP switches 11 and 12 to the appropriate overload trip class

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

IMPORTANT The 103T starter uses a 140M MCP (Motor Circuit Protector) which uses a separate overload E1 Plus which must be set according to your system needs

The 190E starter the SMC-3 starter and the PF 4M drive must have the overload dial set on the 140M MPCB (Motor Protection Circuit Breakers)

18 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Chapter 2

System Validation and Application Tips

Introduction

In this chapter you validate that communication is occurring as intended between the MicroLogix controller and the individual discrete starters as well as between the MicroLogix controller and the PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Starting and stopping using the PVc terminal entails having the external HOA switch in Auto position In Hand mode the PVc terminal can still read status of the starters and drives but will not have startstop capabilities

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 3 of that document

bull Verify that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 1 of this document

bull Verify that all the devices are connected per the Simple Motor Control CAD wiring diagram on the Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Verify that the MicroLogix controller PowerFlex drive and PVc terminal have power applied to them

19Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 19

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Personal computer with either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox web browser

bull PanelView Component terminal

bull One or more of these drives or starters

bull PowerFlex 4M drive

bull SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBR

bull 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE

bull 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

bull MicroLogix 1100 or 1400 controller

bull Serial cable catalog number 1761-CBL-PM02

bull USB cable catalog number 2711C-CBL-UU02 or comparable

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to verify that communication is occurring between your devices and to test the system

Start

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer page 21

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller

Communication page 22

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality page 25

20 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer

The PanelView Explorer design-time environment is accessed through a web browser by connecting your computer to the PVc terminal with a USB connection Before connecting your computer to the USB port of the PVc terminal you must first install the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver on a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system After installing the driver you can connect the PVc terminal to your computer For details on how to install the driver refer to the PanelView Component Terminal User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

PVc Terminal USB Connections

All PanelView Component terminals support a USB port connection and require a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system and with the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver installed The driver cannot be installed on a computer with Windows 2000 operating system

1 Connect one end of a USB cable to the mini-USB device port on your PVc terminal

2 Connect the other end of the USB cable to a USB port on your personal computer

3 Power up the PVc terminal and the personal computer

PanelView Explorer Startup Window

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 21

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication

The 3-inch monochrome touch screen PanelView Component (PVc) terminal communicates with the MicroLogix controller over the DF1 network The PVc application reads from and writes to the data table of the MicroLogix controller When the PVc application writes to the MicroLogix controller the controller program detects the value change and writes that new value to the appropriate drive soft starter or discrete starter

1 Connect the personal computer to the PVc terminal using a USB cable

2 Connect the PVc terminal to MicroLogix controller using the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable

3 Start either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox 20

4 In the address bar of your browser type the IP address 1692542542 (This is a fixed IP address that the USB port uses)

5 Press Enter to connect your personal computer to the PVc terminal

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02

USB port

USB port

MicroLogix controller

1761-CBL-PM02

22 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

6 Select the application name in the PVc dashboard dialog box and then click Edit

7 In the Edit dialog box click the Communication tab

The following dialog box appears

8 Click Serial under Protocol and select DF1 from the pull-down list

9 Under PanelView Component Settings verify the Station Address is 2

Validate button

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 23

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

10Under Controller Settings

a Accept the default name lsquoPLC-1rsquo

b Select MicroLogix from the Controller Type field

c In the Address field type 1

11Click Validate

12Click Save

13Click Switch to PanelView Explorer Startup

14 In the Application Dashboard window select the Simple Starting Building Block application

15Click Run to run the application

Navigating the Starters Overview Page

When the PVc application is running any drive or starter that is enabled is shown on the Starters Overview screen as being lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo or lsquoFaultrsquo To ease the use of this program by the OEM the header for the starter is left generic for the ability to change starters without the need to change the PVc first page To change the buttons themselves please see the PanelView Component HMI Terminals user manual

bull lsquoM1rsquo is designated for the SMC-3 controller

bull lsquoM2rsquo is designated for the 103T starter

bull lsquoM3rsquo is designated for the PF 4M drive

bull lsquoM4rsquo is designated for the 190E starter

24 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

bull Stopped indicates the starter is stopped

bull 140M On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull Starting (not shown) indicates the starter or drive is starting

bull Running indicates that motor is running based on feedback from the starter or drive

bull Fault indicates that there is an overload short circuit or other fault the starter has detected

Touching anywhere on Stopped 140M On Running Fault or M takes you to the individual starter screens regardless of the status shown

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality

Now that the PVc terminal is successfully communicating with the MicroLogix controller you are ready to test the Simple Starting functionality

Navigating the Simple Starting Screen

Touch any of the MTR or M buttons on the Starters Overview screen to get to each individual starter screen such as these for the SMC-3 and VFD starter screens

TIP At this point you may choose to edit the Starters Overview screen and delete any buttons and status displays that are associated with non-existing starters or drives

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 25

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

The in the top-right corner exits the application and goes to the PVc Terminal Starters Overview screen

The 190E and 103T screens are similar to that for the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the fault button on the starter screen

The SMC-3 screen shows the following states

The right column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Start is a momentary start button which appears when the starterdrive is in Auto and the 140M is Ready Touching this button starts the starter or drive

bull Stop is also a momentary button Touching this button stops the starterdrive

If the HOA (Hand Off Auto) is not in Auto the Start and Stop buttons will not appear nor will they appear without a 3 Ph On signal In this building block a signal of lsquo1rsquo back to the PLC indicates an Auto position a signal of lsquo0rsquo back indicates a hand or off position You can add an additional contact block to the HOA for the hand position and feedback to the PLC to give that status also

The center column of the SMC-3 starter screen indicates the following

bull 3 Ph On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull 3 Ph Off indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOffrsquo position

bull Stopped indicates the SMC-3 controller is stopped

bull Starting indicates the motor is starting

bull At Speed indicates the motor is running and is at speed

bull Start Fail indicates the starter or drive received a start signal but did not start within the time set in the RSLogix program

CausesRemedies When getting a Start Fail indication check the starter drive andor motor for wiring issues or damage In addition the Start Fail indication may occur due to too short a time for the Timer On Delay in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller See Timer On Delay below

Reset procedure To reset the Start Fail on the PVc terminal when using the SMC-3 controller or the 103T or 190E starters turn the front knob on the 140M MPCB or MCP to off and then back to on to clear the indication To clear this indication on the drive press the stop button on the either on the PVc terminal in Auto mode or press the stop button in Hand mode

26 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Timer On Delay The timer is started when the Start signal is sent to the starter or drive At the end of the timing a comparison is done to see if the motor has actually started The time duration for the Timer On Delay is fully adjustable in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller For this building block the timers are set to 35 seconds for the SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive and 5 seconds for the 103T and 190E starters Check rung 3 or 4 of the default program for the timer

The left column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Fault indicates that the starter has detected a fault

Not all starters have this capability

The SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive can provide this information When the fault indication appears on the SMC-3 controller touching Fault takes you to the listed fault screen for the controller

The PF 4M drive VFD screen always has the Fault button displayed If a fault appears on the PF 4M drive the fault code is displayed on the drive You can press the Fault button on the PVc terminal to view the fault description You can scroll through the fault list just as with the SMC-3 controller

The fault indication on the 103T or 190E starter screen does not have this fault screen functionality since these starters do not provide additional information

bull OVLD indicates that there is an overload detected by the starter

bull SC indicates that there is a short circuit detected by the starter

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 27

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Understanding Faults

The Fault button is always present on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal This Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is merely a GoTo button and does not by itself indicate a fault condition with the PF 4M drive The SMC-3 controller however sends a signal back to the PVc terminal indicating a fault with the controller The Fault GOTO button is then displayed on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo screen on the PVc terminal Pressing the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo Fault screen or on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault screen takes you to the individual fault screens where you can scroll through to find the fault indicated on the PF 4M drive or the SMC-3 controller and its corresponding description

rsquoVFDrsquo Fault Screen (for PF 4M Drive)

lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault Screen

In both cases look at the fault code on the PF 4M drive or SMC-3 controller

bull For the PF 4M drive you must view the fault code on the drive Press the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal to view the fault listing Locate the specific fault for the drive To get a deeper description of the fault consult the user manual for the drive

bull The SMC-3 Controller will have a flashing LED and you need to count the number of flashes Then on the PVc terminal scroll through the fault listing screen and identify the fault using the number of flashes for identification

The button in the lower-right corner of the fault listings takes you back to the SMC-3 or VFD starter screen

28 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Test the SMC-3 Controller

Follow this procedure to test the SMC-3 controller

1 Make sure the motor is disconnected from the load for ease of testing in this procedure

2 Verify that the external HOA is in Auto mode

3 Verify that the 140M is in the ON position (I)

This enables the 3-phase power to the starter

4 Verify that there is no Fault OVLD or SC state If there is check the PVc terminal for the error condition The screen should look like this

5 Verify that the 3 Ph On indicator is present

6 Verify that the Start and Stop buttons are present

7 Make sure that the SMC-3 controller has the proper DIP switch setting for your application (for example ramp time current limit or soft start)

8 Touch the Start button

9 Verify the following

bull The isolation contactor pulls in

bull The motor starts according to the starting method selected for the SMC-3 controller

bull The Running indication appears when the motor is up to speed

10Touch the Stop button to stop the motor

11Unplug the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable from the PVc terminal going to the MicroLogix controller

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 29

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 15: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

13Press and hold down the up arrow until you reach lsquo221rsquo

If you go past it push the down arrow until you return to lsquo221rsquo

14Press Enter twice so that lsquo0rsquo is flashing

15Press the up arrow to move to the value lsquo2rsquo

16Press Enter

The value is accepted The lsquo2rsquo should not be flashing any longer Notice that the green status indicator next to the green Start button is now off

17Press Esc

Parameter t221 should now be displayed with the lsquo1rsquo flashing

18Press Esc until lsquo00rsquo is displayed

19Power the drive off until the display goes blank and then power it back on

Your drive is now configured to be controlled by push buttons and communication commands initiated from the MicroLogix controller

As with all building blocks these are examples of getting information back discretely from a product You can change parameter t221 or other settings of the starters and drives to suit your application

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 15

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

Set up the SMC-3 Controller

The SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller needs to be set up for the isolation contactor and for the appropriate settings for the motor Below are the DIP switch settings used by the SMC-3 controller and the steps to change them

TIP The 140M MPCB specified in the BOM for this building block has a trip class of 10 However if you would like to use the overload trip class settings on the SMC-3 controller you can change out the 140M MPCB with the 140M MCP

16 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

1 Set the DIP switch settings to the starting needs of your motor using the chart below

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 17

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

2 Be sure that DIP switch 14 is set to Normal (off)

This will bring in the isolation contactor when the SMC-3 has received the input signal DIP switch 14 will also close the side-mounted NO aux contact when the starter comes up to speed The closure of this aux contact will send the signal back to the MicroLogix controller

3 If changing to an MCP set DIP switches 11 and 12 to the appropriate overload trip class

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

IMPORTANT The 103T starter uses a 140M MCP (Motor Circuit Protector) which uses a separate overload E1 Plus which must be set according to your system needs

The 190E starter the SMC-3 starter and the PF 4M drive must have the overload dial set on the 140M MPCB (Motor Protection Circuit Breakers)

18 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Chapter 2

System Validation and Application Tips

Introduction

In this chapter you validate that communication is occurring as intended between the MicroLogix controller and the individual discrete starters as well as between the MicroLogix controller and the PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Starting and stopping using the PVc terminal entails having the external HOA switch in Auto position In Hand mode the PVc terminal can still read status of the starters and drives but will not have startstop capabilities

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 3 of that document

bull Verify that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 1 of this document

bull Verify that all the devices are connected per the Simple Motor Control CAD wiring diagram on the Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Verify that the MicroLogix controller PowerFlex drive and PVc terminal have power applied to them

19Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 19

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Personal computer with either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox web browser

bull PanelView Component terminal

bull One or more of these drives or starters

bull PowerFlex 4M drive

bull SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBR

bull 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE

bull 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

bull MicroLogix 1100 or 1400 controller

bull Serial cable catalog number 1761-CBL-PM02

bull USB cable catalog number 2711C-CBL-UU02 or comparable

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to verify that communication is occurring between your devices and to test the system

Start

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer page 21

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller

Communication page 22

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality page 25

20 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer

The PanelView Explorer design-time environment is accessed through a web browser by connecting your computer to the PVc terminal with a USB connection Before connecting your computer to the USB port of the PVc terminal you must first install the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver on a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system After installing the driver you can connect the PVc terminal to your computer For details on how to install the driver refer to the PanelView Component Terminal User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

PVc Terminal USB Connections

All PanelView Component terminals support a USB port connection and require a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system and with the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver installed The driver cannot be installed on a computer with Windows 2000 operating system

1 Connect one end of a USB cable to the mini-USB device port on your PVc terminal

2 Connect the other end of the USB cable to a USB port on your personal computer

3 Power up the PVc terminal and the personal computer

PanelView Explorer Startup Window

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 21

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication

The 3-inch monochrome touch screen PanelView Component (PVc) terminal communicates with the MicroLogix controller over the DF1 network The PVc application reads from and writes to the data table of the MicroLogix controller When the PVc application writes to the MicroLogix controller the controller program detects the value change and writes that new value to the appropriate drive soft starter or discrete starter

1 Connect the personal computer to the PVc terminal using a USB cable

2 Connect the PVc terminal to MicroLogix controller using the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable

3 Start either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox 20

4 In the address bar of your browser type the IP address 1692542542 (This is a fixed IP address that the USB port uses)

5 Press Enter to connect your personal computer to the PVc terminal

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02

USB port

USB port

MicroLogix controller

1761-CBL-PM02

22 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

6 Select the application name in the PVc dashboard dialog box and then click Edit

7 In the Edit dialog box click the Communication tab

The following dialog box appears

8 Click Serial under Protocol and select DF1 from the pull-down list

9 Under PanelView Component Settings verify the Station Address is 2

Validate button

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 23

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

10Under Controller Settings

a Accept the default name lsquoPLC-1rsquo

b Select MicroLogix from the Controller Type field

c In the Address field type 1

11Click Validate

12Click Save

13Click Switch to PanelView Explorer Startup

14 In the Application Dashboard window select the Simple Starting Building Block application

15Click Run to run the application

Navigating the Starters Overview Page

When the PVc application is running any drive or starter that is enabled is shown on the Starters Overview screen as being lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo or lsquoFaultrsquo To ease the use of this program by the OEM the header for the starter is left generic for the ability to change starters without the need to change the PVc first page To change the buttons themselves please see the PanelView Component HMI Terminals user manual

bull lsquoM1rsquo is designated for the SMC-3 controller

bull lsquoM2rsquo is designated for the 103T starter

bull lsquoM3rsquo is designated for the PF 4M drive

bull lsquoM4rsquo is designated for the 190E starter

24 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

bull Stopped indicates the starter is stopped

bull 140M On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull Starting (not shown) indicates the starter or drive is starting

bull Running indicates that motor is running based on feedback from the starter or drive

bull Fault indicates that there is an overload short circuit or other fault the starter has detected

Touching anywhere on Stopped 140M On Running Fault or M takes you to the individual starter screens regardless of the status shown

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality

Now that the PVc terminal is successfully communicating with the MicroLogix controller you are ready to test the Simple Starting functionality

Navigating the Simple Starting Screen

Touch any of the MTR or M buttons on the Starters Overview screen to get to each individual starter screen such as these for the SMC-3 and VFD starter screens

TIP At this point you may choose to edit the Starters Overview screen and delete any buttons and status displays that are associated with non-existing starters or drives

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 25

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

The in the top-right corner exits the application and goes to the PVc Terminal Starters Overview screen

The 190E and 103T screens are similar to that for the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the fault button on the starter screen

The SMC-3 screen shows the following states

The right column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Start is a momentary start button which appears when the starterdrive is in Auto and the 140M is Ready Touching this button starts the starter or drive

bull Stop is also a momentary button Touching this button stops the starterdrive

If the HOA (Hand Off Auto) is not in Auto the Start and Stop buttons will not appear nor will they appear without a 3 Ph On signal In this building block a signal of lsquo1rsquo back to the PLC indicates an Auto position a signal of lsquo0rsquo back indicates a hand or off position You can add an additional contact block to the HOA for the hand position and feedback to the PLC to give that status also

The center column of the SMC-3 starter screen indicates the following

bull 3 Ph On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull 3 Ph Off indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOffrsquo position

bull Stopped indicates the SMC-3 controller is stopped

bull Starting indicates the motor is starting

bull At Speed indicates the motor is running and is at speed

bull Start Fail indicates the starter or drive received a start signal but did not start within the time set in the RSLogix program

CausesRemedies When getting a Start Fail indication check the starter drive andor motor for wiring issues or damage In addition the Start Fail indication may occur due to too short a time for the Timer On Delay in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller See Timer On Delay below

Reset procedure To reset the Start Fail on the PVc terminal when using the SMC-3 controller or the 103T or 190E starters turn the front knob on the 140M MPCB or MCP to off and then back to on to clear the indication To clear this indication on the drive press the stop button on the either on the PVc terminal in Auto mode or press the stop button in Hand mode

26 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Timer On Delay The timer is started when the Start signal is sent to the starter or drive At the end of the timing a comparison is done to see if the motor has actually started The time duration for the Timer On Delay is fully adjustable in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller For this building block the timers are set to 35 seconds for the SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive and 5 seconds for the 103T and 190E starters Check rung 3 or 4 of the default program for the timer

The left column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Fault indicates that the starter has detected a fault

Not all starters have this capability

The SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive can provide this information When the fault indication appears on the SMC-3 controller touching Fault takes you to the listed fault screen for the controller

The PF 4M drive VFD screen always has the Fault button displayed If a fault appears on the PF 4M drive the fault code is displayed on the drive You can press the Fault button on the PVc terminal to view the fault description You can scroll through the fault list just as with the SMC-3 controller

The fault indication on the 103T or 190E starter screen does not have this fault screen functionality since these starters do not provide additional information

bull OVLD indicates that there is an overload detected by the starter

bull SC indicates that there is a short circuit detected by the starter

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 27

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Understanding Faults

The Fault button is always present on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal This Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is merely a GoTo button and does not by itself indicate a fault condition with the PF 4M drive The SMC-3 controller however sends a signal back to the PVc terminal indicating a fault with the controller The Fault GOTO button is then displayed on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo screen on the PVc terminal Pressing the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo Fault screen or on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault screen takes you to the individual fault screens where you can scroll through to find the fault indicated on the PF 4M drive or the SMC-3 controller and its corresponding description

rsquoVFDrsquo Fault Screen (for PF 4M Drive)

lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault Screen

In both cases look at the fault code on the PF 4M drive or SMC-3 controller

bull For the PF 4M drive you must view the fault code on the drive Press the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal to view the fault listing Locate the specific fault for the drive To get a deeper description of the fault consult the user manual for the drive

bull The SMC-3 Controller will have a flashing LED and you need to count the number of flashes Then on the PVc terminal scroll through the fault listing screen and identify the fault using the number of flashes for identification

The button in the lower-right corner of the fault listings takes you back to the SMC-3 or VFD starter screen

28 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Test the SMC-3 Controller

Follow this procedure to test the SMC-3 controller

1 Make sure the motor is disconnected from the load for ease of testing in this procedure

2 Verify that the external HOA is in Auto mode

3 Verify that the 140M is in the ON position (I)

This enables the 3-phase power to the starter

4 Verify that there is no Fault OVLD or SC state If there is check the PVc terminal for the error condition The screen should look like this

5 Verify that the 3 Ph On indicator is present

6 Verify that the Start and Stop buttons are present

7 Make sure that the SMC-3 controller has the proper DIP switch setting for your application (for example ramp time current limit or soft start)

8 Touch the Start button

9 Verify the following

bull The isolation contactor pulls in

bull The motor starts according to the starting method selected for the SMC-3 controller

bull The Running indication appears when the motor is up to speed

10Touch the Stop button to stop the motor

11Unplug the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable from the PVc terminal going to the MicroLogix controller

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 29

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB ltFEFF005500740069006c0069007a006500200065007300740061007300200063006f006e00660069006700750072006100e700f5006500730020007000610072006100200063007200690061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200063006f006d00200075006d0061002000760069007300750061006c0069007a006100e700e3006f0020006500200069006d0070007200650073007300e3006f00200061006400650071007500610064006100730020007000610072006100200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f007300200063006f006d0065007200630069006100690073002e0020004f007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200070006f00640065006d0020007300650072002000610062006500720074006f007300200063006f006d0020006f0020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006500200070006f00730074006500720069006f0072002egt DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR ltFEFF004200720075006b00200064006900730073006500200069006e006e007300740069006c006c0069006e00670065006e0065002000740069006c002000e50020006f00700070007200650074007400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065007200200073006f006d002000700061007300730065007200200066006f00720020007000e5006c006900740065006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f00670020007500740073006b007200690066007400200061007600200066006f0072007200650074006e0069006e006700730064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e00650020006b0061006e002000e50070006e006500730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0067002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f0067002000730065006e006500720065002egt SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 16: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

Set up the SMC-3 Controller

The SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller needs to be set up for the isolation contactor and for the appropriate settings for the motor Below are the DIP switch settings used by the SMC-3 controller and the steps to change them

TIP The 140M MPCB specified in the BOM for this building block has a trip class of 10 However if you would like to use the overload trip class settings on the SMC-3 controller you can change out the 140M MPCB with the 140M MCP

16 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

1 Set the DIP switch settings to the starting needs of your motor using the chart below

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 17

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

2 Be sure that DIP switch 14 is set to Normal (off)

This will bring in the isolation contactor when the SMC-3 has received the input signal DIP switch 14 will also close the side-mounted NO aux contact when the starter comes up to speed The closure of this aux contact will send the signal back to the MicroLogix controller

3 If changing to an MCP set DIP switches 11 and 12 to the appropriate overload trip class

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

IMPORTANT The 103T starter uses a 140M MCP (Motor Circuit Protector) which uses a separate overload E1 Plus which must be set according to your system needs

The 190E starter the SMC-3 starter and the PF 4M drive must have the overload dial set on the 140M MPCB (Motor Protection Circuit Breakers)

18 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Chapter 2

System Validation and Application Tips

Introduction

In this chapter you validate that communication is occurring as intended between the MicroLogix controller and the individual discrete starters as well as between the MicroLogix controller and the PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Starting and stopping using the PVc terminal entails having the external HOA switch in Auto position In Hand mode the PVc terminal can still read status of the starters and drives but will not have startstop capabilities

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 3 of that document

bull Verify that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 1 of this document

bull Verify that all the devices are connected per the Simple Motor Control CAD wiring diagram on the Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Verify that the MicroLogix controller PowerFlex drive and PVc terminal have power applied to them

19Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 19

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Personal computer with either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox web browser

bull PanelView Component terminal

bull One or more of these drives or starters

bull PowerFlex 4M drive

bull SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBR

bull 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE

bull 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

bull MicroLogix 1100 or 1400 controller

bull Serial cable catalog number 1761-CBL-PM02

bull USB cable catalog number 2711C-CBL-UU02 or comparable

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to verify that communication is occurring between your devices and to test the system

Start

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer page 21

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller

Communication page 22

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality page 25

20 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer

The PanelView Explorer design-time environment is accessed through a web browser by connecting your computer to the PVc terminal with a USB connection Before connecting your computer to the USB port of the PVc terminal you must first install the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver on a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system After installing the driver you can connect the PVc terminal to your computer For details on how to install the driver refer to the PanelView Component Terminal User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

PVc Terminal USB Connections

All PanelView Component terminals support a USB port connection and require a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system and with the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver installed The driver cannot be installed on a computer with Windows 2000 operating system

1 Connect one end of a USB cable to the mini-USB device port on your PVc terminal

2 Connect the other end of the USB cable to a USB port on your personal computer

3 Power up the PVc terminal and the personal computer

PanelView Explorer Startup Window

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 21

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication

The 3-inch monochrome touch screen PanelView Component (PVc) terminal communicates with the MicroLogix controller over the DF1 network The PVc application reads from and writes to the data table of the MicroLogix controller When the PVc application writes to the MicroLogix controller the controller program detects the value change and writes that new value to the appropriate drive soft starter or discrete starter

1 Connect the personal computer to the PVc terminal using a USB cable

2 Connect the PVc terminal to MicroLogix controller using the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable

3 Start either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox 20

4 In the address bar of your browser type the IP address 1692542542 (This is a fixed IP address that the USB port uses)

5 Press Enter to connect your personal computer to the PVc terminal

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02

USB port

USB port

MicroLogix controller

1761-CBL-PM02

22 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

6 Select the application name in the PVc dashboard dialog box and then click Edit

7 In the Edit dialog box click the Communication tab

The following dialog box appears

8 Click Serial under Protocol and select DF1 from the pull-down list

9 Under PanelView Component Settings verify the Station Address is 2

Validate button

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 23

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

10Under Controller Settings

a Accept the default name lsquoPLC-1rsquo

b Select MicroLogix from the Controller Type field

c In the Address field type 1

11Click Validate

12Click Save

13Click Switch to PanelView Explorer Startup

14 In the Application Dashboard window select the Simple Starting Building Block application

15Click Run to run the application

Navigating the Starters Overview Page

When the PVc application is running any drive or starter that is enabled is shown on the Starters Overview screen as being lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo or lsquoFaultrsquo To ease the use of this program by the OEM the header for the starter is left generic for the ability to change starters without the need to change the PVc first page To change the buttons themselves please see the PanelView Component HMI Terminals user manual

bull lsquoM1rsquo is designated for the SMC-3 controller

bull lsquoM2rsquo is designated for the 103T starter

bull lsquoM3rsquo is designated for the PF 4M drive

bull lsquoM4rsquo is designated for the 190E starter

24 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

bull Stopped indicates the starter is stopped

bull 140M On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull Starting (not shown) indicates the starter or drive is starting

bull Running indicates that motor is running based on feedback from the starter or drive

bull Fault indicates that there is an overload short circuit or other fault the starter has detected

Touching anywhere on Stopped 140M On Running Fault or M takes you to the individual starter screens regardless of the status shown

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality

Now that the PVc terminal is successfully communicating with the MicroLogix controller you are ready to test the Simple Starting functionality

Navigating the Simple Starting Screen

Touch any of the MTR or M buttons on the Starters Overview screen to get to each individual starter screen such as these for the SMC-3 and VFD starter screens

TIP At this point you may choose to edit the Starters Overview screen and delete any buttons and status displays that are associated with non-existing starters or drives

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 25

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

The in the top-right corner exits the application and goes to the PVc Terminal Starters Overview screen

The 190E and 103T screens are similar to that for the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the fault button on the starter screen

The SMC-3 screen shows the following states

The right column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Start is a momentary start button which appears when the starterdrive is in Auto and the 140M is Ready Touching this button starts the starter or drive

bull Stop is also a momentary button Touching this button stops the starterdrive

If the HOA (Hand Off Auto) is not in Auto the Start and Stop buttons will not appear nor will they appear without a 3 Ph On signal In this building block a signal of lsquo1rsquo back to the PLC indicates an Auto position a signal of lsquo0rsquo back indicates a hand or off position You can add an additional contact block to the HOA for the hand position and feedback to the PLC to give that status also

The center column of the SMC-3 starter screen indicates the following

bull 3 Ph On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull 3 Ph Off indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOffrsquo position

bull Stopped indicates the SMC-3 controller is stopped

bull Starting indicates the motor is starting

bull At Speed indicates the motor is running and is at speed

bull Start Fail indicates the starter or drive received a start signal but did not start within the time set in the RSLogix program

CausesRemedies When getting a Start Fail indication check the starter drive andor motor for wiring issues or damage In addition the Start Fail indication may occur due to too short a time for the Timer On Delay in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller See Timer On Delay below

Reset procedure To reset the Start Fail on the PVc terminal when using the SMC-3 controller or the 103T or 190E starters turn the front knob on the 140M MPCB or MCP to off and then back to on to clear the indication To clear this indication on the drive press the stop button on the either on the PVc terminal in Auto mode or press the stop button in Hand mode

26 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Timer On Delay The timer is started when the Start signal is sent to the starter or drive At the end of the timing a comparison is done to see if the motor has actually started The time duration for the Timer On Delay is fully adjustable in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller For this building block the timers are set to 35 seconds for the SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive and 5 seconds for the 103T and 190E starters Check rung 3 or 4 of the default program for the timer

The left column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Fault indicates that the starter has detected a fault

Not all starters have this capability

The SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive can provide this information When the fault indication appears on the SMC-3 controller touching Fault takes you to the listed fault screen for the controller

The PF 4M drive VFD screen always has the Fault button displayed If a fault appears on the PF 4M drive the fault code is displayed on the drive You can press the Fault button on the PVc terminal to view the fault description You can scroll through the fault list just as with the SMC-3 controller

The fault indication on the 103T or 190E starter screen does not have this fault screen functionality since these starters do not provide additional information

bull OVLD indicates that there is an overload detected by the starter

bull SC indicates that there is a short circuit detected by the starter

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 27

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Understanding Faults

The Fault button is always present on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal This Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is merely a GoTo button and does not by itself indicate a fault condition with the PF 4M drive The SMC-3 controller however sends a signal back to the PVc terminal indicating a fault with the controller The Fault GOTO button is then displayed on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo screen on the PVc terminal Pressing the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo Fault screen or on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault screen takes you to the individual fault screens where you can scroll through to find the fault indicated on the PF 4M drive or the SMC-3 controller and its corresponding description

rsquoVFDrsquo Fault Screen (for PF 4M Drive)

lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault Screen

In both cases look at the fault code on the PF 4M drive or SMC-3 controller

bull For the PF 4M drive you must view the fault code on the drive Press the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal to view the fault listing Locate the specific fault for the drive To get a deeper description of the fault consult the user manual for the drive

bull The SMC-3 Controller will have a flashing LED and you need to count the number of flashes Then on the PVc terminal scroll through the fault listing screen and identify the fault using the number of flashes for identification

The button in the lower-right corner of the fault listings takes you back to the SMC-3 or VFD starter screen

28 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Test the SMC-3 Controller

Follow this procedure to test the SMC-3 controller

1 Make sure the motor is disconnected from the load for ease of testing in this procedure

2 Verify that the external HOA is in Auto mode

3 Verify that the 140M is in the ON position (I)

This enables the 3-phase power to the starter

4 Verify that there is no Fault OVLD or SC state If there is check the PVc terminal for the error condition The screen should look like this

5 Verify that the 3 Ph On indicator is present

6 Verify that the Start and Stop buttons are present

7 Make sure that the SMC-3 controller has the proper DIP switch setting for your application (for example ramp time current limit or soft start)

8 Touch the Start button

9 Verify the following

bull The isolation contactor pulls in

bull The motor starts according to the starting method selected for the SMC-3 controller

bull The Running indication appears when the motor is up to speed

10Touch the Stop button to stop the motor

11Unplug the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable from the PVc terminal going to the MicroLogix controller

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 29

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB ltFEFF005500740069006c0069007a006500200065007300740061007300200063006f006e00660069006700750072006100e700f5006500730020007000610072006100200063007200690061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200063006f006d00200075006d0061002000760069007300750061006c0069007a006100e700e3006f0020006500200069006d0070007200650073007300e3006f00200061006400650071007500610064006100730020007000610072006100200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f007300200063006f006d0065007200630069006100690073002e0020004f007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200070006f00640065006d0020007300650072002000610062006500720074006f007300200063006f006d0020006f0020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006500200070006f00730074006500720069006f0072002egt DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 17: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

Simple Motor Control Integration Chapter 1

1 Set the DIP switch settings to the starting needs of your motor using the chart below

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 17

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

2 Be sure that DIP switch 14 is set to Normal (off)

This will bring in the isolation contactor when the SMC-3 has received the input signal DIP switch 14 will also close the side-mounted NO aux contact when the starter comes up to speed The closure of this aux contact will send the signal back to the MicroLogix controller

3 If changing to an MCP set DIP switches 11 and 12 to the appropriate overload trip class

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

IMPORTANT The 103T starter uses a 140M MCP (Motor Circuit Protector) which uses a separate overload E1 Plus which must be set according to your system needs

The 190E starter the SMC-3 starter and the PF 4M drive must have the overload dial set on the 140M MPCB (Motor Protection Circuit Breakers)

18 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Chapter 2

System Validation and Application Tips

Introduction

In this chapter you validate that communication is occurring as intended between the MicroLogix controller and the individual discrete starters as well as between the MicroLogix controller and the PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Starting and stopping using the PVc terminal entails having the external HOA switch in Auto position In Hand mode the PVc terminal can still read status of the starters and drives but will not have startstop capabilities

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 3 of that document

bull Verify that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 1 of this document

bull Verify that all the devices are connected per the Simple Motor Control CAD wiring diagram on the Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Verify that the MicroLogix controller PowerFlex drive and PVc terminal have power applied to them

19Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 19

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Personal computer with either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox web browser

bull PanelView Component terminal

bull One or more of these drives or starters

bull PowerFlex 4M drive

bull SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBR

bull 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE

bull 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

bull MicroLogix 1100 or 1400 controller

bull Serial cable catalog number 1761-CBL-PM02

bull USB cable catalog number 2711C-CBL-UU02 or comparable

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to verify that communication is occurring between your devices and to test the system

Start

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer page 21

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller

Communication page 22

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality page 25

20 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer

The PanelView Explorer design-time environment is accessed through a web browser by connecting your computer to the PVc terminal with a USB connection Before connecting your computer to the USB port of the PVc terminal you must first install the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver on a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system After installing the driver you can connect the PVc terminal to your computer For details on how to install the driver refer to the PanelView Component Terminal User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

PVc Terminal USB Connections

All PanelView Component terminals support a USB port connection and require a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system and with the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver installed The driver cannot be installed on a computer with Windows 2000 operating system

1 Connect one end of a USB cable to the mini-USB device port on your PVc terminal

2 Connect the other end of the USB cable to a USB port on your personal computer

3 Power up the PVc terminal and the personal computer

PanelView Explorer Startup Window

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 21

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication

The 3-inch monochrome touch screen PanelView Component (PVc) terminal communicates with the MicroLogix controller over the DF1 network The PVc application reads from and writes to the data table of the MicroLogix controller When the PVc application writes to the MicroLogix controller the controller program detects the value change and writes that new value to the appropriate drive soft starter or discrete starter

1 Connect the personal computer to the PVc terminal using a USB cable

2 Connect the PVc terminal to MicroLogix controller using the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable

3 Start either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox 20

4 In the address bar of your browser type the IP address 1692542542 (This is a fixed IP address that the USB port uses)

5 Press Enter to connect your personal computer to the PVc terminal

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02

USB port

USB port

MicroLogix controller

1761-CBL-PM02

22 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

6 Select the application name in the PVc dashboard dialog box and then click Edit

7 In the Edit dialog box click the Communication tab

The following dialog box appears

8 Click Serial under Protocol and select DF1 from the pull-down list

9 Under PanelView Component Settings verify the Station Address is 2

Validate button

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 23

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

10Under Controller Settings

a Accept the default name lsquoPLC-1rsquo

b Select MicroLogix from the Controller Type field

c In the Address field type 1

11Click Validate

12Click Save

13Click Switch to PanelView Explorer Startup

14 In the Application Dashboard window select the Simple Starting Building Block application

15Click Run to run the application

Navigating the Starters Overview Page

When the PVc application is running any drive or starter that is enabled is shown on the Starters Overview screen as being lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo or lsquoFaultrsquo To ease the use of this program by the OEM the header for the starter is left generic for the ability to change starters without the need to change the PVc first page To change the buttons themselves please see the PanelView Component HMI Terminals user manual

bull lsquoM1rsquo is designated for the SMC-3 controller

bull lsquoM2rsquo is designated for the 103T starter

bull lsquoM3rsquo is designated for the PF 4M drive

bull lsquoM4rsquo is designated for the 190E starter

24 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

bull Stopped indicates the starter is stopped

bull 140M On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull Starting (not shown) indicates the starter or drive is starting

bull Running indicates that motor is running based on feedback from the starter or drive

bull Fault indicates that there is an overload short circuit or other fault the starter has detected

Touching anywhere on Stopped 140M On Running Fault or M takes you to the individual starter screens regardless of the status shown

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality

Now that the PVc terminal is successfully communicating with the MicroLogix controller you are ready to test the Simple Starting functionality

Navigating the Simple Starting Screen

Touch any of the MTR or M buttons on the Starters Overview screen to get to each individual starter screen such as these for the SMC-3 and VFD starter screens

TIP At this point you may choose to edit the Starters Overview screen and delete any buttons and status displays that are associated with non-existing starters or drives

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 25

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

The in the top-right corner exits the application and goes to the PVc Terminal Starters Overview screen

The 190E and 103T screens are similar to that for the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the fault button on the starter screen

The SMC-3 screen shows the following states

The right column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Start is a momentary start button which appears when the starterdrive is in Auto and the 140M is Ready Touching this button starts the starter or drive

bull Stop is also a momentary button Touching this button stops the starterdrive

If the HOA (Hand Off Auto) is not in Auto the Start and Stop buttons will not appear nor will they appear without a 3 Ph On signal In this building block a signal of lsquo1rsquo back to the PLC indicates an Auto position a signal of lsquo0rsquo back indicates a hand or off position You can add an additional contact block to the HOA for the hand position and feedback to the PLC to give that status also

The center column of the SMC-3 starter screen indicates the following

bull 3 Ph On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull 3 Ph Off indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOffrsquo position

bull Stopped indicates the SMC-3 controller is stopped

bull Starting indicates the motor is starting

bull At Speed indicates the motor is running and is at speed

bull Start Fail indicates the starter or drive received a start signal but did not start within the time set in the RSLogix program

CausesRemedies When getting a Start Fail indication check the starter drive andor motor for wiring issues or damage In addition the Start Fail indication may occur due to too short a time for the Timer On Delay in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller See Timer On Delay below

Reset procedure To reset the Start Fail on the PVc terminal when using the SMC-3 controller or the 103T or 190E starters turn the front knob on the 140M MPCB or MCP to off and then back to on to clear the indication To clear this indication on the drive press the stop button on the either on the PVc terminal in Auto mode or press the stop button in Hand mode

26 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Timer On Delay The timer is started when the Start signal is sent to the starter or drive At the end of the timing a comparison is done to see if the motor has actually started The time duration for the Timer On Delay is fully adjustable in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller For this building block the timers are set to 35 seconds for the SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive and 5 seconds for the 103T and 190E starters Check rung 3 or 4 of the default program for the timer

The left column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Fault indicates that the starter has detected a fault

Not all starters have this capability

The SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive can provide this information When the fault indication appears on the SMC-3 controller touching Fault takes you to the listed fault screen for the controller

The PF 4M drive VFD screen always has the Fault button displayed If a fault appears on the PF 4M drive the fault code is displayed on the drive You can press the Fault button on the PVc terminal to view the fault description You can scroll through the fault list just as with the SMC-3 controller

The fault indication on the 103T or 190E starter screen does not have this fault screen functionality since these starters do not provide additional information

bull OVLD indicates that there is an overload detected by the starter

bull SC indicates that there is a short circuit detected by the starter

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 27

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Understanding Faults

The Fault button is always present on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal This Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is merely a GoTo button and does not by itself indicate a fault condition with the PF 4M drive The SMC-3 controller however sends a signal back to the PVc terminal indicating a fault with the controller The Fault GOTO button is then displayed on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo screen on the PVc terminal Pressing the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo Fault screen or on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault screen takes you to the individual fault screens where you can scroll through to find the fault indicated on the PF 4M drive or the SMC-3 controller and its corresponding description

rsquoVFDrsquo Fault Screen (for PF 4M Drive)

lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault Screen

In both cases look at the fault code on the PF 4M drive or SMC-3 controller

bull For the PF 4M drive you must view the fault code on the drive Press the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal to view the fault listing Locate the specific fault for the drive To get a deeper description of the fault consult the user manual for the drive

bull The SMC-3 Controller will have a flashing LED and you need to count the number of flashes Then on the PVc terminal scroll through the fault listing screen and identify the fault using the number of flashes for identification

The button in the lower-right corner of the fault listings takes you back to the SMC-3 or VFD starter screen

28 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Test the SMC-3 Controller

Follow this procedure to test the SMC-3 controller

1 Make sure the motor is disconnected from the load for ease of testing in this procedure

2 Verify that the external HOA is in Auto mode

3 Verify that the 140M is in the ON position (I)

This enables the 3-phase power to the starter

4 Verify that there is no Fault OVLD or SC state If there is check the PVc terminal for the error condition The screen should look like this

5 Verify that the 3 Ph On indicator is present

6 Verify that the Start and Stop buttons are present

7 Make sure that the SMC-3 controller has the proper DIP switch setting for your application (for example ramp time current limit or soft start)

8 Touch the Start button

9 Verify the following

bull The isolation contactor pulls in

bull The motor starts according to the starting method selected for the SMC-3 controller

bull The Running indication appears when the motor is up to speed

10Touch the Stop button to stop the motor

11Unplug the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable from the PVc terminal going to the MicroLogix controller

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 29

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU ltFEFF00560065007200770065006e00640065006e0020005300690065002000640069006500730065002000450069006e007300740065006c006c0075006e00670065006e0020007a0075006d002000450072007300740065006c006c0065006e00200076006f006e0020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e002c00200075006d002000650069006e00650020007a0075007600650072006c00e40073007300690067006500200041006e007a006500690067006500200075006e00640020004100750073006700610062006500200076006f006e00200047006500730063006800e40066007400730064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e0020007a0075002000650072007a00690065006c0065006e002e00200044006900650020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650020006b00f6006e006e0065006e0020006d006900740020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0064006500720020006d00690074002000640065006d002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200075006e00640020006800f600680065007200200067006500f600660066006e00650074002000770065007200640065006e002egt FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN ltFEFF004200720075006700200064006900730073006500200069006e0064007300740069006c006c0069006e006700650072002000740069006c0020006100740020006f0070007200650074007400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002c0020006400650072002000650072002000650067006e006500640065002000740069006c0020007000e5006c006900640065006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f00670020007500640073006b007200690076006e0069006e006700200061006600200066006f0072007200650074006e0069006e006700730064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072006e00650020006b0061006e002000e50062006e006500730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0067002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f00670020006e0079006500720065002egt NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 18: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

Chapter 1 Simple Motor Control Integration

2 Be sure that DIP switch 14 is set to Normal (off)

This will bring in the isolation contactor when the SMC-3 has received the input signal DIP switch 14 will also close the side-mounted NO aux contact when the starter comes up to speed The closure of this aux contact will send the signal back to the MicroLogix controller

3 If changing to an MCP set DIP switches 11 and 12 to the appropriate overload trip class

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

IMPORTANT The 103T starter uses a 140M MCP (Motor Circuit Protector) which uses a separate overload E1 Plus which must be set according to your system needs

The 190E starter the SMC-3 starter and the PF 4M drive must have the overload dial set on the 140M MPCB (Motor Protection Circuit Breakers)

18 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Chapter 2

System Validation and Application Tips

Introduction

In this chapter you validate that communication is occurring as intended between the MicroLogix controller and the individual discrete starters as well as between the MicroLogix controller and the PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Starting and stopping using the PVc terminal entails having the external HOA switch in Auto position In Hand mode the PVc terminal can still read status of the starters and drives but will not have startstop capabilities

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 3 of that document

bull Verify that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 1 of this document

bull Verify that all the devices are connected per the Simple Motor Control CAD wiring diagram on the Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Verify that the MicroLogix controller PowerFlex drive and PVc terminal have power applied to them

19Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 19

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Personal computer with either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox web browser

bull PanelView Component terminal

bull One or more of these drives or starters

bull PowerFlex 4M drive

bull SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBR

bull 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE

bull 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

bull MicroLogix 1100 or 1400 controller

bull Serial cable catalog number 1761-CBL-PM02

bull USB cable catalog number 2711C-CBL-UU02 or comparable

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to verify that communication is occurring between your devices and to test the system

Start

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer page 21

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller

Communication page 22

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality page 25

20 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer

The PanelView Explorer design-time environment is accessed through a web browser by connecting your computer to the PVc terminal with a USB connection Before connecting your computer to the USB port of the PVc terminal you must first install the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver on a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system After installing the driver you can connect the PVc terminal to your computer For details on how to install the driver refer to the PanelView Component Terminal User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

PVc Terminal USB Connections

All PanelView Component terminals support a USB port connection and require a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system and with the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver installed The driver cannot be installed on a computer with Windows 2000 operating system

1 Connect one end of a USB cable to the mini-USB device port on your PVc terminal

2 Connect the other end of the USB cable to a USB port on your personal computer

3 Power up the PVc terminal and the personal computer

PanelView Explorer Startup Window

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 21

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication

The 3-inch monochrome touch screen PanelView Component (PVc) terminal communicates with the MicroLogix controller over the DF1 network The PVc application reads from and writes to the data table of the MicroLogix controller When the PVc application writes to the MicroLogix controller the controller program detects the value change and writes that new value to the appropriate drive soft starter or discrete starter

1 Connect the personal computer to the PVc terminal using a USB cable

2 Connect the PVc terminal to MicroLogix controller using the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable

3 Start either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox 20

4 In the address bar of your browser type the IP address 1692542542 (This is a fixed IP address that the USB port uses)

5 Press Enter to connect your personal computer to the PVc terminal

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02

USB port

USB port

MicroLogix controller

1761-CBL-PM02

22 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

6 Select the application name in the PVc dashboard dialog box and then click Edit

7 In the Edit dialog box click the Communication tab

The following dialog box appears

8 Click Serial under Protocol and select DF1 from the pull-down list

9 Under PanelView Component Settings verify the Station Address is 2

Validate button

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 23

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

10Under Controller Settings

a Accept the default name lsquoPLC-1rsquo

b Select MicroLogix from the Controller Type field

c In the Address field type 1

11Click Validate

12Click Save

13Click Switch to PanelView Explorer Startup

14 In the Application Dashboard window select the Simple Starting Building Block application

15Click Run to run the application

Navigating the Starters Overview Page

When the PVc application is running any drive or starter that is enabled is shown on the Starters Overview screen as being lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo or lsquoFaultrsquo To ease the use of this program by the OEM the header for the starter is left generic for the ability to change starters without the need to change the PVc first page To change the buttons themselves please see the PanelView Component HMI Terminals user manual

bull lsquoM1rsquo is designated for the SMC-3 controller

bull lsquoM2rsquo is designated for the 103T starter

bull lsquoM3rsquo is designated for the PF 4M drive

bull lsquoM4rsquo is designated for the 190E starter

24 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

bull Stopped indicates the starter is stopped

bull 140M On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull Starting (not shown) indicates the starter or drive is starting

bull Running indicates that motor is running based on feedback from the starter or drive

bull Fault indicates that there is an overload short circuit or other fault the starter has detected

Touching anywhere on Stopped 140M On Running Fault or M takes you to the individual starter screens regardless of the status shown

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality

Now that the PVc terminal is successfully communicating with the MicroLogix controller you are ready to test the Simple Starting functionality

Navigating the Simple Starting Screen

Touch any of the MTR or M buttons on the Starters Overview screen to get to each individual starter screen such as these for the SMC-3 and VFD starter screens

TIP At this point you may choose to edit the Starters Overview screen and delete any buttons and status displays that are associated with non-existing starters or drives

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 25

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

The in the top-right corner exits the application and goes to the PVc Terminal Starters Overview screen

The 190E and 103T screens are similar to that for the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the fault button on the starter screen

The SMC-3 screen shows the following states

The right column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Start is a momentary start button which appears when the starterdrive is in Auto and the 140M is Ready Touching this button starts the starter or drive

bull Stop is also a momentary button Touching this button stops the starterdrive

If the HOA (Hand Off Auto) is not in Auto the Start and Stop buttons will not appear nor will they appear without a 3 Ph On signal In this building block a signal of lsquo1rsquo back to the PLC indicates an Auto position a signal of lsquo0rsquo back indicates a hand or off position You can add an additional contact block to the HOA for the hand position and feedback to the PLC to give that status also

The center column of the SMC-3 starter screen indicates the following

bull 3 Ph On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull 3 Ph Off indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOffrsquo position

bull Stopped indicates the SMC-3 controller is stopped

bull Starting indicates the motor is starting

bull At Speed indicates the motor is running and is at speed

bull Start Fail indicates the starter or drive received a start signal but did not start within the time set in the RSLogix program

CausesRemedies When getting a Start Fail indication check the starter drive andor motor for wiring issues or damage In addition the Start Fail indication may occur due to too short a time for the Timer On Delay in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller See Timer On Delay below

Reset procedure To reset the Start Fail on the PVc terminal when using the SMC-3 controller or the 103T or 190E starters turn the front knob on the 140M MPCB or MCP to off and then back to on to clear the indication To clear this indication on the drive press the stop button on the either on the PVc terminal in Auto mode or press the stop button in Hand mode

26 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Timer On Delay The timer is started when the Start signal is sent to the starter or drive At the end of the timing a comparison is done to see if the motor has actually started The time duration for the Timer On Delay is fully adjustable in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller For this building block the timers are set to 35 seconds for the SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive and 5 seconds for the 103T and 190E starters Check rung 3 or 4 of the default program for the timer

The left column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Fault indicates that the starter has detected a fault

Not all starters have this capability

The SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive can provide this information When the fault indication appears on the SMC-3 controller touching Fault takes you to the listed fault screen for the controller

The PF 4M drive VFD screen always has the Fault button displayed If a fault appears on the PF 4M drive the fault code is displayed on the drive You can press the Fault button on the PVc terminal to view the fault description You can scroll through the fault list just as with the SMC-3 controller

The fault indication on the 103T or 190E starter screen does not have this fault screen functionality since these starters do not provide additional information

bull OVLD indicates that there is an overload detected by the starter

bull SC indicates that there is a short circuit detected by the starter

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 27

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Understanding Faults

The Fault button is always present on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal This Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is merely a GoTo button and does not by itself indicate a fault condition with the PF 4M drive The SMC-3 controller however sends a signal back to the PVc terminal indicating a fault with the controller The Fault GOTO button is then displayed on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo screen on the PVc terminal Pressing the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo Fault screen or on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault screen takes you to the individual fault screens where you can scroll through to find the fault indicated on the PF 4M drive or the SMC-3 controller and its corresponding description

rsquoVFDrsquo Fault Screen (for PF 4M Drive)

lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault Screen

In both cases look at the fault code on the PF 4M drive or SMC-3 controller

bull For the PF 4M drive you must view the fault code on the drive Press the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal to view the fault listing Locate the specific fault for the drive To get a deeper description of the fault consult the user manual for the drive

bull The SMC-3 Controller will have a flashing LED and you need to count the number of flashes Then on the PVc terminal scroll through the fault listing screen and identify the fault using the number of flashes for identification

The button in the lower-right corner of the fault listings takes you back to the SMC-3 or VFD starter screen

28 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Test the SMC-3 Controller

Follow this procedure to test the SMC-3 controller

1 Make sure the motor is disconnected from the load for ease of testing in this procedure

2 Verify that the external HOA is in Auto mode

3 Verify that the 140M is in the ON position (I)

This enables the 3-phase power to the starter

4 Verify that there is no Fault OVLD or SC state If there is check the PVc terminal for the error condition The screen should look like this

5 Verify that the 3 Ph On indicator is present

6 Verify that the Start and Stop buttons are present

7 Make sure that the SMC-3 controller has the proper DIP switch setting for your application (for example ramp time current limit or soft start)

8 Touch the Start button

9 Verify the following

bull The isolation contactor pulls in

bull The motor starts according to the starting method selected for the SMC-3 controller

bull The Running indication appears when the motor is up to speed

10Touch the Stop button to stop the motor

11Unplug the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable from the PVc terminal going to the MicroLogix controller

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 29

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB ltFEFF005500740069006c0069007a006500200065007300740061007300200063006f006e00660069006700750072006100e700f5006500730020007000610072006100200063007200690061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200063006f006d00200075006d0061002000760069007300750061006c0069007a006100e700e3006f0020006500200069006d0070007200650073007300e3006f00200061006400650071007500610064006100730020007000610072006100200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f007300200063006f006d0065007200630069006100690073002e0020004f007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200070006f00640065006d0020007300650072002000610062006500720074006f007300200063006f006d0020006f0020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006500200070006f00730074006500720069006f0072002egt DAN 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 NLD ltFEFF004700650062007200750069006b002000640065007a006500200069006e007300740065006c006c0069006e00670065006e0020006f006d0020005000440046002d0064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e0020007400650020006d0061006b0065006e00200064006900650020006700650073006300680069006b00740020007a0069006a006e0020006f006d0020007a0061006b0065006c0069006a006b006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e00200062006500740072006f0075007700620061006100720020007700650065007200200074006500200067006500760065006e00200065006e0020006100660020007400650020006400720075006b006b0065006e002e0020004400650020005000440046002d0064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e0020006b0075006e006e0065006e00200077006f007200640065006e002000670065006f00700065006e00640020006d006500740020004100630072006f00620061007400200065006e002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006e00200068006f006700650072002egt ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR ltFEFF004200720075006b00200064006900730073006500200069006e006e007300740069006c006c0069006e00670065006e0065002000740069006c002000e50020006f00700070007200650074007400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065007200200073006f006d002000700061007300730065007200200066006f00720020007000e5006c006900740065006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f00670020007500740073006b007200690066007400200061007600200066006f0072007200650074006e0069006e006700730064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e00650020006b0061006e002000e50070006e006500730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0067002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f0067002000730065006e006500720065002egt SVE ltFEFF0041006e007600e4006e00640020006400650020006800e4007200200069006e0073007400e4006c006c006e0069006e006700610072006e00610020006e00e40072002000640075002000760069006c006c00200073006b0061007000610020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400200073006f006d00200070006100730073006100720020006600f600720020007000e5006c00690074006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f006300680020007500740073006b0072006900660074002000610076002000610066006600e4007200730064006f006b0075006d0065006e0074002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e0020006b0061006e002000f600700070006e006100730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f00630068002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006c006c00650072002000730065006e006100720065002egt ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 19: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

Chapter 2

System Validation and Application Tips

Introduction

In this chapter you validate that communication is occurring as intended between the MicroLogix controller and the individual discrete starters as well as between the MicroLogix controller and the PanelView Component (PVc) terminal Starting and stopping using the PVc terminal entails having the external HOA switch in Auto position In Hand mode the PVc terminal can still read status of the starters and drives but will not have startstop capabilities

Before You Begin

bull Review the Connected Components Building Blocks Quick Start publication CC-QS001 in its entirety verifying that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 3 of that document

bull Verify that you have completed all of the steps in Chapter 1 of this document

bull Verify that all the devices are connected per the Simple Motor Control CAD wiring diagram on the Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Verify that the MicroLogix controller PowerFlex drive and PVc terminal have power applied to them

19Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 19

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Personal computer with either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox web browser

bull PanelView Component terminal

bull One or more of these drives or starters

bull PowerFlex 4M drive

bull SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBR

bull 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE

bull 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

bull MicroLogix 1100 or 1400 controller

bull Serial cable catalog number 1761-CBL-PM02

bull USB cable catalog number 2711C-CBL-UU02 or comparable

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to verify that communication is occurring between your devices and to test the system

Start

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer page 21

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller

Communication page 22

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality page 25

20 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer

The PanelView Explorer design-time environment is accessed through a web browser by connecting your computer to the PVc terminal with a USB connection Before connecting your computer to the USB port of the PVc terminal you must first install the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver on a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system After installing the driver you can connect the PVc terminal to your computer For details on how to install the driver refer to the PanelView Component Terminal User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

PVc Terminal USB Connections

All PanelView Component terminals support a USB port connection and require a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system and with the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver installed The driver cannot be installed on a computer with Windows 2000 operating system

1 Connect one end of a USB cable to the mini-USB device port on your PVc terminal

2 Connect the other end of the USB cable to a USB port on your personal computer

3 Power up the PVc terminal and the personal computer

PanelView Explorer Startup Window

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 21

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication

The 3-inch monochrome touch screen PanelView Component (PVc) terminal communicates with the MicroLogix controller over the DF1 network The PVc application reads from and writes to the data table of the MicroLogix controller When the PVc application writes to the MicroLogix controller the controller program detects the value change and writes that new value to the appropriate drive soft starter or discrete starter

1 Connect the personal computer to the PVc terminal using a USB cable

2 Connect the PVc terminal to MicroLogix controller using the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable

3 Start either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox 20

4 In the address bar of your browser type the IP address 1692542542 (This is a fixed IP address that the USB port uses)

5 Press Enter to connect your personal computer to the PVc terminal

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02

USB port

USB port

MicroLogix controller

1761-CBL-PM02

22 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

6 Select the application name in the PVc dashboard dialog box and then click Edit

7 In the Edit dialog box click the Communication tab

The following dialog box appears

8 Click Serial under Protocol and select DF1 from the pull-down list

9 Under PanelView Component Settings verify the Station Address is 2

Validate button

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 23

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

10Under Controller Settings

a Accept the default name lsquoPLC-1rsquo

b Select MicroLogix from the Controller Type field

c In the Address field type 1

11Click Validate

12Click Save

13Click Switch to PanelView Explorer Startup

14 In the Application Dashboard window select the Simple Starting Building Block application

15Click Run to run the application

Navigating the Starters Overview Page

When the PVc application is running any drive or starter that is enabled is shown on the Starters Overview screen as being lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo or lsquoFaultrsquo To ease the use of this program by the OEM the header for the starter is left generic for the ability to change starters without the need to change the PVc first page To change the buttons themselves please see the PanelView Component HMI Terminals user manual

bull lsquoM1rsquo is designated for the SMC-3 controller

bull lsquoM2rsquo is designated for the 103T starter

bull lsquoM3rsquo is designated for the PF 4M drive

bull lsquoM4rsquo is designated for the 190E starter

24 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

bull Stopped indicates the starter is stopped

bull 140M On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull Starting (not shown) indicates the starter or drive is starting

bull Running indicates that motor is running based on feedback from the starter or drive

bull Fault indicates that there is an overload short circuit or other fault the starter has detected

Touching anywhere on Stopped 140M On Running Fault or M takes you to the individual starter screens regardless of the status shown

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality

Now that the PVc terminal is successfully communicating with the MicroLogix controller you are ready to test the Simple Starting functionality

Navigating the Simple Starting Screen

Touch any of the MTR or M buttons on the Starters Overview screen to get to each individual starter screen such as these for the SMC-3 and VFD starter screens

TIP At this point you may choose to edit the Starters Overview screen and delete any buttons and status displays that are associated with non-existing starters or drives

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 25

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

The in the top-right corner exits the application and goes to the PVc Terminal Starters Overview screen

The 190E and 103T screens are similar to that for the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the fault button on the starter screen

The SMC-3 screen shows the following states

The right column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Start is a momentary start button which appears when the starterdrive is in Auto and the 140M is Ready Touching this button starts the starter or drive

bull Stop is also a momentary button Touching this button stops the starterdrive

If the HOA (Hand Off Auto) is not in Auto the Start and Stop buttons will not appear nor will they appear without a 3 Ph On signal In this building block a signal of lsquo1rsquo back to the PLC indicates an Auto position a signal of lsquo0rsquo back indicates a hand or off position You can add an additional contact block to the HOA for the hand position and feedback to the PLC to give that status also

The center column of the SMC-3 starter screen indicates the following

bull 3 Ph On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull 3 Ph Off indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOffrsquo position

bull Stopped indicates the SMC-3 controller is stopped

bull Starting indicates the motor is starting

bull At Speed indicates the motor is running and is at speed

bull Start Fail indicates the starter or drive received a start signal but did not start within the time set in the RSLogix program

CausesRemedies When getting a Start Fail indication check the starter drive andor motor for wiring issues or damage In addition the Start Fail indication may occur due to too short a time for the Timer On Delay in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller See Timer On Delay below

Reset procedure To reset the Start Fail on the PVc terminal when using the SMC-3 controller or the 103T or 190E starters turn the front knob on the 140M MPCB or MCP to off and then back to on to clear the indication To clear this indication on the drive press the stop button on the either on the PVc terminal in Auto mode or press the stop button in Hand mode

26 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Timer On Delay The timer is started when the Start signal is sent to the starter or drive At the end of the timing a comparison is done to see if the motor has actually started The time duration for the Timer On Delay is fully adjustable in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller For this building block the timers are set to 35 seconds for the SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive and 5 seconds for the 103T and 190E starters Check rung 3 or 4 of the default program for the timer

The left column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Fault indicates that the starter has detected a fault

Not all starters have this capability

The SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive can provide this information When the fault indication appears on the SMC-3 controller touching Fault takes you to the listed fault screen for the controller

The PF 4M drive VFD screen always has the Fault button displayed If a fault appears on the PF 4M drive the fault code is displayed on the drive You can press the Fault button on the PVc terminal to view the fault description You can scroll through the fault list just as with the SMC-3 controller

The fault indication on the 103T or 190E starter screen does not have this fault screen functionality since these starters do not provide additional information

bull OVLD indicates that there is an overload detected by the starter

bull SC indicates that there is a short circuit detected by the starter

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 27

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Understanding Faults

The Fault button is always present on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal This Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is merely a GoTo button and does not by itself indicate a fault condition with the PF 4M drive The SMC-3 controller however sends a signal back to the PVc terminal indicating a fault with the controller The Fault GOTO button is then displayed on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo screen on the PVc terminal Pressing the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo Fault screen or on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault screen takes you to the individual fault screens where you can scroll through to find the fault indicated on the PF 4M drive or the SMC-3 controller and its corresponding description

rsquoVFDrsquo Fault Screen (for PF 4M Drive)

lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault Screen

In both cases look at the fault code on the PF 4M drive or SMC-3 controller

bull For the PF 4M drive you must view the fault code on the drive Press the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal to view the fault listing Locate the specific fault for the drive To get a deeper description of the fault consult the user manual for the drive

bull The SMC-3 Controller will have a flashing LED and you need to count the number of flashes Then on the PVc terminal scroll through the fault listing screen and identify the fault using the number of flashes for identification

The button in the lower-right corner of the fault listings takes you back to the SMC-3 or VFD starter screen

28 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Test the SMC-3 Controller

Follow this procedure to test the SMC-3 controller

1 Make sure the motor is disconnected from the load for ease of testing in this procedure

2 Verify that the external HOA is in Auto mode

3 Verify that the 140M is in the ON position (I)

This enables the 3-phase power to the starter

4 Verify that there is no Fault OVLD or SC state If there is check the PVc terminal for the error condition The screen should look like this

5 Verify that the 3 Ph On indicator is present

6 Verify that the Start and Stop buttons are present

7 Make sure that the SMC-3 controller has the proper DIP switch setting for your application (for example ramp time current limit or soft start)

8 Touch the Start button

9 Verify the following

bull The isolation contactor pulls in

bull The motor starts according to the starting method selected for the SMC-3 controller

bull The Running indication appears when the motor is up to speed

10Touch the Stop button to stop the motor

11Unplug the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable from the PVc terminal going to the MicroLogix controller

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 29

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA ltFEFF004f007000740069006f006e00730020007000650072006d0065007400740061006e007400200064006500200063007200e900650072002000640065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e007400730020005000440046002000700072006f00660065007300730069006f006e006e0065006c007300200066006900610062006c0065007300200070006f007500720020006c0061002000760069007300750061006c00690073006100740069006f006e0020006500740020006c00270069006d007000720065007300730069006f006e002e00200049006c002000650073007400200070006f0073007300690062006c0065002000640027006f00750076007200690072002000630065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e007400730020005000440046002000640061006e00730020004100630072006f0062006100740020006500740020005200650061006400650072002c002000760065007200730069006f006e002000200035002e00300020006f007500200075006c007400e9007200690065007500720065002egt PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 20: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

What You Need

bull Connected Component Building Blocks Overview CD publication CC-QR001

bull Personal computer with either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox web browser

bull PanelView Component terminal

bull One or more of these drives or starters

bull PowerFlex 4M drive

bull SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller catalog number 150-C3NBR

bull 103T starter catalog number 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE

bull 190E starter catalog number 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE

The 103T and 190E starters can be ordered in pieces but the easiest way is to order the entire starter Your catalog number may vary depending on the motor

bull MicroLogix 1100 or 1400 controller

bull Serial cable catalog number 1761-CBL-PM02

bull USB cable catalog number 2711C-CBL-UU02 or comparable

Follow These Steps

Follow these steps to verify that communication is occurring between your devices and to test the system

Start

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer page 21

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller

Communication page 22

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality page 25

20 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer

The PanelView Explorer design-time environment is accessed through a web browser by connecting your computer to the PVc terminal with a USB connection Before connecting your computer to the USB port of the PVc terminal you must first install the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver on a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system After installing the driver you can connect the PVc terminal to your computer For details on how to install the driver refer to the PanelView Component Terminal User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

PVc Terminal USB Connections

All PanelView Component terminals support a USB port connection and require a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system and with the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver installed The driver cannot be installed on a computer with Windows 2000 operating system

1 Connect one end of a USB cable to the mini-USB device port on your PVc terminal

2 Connect the other end of the USB cable to a USB port on your personal computer

3 Power up the PVc terminal and the personal computer

PanelView Explorer Startup Window

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 21

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication

The 3-inch monochrome touch screen PanelView Component (PVc) terminal communicates with the MicroLogix controller over the DF1 network The PVc application reads from and writes to the data table of the MicroLogix controller When the PVc application writes to the MicroLogix controller the controller program detects the value change and writes that new value to the appropriate drive soft starter or discrete starter

1 Connect the personal computer to the PVc terminal using a USB cable

2 Connect the PVc terminal to MicroLogix controller using the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable

3 Start either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox 20

4 In the address bar of your browser type the IP address 1692542542 (This is a fixed IP address that the USB port uses)

5 Press Enter to connect your personal computer to the PVc terminal

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02

USB port

USB port

MicroLogix controller

1761-CBL-PM02

22 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

6 Select the application name in the PVc dashboard dialog box and then click Edit

7 In the Edit dialog box click the Communication tab

The following dialog box appears

8 Click Serial under Protocol and select DF1 from the pull-down list

9 Under PanelView Component Settings verify the Station Address is 2

Validate button

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 23

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

10Under Controller Settings

a Accept the default name lsquoPLC-1rsquo

b Select MicroLogix from the Controller Type field

c In the Address field type 1

11Click Validate

12Click Save

13Click Switch to PanelView Explorer Startup

14 In the Application Dashboard window select the Simple Starting Building Block application

15Click Run to run the application

Navigating the Starters Overview Page

When the PVc application is running any drive or starter that is enabled is shown on the Starters Overview screen as being lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo or lsquoFaultrsquo To ease the use of this program by the OEM the header for the starter is left generic for the ability to change starters without the need to change the PVc first page To change the buttons themselves please see the PanelView Component HMI Terminals user manual

bull lsquoM1rsquo is designated for the SMC-3 controller

bull lsquoM2rsquo is designated for the 103T starter

bull lsquoM3rsquo is designated for the PF 4M drive

bull lsquoM4rsquo is designated for the 190E starter

24 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

bull Stopped indicates the starter is stopped

bull 140M On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull Starting (not shown) indicates the starter or drive is starting

bull Running indicates that motor is running based on feedback from the starter or drive

bull Fault indicates that there is an overload short circuit or other fault the starter has detected

Touching anywhere on Stopped 140M On Running Fault or M takes you to the individual starter screens regardless of the status shown

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality

Now that the PVc terminal is successfully communicating with the MicroLogix controller you are ready to test the Simple Starting functionality

Navigating the Simple Starting Screen

Touch any of the MTR or M buttons on the Starters Overview screen to get to each individual starter screen such as these for the SMC-3 and VFD starter screens

TIP At this point you may choose to edit the Starters Overview screen and delete any buttons and status displays that are associated with non-existing starters or drives

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 25

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

The in the top-right corner exits the application and goes to the PVc Terminal Starters Overview screen

The 190E and 103T screens are similar to that for the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the fault button on the starter screen

The SMC-3 screen shows the following states

The right column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Start is a momentary start button which appears when the starterdrive is in Auto and the 140M is Ready Touching this button starts the starter or drive

bull Stop is also a momentary button Touching this button stops the starterdrive

If the HOA (Hand Off Auto) is not in Auto the Start and Stop buttons will not appear nor will they appear without a 3 Ph On signal In this building block a signal of lsquo1rsquo back to the PLC indicates an Auto position a signal of lsquo0rsquo back indicates a hand or off position You can add an additional contact block to the HOA for the hand position and feedback to the PLC to give that status also

The center column of the SMC-3 starter screen indicates the following

bull 3 Ph On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull 3 Ph Off indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOffrsquo position

bull Stopped indicates the SMC-3 controller is stopped

bull Starting indicates the motor is starting

bull At Speed indicates the motor is running and is at speed

bull Start Fail indicates the starter or drive received a start signal but did not start within the time set in the RSLogix program

CausesRemedies When getting a Start Fail indication check the starter drive andor motor for wiring issues or damage In addition the Start Fail indication may occur due to too short a time for the Timer On Delay in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller See Timer On Delay below

Reset procedure To reset the Start Fail on the PVc terminal when using the SMC-3 controller or the 103T or 190E starters turn the front knob on the 140M MPCB or MCP to off and then back to on to clear the indication To clear this indication on the drive press the stop button on the either on the PVc terminal in Auto mode or press the stop button in Hand mode

26 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Timer On Delay The timer is started when the Start signal is sent to the starter or drive At the end of the timing a comparison is done to see if the motor has actually started The time duration for the Timer On Delay is fully adjustable in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller For this building block the timers are set to 35 seconds for the SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive and 5 seconds for the 103T and 190E starters Check rung 3 or 4 of the default program for the timer

The left column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Fault indicates that the starter has detected a fault

Not all starters have this capability

The SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive can provide this information When the fault indication appears on the SMC-3 controller touching Fault takes you to the listed fault screen for the controller

The PF 4M drive VFD screen always has the Fault button displayed If a fault appears on the PF 4M drive the fault code is displayed on the drive You can press the Fault button on the PVc terminal to view the fault description You can scroll through the fault list just as with the SMC-3 controller

The fault indication on the 103T or 190E starter screen does not have this fault screen functionality since these starters do not provide additional information

bull OVLD indicates that there is an overload detected by the starter

bull SC indicates that there is a short circuit detected by the starter

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 27

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Understanding Faults

The Fault button is always present on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal This Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is merely a GoTo button and does not by itself indicate a fault condition with the PF 4M drive The SMC-3 controller however sends a signal back to the PVc terminal indicating a fault with the controller The Fault GOTO button is then displayed on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo screen on the PVc terminal Pressing the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo Fault screen or on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault screen takes you to the individual fault screens where you can scroll through to find the fault indicated on the PF 4M drive or the SMC-3 controller and its corresponding description

rsquoVFDrsquo Fault Screen (for PF 4M Drive)

lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault Screen

In both cases look at the fault code on the PF 4M drive or SMC-3 controller

bull For the PF 4M drive you must view the fault code on the drive Press the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal to view the fault listing Locate the specific fault for the drive To get a deeper description of the fault consult the user manual for the drive

bull The SMC-3 Controller will have a flashing LED and you need to count the number of flashes Then on the PVc terminal scroll through the fault listing screen and identify the fault using the number of flashes for identification

The button in the lower-right corner of the fault listings takes you back to the SMC-3 or VFD starter screen

28 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Test the SMC-3 Controller

Follow this procedure to test the SMC-3 controller

1 Make sure the motor is disconnected from the load for ease of testing in this procedure

2 Verify that the external HOA is in Auto mode

3 Verify that the 140M is in the ON position (I)

This enables the 3-phase power to the starter

4 Verify that there is no Fault OVLD or SC state If there is check the PVc terminal for the error condition The screen should look like this

5 Verify that the 3 Ph On indicator is present

6 Verify that the Start and Stop buttons are present

7 Make sure that the SMC-3 controller has the proper DIP switch setting for your application (for example ramp time current limit or soft start)

8 Touch the Start button

9 Verify the following

bull The isolation contactor pulls in

bull The motor starts according to the starting method selected for the SMC-3 controller

bull The Running indication appears when the motor is up to speed

10Touch the Stop button to stop the motor

11Unplug the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable from the PVc terminal going to the MicroLogix controller

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 29

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA ltFEFF00550073006100720065002000710075006500730074006500200069006d0070006f007300740061007a0069006f006e00690020007000650072002000630072006500610072006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e007400690020005000440046002000610064006100740074006900200070006500720020006c00610020007300740061006d00700061002000650020006c0061002000760069007300750061006c0069007a007a0061007a0069006f006e006500200064006900200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006900200061007a00690065006e00640061006c0069002e0020004900200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740069002000500044004600200070006f00730073006f006e006f0020006500730073006500720065002000610070006500720074006900200063006f006e0020004100630072006f00620061007400200065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065002000760065007200730069006f006e006900200073007500630063006500730073006900760065002egt NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 21: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer

The PanelView Explorer design-time environment is accessed through a web browser by connecting your computer to the PVc terminal with a USB connection Before connecting your computer to the USB port of the PVc terminal you must first install the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver on a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system After installing the driver you can connect the PVc terminal to your computer For details on how to install the driver refer to the PanelView Component Terminal User Manual publication 2711C-UM001

PVc Terminal USB Connections

All PanelView Component terminals support a USB port connection and require a computer with Windows XP or Vista operating system and with the PanelView USB RNDIS Device driver installed The driver cannot be installed on a computer with Windows 2000 operating system

1 Connect one end of a USB cable to the mini-USB device port on your PVc terminal

2 Connect the other end of the USB cable to a USB port on your personal computer

3 Power up the PVc terminal and the personal computer

PanelView Explorer Startup Window

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02USB port

USB port

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 21

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication

The 3-inch monochrome touch screen PanelView Component (PVc) terminal communicates with the MicroLogix controller over the DF1 network The PVc application reads from and writes to the data table of the MicroLogix controller When the PVc application writes to the MicroLogix controller the controller program detects the value change and writes that new value to the appropriate drive soft starter or discrete starter

1 Connect the personal computer to the PVc terminal using a USB cable

2 Connect the PVc terminal to MicroLogix controller using the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable

3 Start either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox 20

4 In the address bar of your browser type the IP address 1692542542 (This is a fixed IP address that the USB port uses)

5 Press Enter to connect your personal computer to the PVc terminal

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02

USB port

USB port

MicroLogix controller

1761-CBL-PM02

22 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

6 Select the application name in the PVc dashboard dialog box and then click Edit

7 In the Edit dialog box click the Communication tab

The following dialog box appears

8 Click Serial under Protocol and select DF1 from the pull-down list

9 Under PanelView Component Settings verify the Station Address is 2

Validate button

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 23

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

10Under Controller Settings

a Accept the default name lsquoPLC-1rsquo

b Select MicroLogix from the Controller Type field

c In the Address field type 1

11Click Validate

12Click Save

13Click Switch to PanelView Explorer Startup

14 In the Application Dashboard window select the Simple Starting Building Block application

15Click Run to run the application

Navigating the Starters Overview Page

When the PVc application is running any drive or starter that is enabled is shown on the Starters Overview screen as being lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo or lsquoFaultrsquo To ease the use of this program by the OEM the header for the starter is left generic for the ability to change starters without the need to change the PVc first page To change the buttons themselves please see the PanelView Component HMI Terminals user manual

bull lsquoM1rsquo is designated for the SMC-3 controller

bull lsquoM2rsquo is designated for the 103T starter

bull lsquoM3rsquo is designated for the PF 4M drive

bull lsquoM4rsquo is designated for the 190E starter

24 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

bull Stopped indicates the starter is stopped

bull 140M On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull Starting (not shown) indicates the starter or drive is starting

bull Running indicates that motor is running based on feedback from the starter or drive

bull Fault indicates that there is an overload short circuit or other fault the starter has detected

Touching anywhere on Stopped 140M On Running Fault or M takes you to the individual starter screens regardless of the status shown

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality

Now that the PVc terminal is successfully communicating with the MicroLogix controller you are ready to test the Simple Starting functionality

Navigating the Simple Starting Screen

Touch any of the MTR or M buttons on the Starters Overview screen to get to each individual starter screen such as these for the SMC-3 and VFD starter screens

TIP At this point you may choose to edit the Starters Overview screen and delete any buttons and status displays that are associated with non-existing starters or drives

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 25

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

The in the top-right corner exits the application and goes to the PVc Terminal Starters Overview screen

The 190E and 103T screens are similar to that for the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the fault button on the starter screen

The SMC-3 screen shows the following states

The right column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Start is a momentary start button which appears when the starterdrive is in Auto and the 140M is Ready Touching this button starts the starter or drive

bull Stop is also a momentary button Touching this button stops the starterdrive

If the HOA (Hand Off Auto) is not in Auto the Start and Stop buttons will not appear nor will they appear without a 3 Ph On signal In this building block a signal of lsquo1rsquo back to the PLC indicates an Auto position a signal of lsquo0rsquo back indicates a hand or off position You can add an additional contact block to the HOA for the hand position and feedback to the PLC to give that status also

The center column of the SMC-3 starter screen indicates the following

bull 3 Ph On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull 3 Ph Off indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOffrsquo position

bull Stopped indicates the SMC-3 controller is stopped

bull Starting indicates the motor is starting

bull At Speed indicates the motor is running and is at speed

bull Start Fail indicates the starter or drive received a start signal but did not start within the time set in the RSLogix program

CausesRemedies When getting a Start Fail indication check the starter drive andor motor for wiring issues or damage In addition the Start Fail indication may occur due to too short a time for the Timer On Delay in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller See Timer On Delay below

Reset procedure To reset the Start Fail on the PVc terminal when using the SMC-3 controller or the 103T or 190E starters turn the front knob on the 140M MPCB or MCP to off and then back to on to clear the indication To clear this indication on the drive press the stop button on the either on the PVc terminal in Auto mode or press the stop button in Hand mode

26 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Timer On Delay The timer is started when the Start signal is sent to the starter or drive At the end of the timing a comparison is done to see if the motor has actually started The time duration for the Timer On Delay is fully adjustable in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller For this building block the timers are set to 35 seconds for the SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive and 5 seconds for the 103T and 190E starters Check rung 3 or 4 of the default program for the timer

The left column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Fault indicates that the starter has detected a fault

Not all starters have this capability

The SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive can provide this information When the fault indication appears on the SMC-3 controller touching Fault takes you to the listed fault screen for the controller

The PF 4M drive VFD screen always has the Fault button displayed If a fault appears on the PF 4M drive the fault code is displayed on the drive You can press the Fault button on the PVc terminal to view the fault description You can scroll through the fault list just as with the SMC-3 controller

The fault indication on the 103T or 190E starter screen does not have this fault screen functionality since these starters do not provide additional information

bull OVLD indicates that there is an overload detected by the starter

bull SC indicates that there is a short circuit detected by the starter

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 27

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Understanding Faults

The Fault button is always present on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal This Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is merely a GoTo button and does not by itself indicate a fault condition with the PF 4M drive The SMC-3 controller however sends a signal back to the PVc terminal indicating a fault with the controller The Fault GOTO button is then displayed on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo screen on the PVc terminal Pressing the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo Fault screen or on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault screen takes you to the individual fault screens where you can scroll through to find the fault indicated on the PF 4M drive or the SMC-3 controller and its corresponding description

rsquoVFDrsquo Fault Screen (for PF 4M Drive)

lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault Screen

In both cases look at the fault code on the PF 4M drive or SMC-3 controller

bull For the PF 4M drive you must view the fault code on the drive Press the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal to view the fault listing Locate the specific fault for the drive To get a deeper description of the fault consult the user manual for the drive

bull The SMC-3 Controller will have a flashing LED and you need to count the number of flashes Then on the PVc terminal scroll through the fault listing screen and identify the fault using the number of flashes for identification

The button in the lower-right corner of the fault listings takes you back to the SMC-3 or VFD starter screen

28 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Test the SMC-3 Controller

Follow this procedure to test the SMC-3 controller

1 Make sure the motor is disconnected from the load for ease of testing in this procedure

2 Verify that the external HOA is in Auto mode

3 Verify that the 140M is in the ON position (I)

This enables the 3-phase power to the starter

4 Verify that there is no Fault OVLD or SC state If there is check the PVc terminal for the error condition The screen should look like this

5 Verify that the 3 Ph On indicator is present

6 Verify that the Start and Stop buttons are present

7 Make sure that the SMC-3 controller has the proper DIP switch setting for your application (for example ramp time current limit or soft start)

8 Touch the Start button

9 Verify the following

bull The isolation contactor pulls in

bull The motor starts according to the starting method selected for the SMC-3 controller

bull The Running indication appears when the motor is up to speed

10Touch the Stop button to stop the motor

11Unplug the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable from the PVc terminal going to the MicroLogix controller

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 29

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP ltFEFF0055007300650020006500730074006100730020006f007000630069006f006e006500730020007000610072006100200063007200650061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200071007500650020007000650072006d006900740061006e002000760069007300750061006c0069007a006100720020006500200069006d007000720069006d0069007200200063006f007200720065006300740061006d0065006e0074006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f007300200065006d00700072006500730061007200690061006c00650073002e0020004c006f007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f00730020005000440046002000730065002000700075006500640065006e00200061006200720069007200200063006f006e0020004100630072006f00620061007400200079002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200079002000760065007200730069006f006e0065007300200070006f00730074006500720069006f007200650073002egt SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 22: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication

The 3-inch monochrome touch screen PanelView Component (PVc) terminal communicates with the MicroLogix controller over the DF1 network The PVc application reads from and writes to the data table of the MicroLogix controller When the PVc application writes to the MicroLogix controller the controller program detects the value change and writes that new value to the appropriate drive soft starter or discrete starter

1 Connect the personal computer to the PVc terminal using a USB cable

2 Connect the PVc terminal to MicroLogix controller using the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable

3 Start either Internet Explorer 7 or Firefox 20

4 In the address bar of your browser type the IP address 1692542542 (This is a fixed IP address that the USB port uses)

5 Press Enter to connect your personal computer to the PVc terminal

USB cable 2711C-CBL-UU02

USB port

USB port

MicroLogix controller

1761-CBL-PM02

22 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

6 Select the application name in the PVc dashboard dialog box and then click Edit

7 In the Edit dialog box click the Communication tab

The following dialog box appears

8 Click Serial under Protocol and select DF1 from the pull-down list

9 Under PanelView Component Settings verify the Station Address is 2

Validate button

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 23

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

10Under Controller Settings

a Accept the default name lsquoPLC-1rsquo

b Select MicroLogix from the Controller Type field

c In the Address field type 1

11Click Validate

12Click Save

13Click Switch to PanelView Explorer Startup

14 In the Application Dashboard window select the Simple Starting Building Block application

15Click Run to run the application

Navigating the Starters Overview Page

When the PVc application is running any drive or starter that is enabled is shown on the Starters Overview screen as being lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo or lsquoFaultrsquo To ease the use of this program by the OEM the header for the starter is left generic for the ability to change starters without the need to change the PVc first page To change the buttons themselves please see the PanelView Component HMI Terminals user manual

bull lsquoM1rsquo is designated for the SMC-3 controller

bull lsquoM2rsquo is designated for the 103T starter

bull lsquoM3rsquo is designated for the PF 4M drive

bull lsquoM4rsquo is designated for the 190E starter

24 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

bull Stopped indicates the starter is stopped

bull 140M On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull Starting (not shown) indicates the starter or drive is starting

bull Running indicates that motor is running based on feedback from the starter or drive

bull Fault indicates that there is an overload short circuit or other fault the starter has detected

Touching anywhere on Stopped 140M On Running Fault or M takes you to the individual starter screens regardless of the status shown

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality

Now that the PVc terminal is successfully communicating with the MicroLogix controller you are ready to test the Simple Starting functionality

Navigating the Simple Starting Screen

Touch any of the MTR or M buttons on the Starters Overview screen to get to each individual starter screen such as these for the SMC-3 and VFD starter screens

TIP At this point you may choose to edit the Starters Overview screen and delete any buttons and status displays that are associated with non-existing starters or drives

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 25

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

The in the top-right corner exits the application and goes to the PVc Terminal Starters Overview screen

The 190E and 103T screens are similar to that for the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the fault button on the starter screen

The SMC-3 screen shows the following states

The right column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Start is a momentary start button which appears when the starterdrive is in Auto and the 140M is Ready Touching this button starts the starter or drive

bull Stop is also a momentary button Touching this button stops the starterdrive

If the HOA (Hand Off Auto) is not in Auto the Start and Stop buttons will not appear nor will they appear without a 3 Ph On signal In this building block a signal of lsquo1rsquo back to the PLC indicates an Auto position a signal of lsquo0rsquo back indicates a hand or off position You can add an additional contact block to the HOA for the hand position and feedback to the PLC to give that status also

The center column of the SMC-3 starter screen indicates the following

bull 3 Ph On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull 3 Ph Off indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOffrsquo position

bull Stopped indicates the SMC-3 controller is stopped

bull Starting indicates the motor is starting

bull At Speed indicates the motor is running and is at speed

bull Start Fail indicates the starter or drive received a start signal but did not start within the time set in the RSLogix program

CausesRemedies When getting a Start Fail indication check the starter drive andor motor for wiring issues or damage In addition the Start Fail indication may occur due to too short a time for the Timer On Delay in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller See Timer On Delay below

Reset procedure To reset the Start Fail on the PVc terminal when using the SMC-3 controller or the 103T or 190E starters turn the front knob on the 140M MPCB or MCP to off and then back to on to clear the indication To clear this indication on the drive press the stop button on the either on the PVc terminal in Auto mode or press the stop button in Hand mode

26 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Timer On Delay The timer is started when the Start signal is sent to the starter or drive At the end of the timing a comparison is done to see if the motor has actually started The time duration for the Timer On Delay is fully adjustable in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller For this building block the timers are set to 35 seconds for the SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive and 5 seconds for the 103T and 190E starters Check rung 3 or 4 of the default program for the timer

The left column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Fault indicates that the starter has detected a fault

Not all starters have this capability

The SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive can provide this information When the fault indication appears on the SMC-3 controller touching Fault takes you to the listed fault screen for the controller

The PF 4M drive VFD screen always has the Fault button displayed If a fault appears on the PF 4M drive the fault code is displayed on the drive You can press the Fault button on the PVc terminal to view the fault description You can scroll through the fault list just as with the SMC-3 controller

The fault indication on the 103T or 190E starter screen does not have this fault screen functionality since these starters do not provide additional information

bull OVLD indicates that there is an overload detected by the starter

bull SC indicates that there is a short circuit detected by the starter

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 27

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Understanding Faults

The Fault button is always present on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal This Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is merely a GoTo button and does not by itself indicate a fault condition with the PF 4M drive The SMC-3 controller however sends a signal back to the PVc terminal indicating a fault with the controller The Fault GOTO button is then displayed on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo screen on the PVc terminal Pressing the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo Fault screen or on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault screen takes you to the individual fault screens where you can scroll through to find the fault indicated on the PF 4M drive or the SMC-3 controller and its corresponding description

rsquoVFDrsquo Fault Screen (for PF 4M Drive)

lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault Screen

In both cases look at the fault code on the PF 4M drive or SMC-3 controller

bull For the PF 4M drive you must view the fault code on the drive Press the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal to view the fault listing Locate the specific fault for the drive To get a deeper description of the fault consult the user manual for the drive

bull The SMC-3 Controller will have a flashing LED and you need to count the number of flashes Then on the PVc terminal scroll through the fault listing screen and identify the fault using the number of flashes for identification

The button in the lower-right corner of the fault listings takes you back to the SMC-3 or VFD starter screen

28 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Test the SMC-3 Controller

Follow this procedure to test the SMC-3 controller

1 Make sure the motor is disconnected from the load for ease of testing in this procedure

2 Verify that the external HOA is in Auto mode

3 Verify that the 140M is in the ON position (I)

This enables the 3-phase power to the starter

4 Verify that there is no Fault OVLD or SC state If there is check the PVc terminal for the error condition The screen should look like this

5 Verify that the 3 Ph On indicator is present

6 Verify that the Start and Stop buttons are present

7 Make sure that the SMC-3 controller has the proper DIP switch setting for your application (for example ramp time current limit or soft start)

8 Touch the Start button

9 Verify the following

bull The isolation contactor pulls in

bull The motor starts according to the starting method selected for the SMC-3 controller

bull The Running indication appears when the motor is up to speed

10Touch the Stop button to stop the motor

11Unplug the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable from the PVc terminal going to the MicroLogix controller

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 29

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO ltFEFF004e00e4006900640065006e002000610073006500740075007300740065006e0020006100760075006c006c006100200076006f006900740020006c0075006f006400610020006a0061002000740075006c006f00730074006100610020005000440046002d0061007300690061006b00690072006a006f006a0061002c0020006a006f006900640065006e0020006500730069006b0061007400730065006c00750020006e00e400790074007400e400e40020006c0075006f00740065007400740061007600610073007400690020006c006f00700070007500740075006c006f006b00730065006e002e0020005000440046002d0061007300690061006b00690072006a0061007400200076006f0069006400610061006e0020006100760061007400610020004100630072006f006200610074002d0020006a0061002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020002d006f0068006a0065006c006d0061006c006c0061002000740061006900200075007500640065006d006d0061006c006c0061002000760065007200730069006f006c006c0061002egt ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 23: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

6 Select the application name in the PVc dashboard dialog box and then click Edit

7 In the Edit dialog box click the Communication tab

The following dialog box appears

8 Click Serial under Protocol and select DF1 from the pull-down list

9 Under PanelView Component Settings verify the Station Address is 2

Validate button

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 23

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

10Under Controller Settings

a Accept the default name lsquoPLC-1rsquo

b Select MicroLogix from the Controller Type field

c In the Address field type 1

11Click Validate

12Click Save

13Click Switch to PanelView Explorer Startup

14 In the Application Dashboard window select the Simple Starting Building Block application

15Click Run to run the application

Navigating the Starters Overview Page

When the PVc application is running any drive or starter that is enabled is shown on the Starters Overview screen as being lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo or lsquoFaultrsquo To ease the use of this program by the OEM the header for the starter is left generic for the ability to change starters without the need to change the PVc first page To change the buttons themselves please see the PanelView Component HMI Terminals user manual

bull lsquoM1rsquo is designated for the SMC-3 controller

bull lsquoM2rsquo is designated for the 103T starter

bull lsquoM3rsquo is designated for the PF 4M drive

bull lsquoM4rsquo is designated for the 190E starter

24 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

bull Stopped indicates the starter is stopped

bull 140M On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull Starting (not shown) indicates the starter or drive is starting

bull Running indicates that motor is running based on feedback from the starter or drive

bull Fault indicates that there is an overload short circuit or other fault the starter has detected

Touching anywhere on Stopped 140M On Running Fault or M takes you to the individual starter screens regardless of the status shown

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality

Now that the PVc terminal is successfully communicating with the MicroLogix controller you are ready to test the Simple Starting functionality

Navigating the Simple Starting Screen

Touch any of the MTR or M buttons on the Starters Overview screen to get to each individual starter screen such as these for the SMC-3 and VFD starter screens

TIP At this point you may choose to edit the Starters Overview screen and delete any buttons and status displays that are associated with non-existing starters or drives

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 25

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

The in the top-right corner exits the application and goes to the PVc Terminal Starters Overview screen

The 190E and 103T screens are similar to that for the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the fault button on the starter screen

The SMC-3 screen shows the following states

The right column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Start is a momentary start button which appears when the starterdrive is in Auto and the 140M is Ready Touching this button starts the starter or drive

bull Stop is also a momentary button Touching this button stops the starterdrive

If the HOA (Hand Off Auto) is not in Auto the Start and Stop buttons will not appear nor will they appear without a 3 Ph On signal In this building block a signal of lsquo1rsquo back to the PLC indicates an Auto position a signal of lsquo0rsquo back indicates a hand or off position You can add an additional contact block to the HOA for the hand position and feedback to the PLC to give that status also

The center column of the SMC-3 starter screen indicates the following

bull 3 Ph On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull 3 Ph Off indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOffrsquo position

bull Stopped indicates the SMC-3 controller is stopped

bull Starting indicates the motor is starting

bull At Speed indicates the motor is running and is at speed

bull Start Fail indicates the starter or drive received a start signal but did not start within the time set in the RSLogix program

CausesRemedies When getting a Start Fail indication check the starter drive andor motor for wiring issues or damage In addition the Start Fail indication may occur due to too short a time for the Timer On Delay in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller See Timer On Delay below

Reset procedure To reset the Start Fail on the PVc terminal when using the SMC-3 controller or the 103T or 190E starters turn the front knob on the 140M MPCB or MCP to off and then back to on to clear the indication To clear this indication on the drive press the stop button on the either on the PVc terminal in Auto mode or press the stop button in Hand mode

26 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Timer On Delay The timer is started when the Start signal is sent to the starter or drive At the end of the timing a comparison is done to see if the motor has actually started The time duration for the Timer On Delay is fully adjustable in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller For this building block the timers are set to 35 seconds for the SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive and 5 seconds for the 103T and 190E starters Check rung 3 or 4 of the default program for the timer

The left column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Fault indicates that the starter has detected a fault

Not all starters have this capability

The SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive can provide this information When the fault indication appears on the SMC-3 controller touching Fault takes you to the listed fault screen for the controller

The PF 4M drive VFD screen always has the Fault button displayed If a fault appears on the PF 4M drive the fault code is displayed on the drive You can press the Fault button on the PVc terminal to view the fault description You can scroll through the fault list just as with the SMC-3 controller

The fault indication on the 103T or 190E starter screen does not have this fault screen functionality since these starters do not provide additional information

bull OVLD indicates that there is an overload detected by the starter

bull SC indicates that there is a short circuit detected by the starter

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 27

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Understanding Faults

The Fault button is always present on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal This Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is merely a GoTo button and does not by itself indicate a fault condition with the PF 4M drive The SMC-3 controller however sends a signal back to the PVc terminal indicating a fault with the controller The Fault GOTO button is then displayed on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo screen on the PVc terminal Pressing the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo Fault screen or on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault screen takes you to the individual fault screens where you can scroll through to find the fault indicated on the PF 4M drive or the SMC-3 controller and its corresponding description

rsquoVFDrsquo Fault Screen (for PF 4M Drive)

lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault Screen

In both cases look at the fault code on the PF 4M drive or SMC-3 controller

bull For the PF 4M drive you must view the fault code on the drive Press the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal to view the fault listing Locate the specific fault for the drive To get a deeper description of the fault consult the user manual for the drive

bull The SMC-3 Controller will have a flashing LED and you need to count the number of flashes Then on the PVc terminal scroll through the fault listing screen and identify the fault using the number of flashes for identification

The button in the lower-right corner of the fault listings takes you back to the SMC-3 or VFD starter screen

28 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Test the SMC-3 Controller

Follow this procedure to test the SMC-3 controller

1 Make sure the motor is disconnected from the load for ease of testing in this procedure

2 Verify that the external HOA is in Auto mode

3 Verify that the 140M is in the ON position (I)

This enables the 3-phase power to the starter

4 Verify that there is no Fault OVLD or SC state If there is check the PVc terminal for the error condition The screen should look like this

5 Verify that the 3 Ph On indicator is present

6 Verify that the Start and Stop buttons are present

7 Make sure that the SMC-3 controller has the proper DIP switch setting for your application (for example ramp time current limit or soft start)

8 Touch the Start button

9 Verify the following

bull The isolation contactor pulls in

bull The motor starts according to the starting method selected for the SMC-3 controller

bull The Running indication appears when the motor is up to speed

10Touch the Stop button to stop the motor

11Unplug the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable from the PVc terminal going to the MicroLogix controller

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 29

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN ltFEFF004200720075006700200064006900730073006500200069006e0064007300740069006c006c0069006e006700650072002000740069006c0020006100740020006f0070007200650074007400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002c0020006400650072002000650072002000650067006e006500640065002000740069006c0020007000e5006c006900640065006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f00670020007500640073006b007200690076006e0069006e006700200061006600200066006f0072007200650074006e0069006e006700730064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072006e00650020006b0061006e002000e50062006e006500730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0067002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f00670020006e0079006500720065002egt NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 24: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

10Under Controller Settings

a Accept the default name lsquoPLC-1rsquo

b Select MicroLogix from the Controller Type field

c In the Address field type 1

11Click Validate

12Click Save

13Click Switch to PanelView Explorer Startup

14 In the Application Dashboard window select the Simple Starting Building Block application

15Click Run to run the application

Navigating the Starters Overview Page

When the PVc application is running any drive or starter that is enabled is shown on the Starters Overview screen as being lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo or lsquoFaultrsquo To ease the use of this program by the OEM the header for the starter is left generic for the ability to change starters without the need to change the PVc first page To change the buttons themselves please see the PanelView Component HMI Terminals user manual

bull lsquoM1rsquo is designated for the SMC-3 controller

bull lsquoM2rsquo is designated for the 103T starter

bull lsquoM3rsquo is designated for the PF 4M drive

bull lsquoM4rsquo is designated for the 190E starter

24 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

bull Stopped indicates the starter is stopped

bull 140M On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull Starting (not shown) indicates the starter or drive is starting

bull Running indicates that motor is running based on feedback from the starter or drive

bull Fault indicates that there is an overload short circuit or other fault the starter has detected

Touching anywhere on Stopped 140M On Running Fault or M takes you to the individual starter screens regardless of the status shown

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality

Now that the PVc terminal is successfully communicating with the MicroLogix controller you are ready to test the Simple Starting functionality

Navigating the Simple Starting Screen

Touch any of the MTR or M buttons on the Starters Overview screen to get to each individual starter screen such as these for the SMC-3 and VFD starter screens

TIP At this point you may choose to edit the Starters Overview screen and delete any buttons and status displays that are associated with non-existing starters or drives

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 25

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

The in the top-right corner exits the application and goes to the PVc Terminal Starters Overview screen

The 190E and 103T screens are similar to that for the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the fault button on the starter screen

The SMC-3 screen shows the following states

The right column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Start is a momentary start button which appears when the starterdrive is in Auto and the 140M is Ready Touching this button starts the starter or drive

bull Stop is also a momentary button Touching this button stops the starterdrive

If the HOA (Hand Off Auto) is not in Auto the Start and Stop buttons will not appear nor will they appear without a 3 Ph On signal In this building block a signal of lsquo1rsquo back to the PLC indicates an Auto position a signal of lsquo0rsquo back indicates a hand or off position You can add an additional contact block to the HOA for the hand position and feedback to the PLC to give that status also

The center column of the SMC-3 starter screen indicates the following

bull 3 Ph On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull 3 Ph Off indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOffrsquo position

bull Stopped indicates the SMC-3 controller is stopped

bull Starting indicates the motor is starting

bull At Speed indicates the motor is running and is at speed

bull Start Fail indicates the starter or drive received a start signal but did not start within the time set in the RSLogix program

CausesRemedies When getting a Start Fail indication check the starter drive andor motor for wiring issues or damage In addition the Start Fail indication may occur due to too short a time for the Timer On Delay in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller See Timer On Delay below

Reset procedure To reset the Start Fail on the PVc terminal when using the SMC-3 controller or the 103T or 190E starters turn the front knob on the 140M MPCB or MCP to off and then back to on to clear the indication To clear this indication on the drive press the stop button on the either on the PVc terminal in Auto mode or press the stop button in Hand mode

26 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Timer On Delay The timer is started when the Start signal is sent to the starter or drive At the end of the timing a comparison is done to see if the motor has actually started The time duration for the Timer On Delay is fully adjustable in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller For this building block the timers are set to 35 seconds for the SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive and 5 seconds for the 103T and 190E starters Check rung 3 or 4 of the default program for the timer

The left column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Fault indicates that the starter has detected a fault

Not all starters have this capability

The SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive can provide this information When the fault indication appears on the SMC-3 controller touching Fault takes you to the listed fault screen for the controller

The PF 4M drive VFD screen always has the Fault button displayed If a fault appears on the PF 4M drive the fault code is displayed on the drive You can press the Fault button on the PVc terminal to view the fault description You can scroll through the fault list just as with the SMC-3 controller

The fault indication on the 103T or 190E starter screen does not have this fault screen functionality since these starters do not provide additional information

bull OVLD indicates that there is an overload detected by the starter

bull SC indicates that there is a short circuit detected by the starter

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 27

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Understanding Faults

The Fault button is always present on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal This Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is merely a GoTo button and does not by itself indicate a fault condition with the PF 4M drive The SMC-3 controller however sends a signal back to the PVc terminal indicating a fault with the controller The Fault GOTO button is then displayed on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo screen on the PVc terminal Pressing the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo Fault screen or on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault screen takes you to the individual fault screens where you can scroll through to find the fault indicated on the PF 4M drive or the SMC-3 controller and its corresponding description

rsquoVFDrsquo Fault Screen (for PF 4M Drive)

lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault Screen

In both cases look at the fault code on the PF 4M drive or SMC-3 controller

bull For the PF 4M drive you must view the fault code on the drive Press the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal to view the fault listing Locate the specific fault for the drive To get a deeper description of the fault consult the user manual for the drive

bull The SMC-3 Controller will have a flashing LED and you need to count the number of flashes Then on the PVc terminal scroll through the fault listing screen and identify the fault using the number of flashes for identification

The button in the lower-right corner of the fault listings takes you back to the SMC-3 or VFD starter screen

28 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Test the SMC-3 Controller

Follow this procedure to test the SMC-3 controller

1 Make sure the motor is disconnected from the load for ease of testing in this procedure

2 Verify that the external HOA is in Auto mode

3 Verify that the 140M is in the ON position (I)

This enables the 3-phase power to the starter

4 Verify that there is no Fault OVLD or SC state If there is check the PVc terminal for the error condition The screen should look like this

5 Verify that the 3 Ph On indicator is present

6 Verify that the Start and Stop buttons are present

7 Make sure that the SMC-3 controller has the proper DIP switch setting for your application (for example ramp time current limit or soft start)

8 Touch the Start button

9 Verify the following

bull The isolation contactor pulls in

bull The motor starts according to the starting method selected for the SMC-3 controller

bull The Running indication appears when the motor is up to speed

10Touch the Stop button to stop the motor

11Unplug the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable from the PVc terminal going to the MicroLogix controller

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 29

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA ltFEFF004f007000740069006f006e00730020007000650072006d0065007400740061006e007400200064006500200063007200e900650072002000640065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e007400730020005000440046002000700072006f00660065007300730069006f006e006e0065006c007300200066006900610062006c0065007300200070006f007500720020006c0061002000760069007300750061006c00690073006100740069006f006e0020006500740020006c00270069006d007000720065007300730069006f006e002e00200049006c002000650073007400200070006f0073007300690062006c0065002000640027006f00750076007200690072002000630065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e007400730020005000440046002000640061006e00730020004100630072006f0062006100740020006500740020005200650061006400650072002c002000760065007200730069006f006e002000200035002e00300020006f007500200075006c007400e9007200690065007500720065002egt PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 25: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

bull Stopped indicates the starter is stopped

bull 140M On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull Starting (not shown) indicates the starter or drive is starting

bull Running indicates that motor is running based on feedback from the starter or drive

bull Fault indicates that there is an overload short circuit or other fault the starter has detected

Touching anywhere on Stopped 140M On Running Fault or M takes you to the individual starter screens regardless of the status shown

Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality

Now that the PVc terminal is successfully communicating with the MicroLogix controller you are ready to test the Simple Starting functionality

Navigating the Simple Starting Screen

Touch any of the MTR or M buttons on the Starters Overview screen to get to each individual starter screen such as these for the SMC-3 and VFD starter screens

TIP At this point you may choose to edit the Starters Overview screen and delete any buttons and status displays that are associated with non-existing starters or drives

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 25

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

The in the top-right corner exits the application and goes to the PVc Terminal Starters Overview screen

The 190E and 103T screens are similar to that for the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the fault button on the starter screen

The SMC-3 screen shows the following states

The right column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Start is a momentary start button which appears when the starterdrive is in Auto and the 140M is Ready Touching this button starts the starter or drive

bull Stop is also a momentary button Touching this button stops the starterdrive

If the HOA (Hand Off Auto) is not in Auto the Start and Stop buttons will not appear nor will they appear without a 3 Ph On signal In this building block a signal of lsquo1rsquo back to the PLC indicates an Auto position a signal of lsquo0rsquo back indicates a hand or off position You can add an additional contact block to the HOA for the hand position and feedback to the PLC to give that status also

The center column of the SMC-3 starter screen indicates the following

bull 3 Ph On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull 3 Ph Off indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOffrsquo position

bull Stopped indicates the SMC-3 controller is stopped

bull Starting indicates the motor is starting

bull At Speed indicates the motor is running and is at speed

bull Start Fail indicates the starter or drive received a start signal but did not start within the time set in the RSLogix program

CausesRemedies When getting a Start Fail indication check the starter drive andor motor for wiring issues or damage In addition the Start Fail indication may occur due to too short a time for the Timer On Delay in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller See Timer On Delay below

Reset procedure To reset the Start Fail on the PVc terminal when using the SMC-3 controller or the 103T or 190E starters turn the front knob on the 140M MPCB or MCP to off and then back to on to clear the indication To clear this indication on the drive press the stop button on the either on the PVc terminal in Auto mode or press the stop button in Hand mode

26 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Timer On Delay The timer is started when the Start signal is sent to the starter or drive At the end of the timing a comparison is done to see if the motor has actually started The time duration for the Timer On Delay is fully adjustable in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller For this building block the timers are set to 35 seconds for the SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive and 5 seconds for the 103T and 190E starters Check rung 3 or 4 of the default program for the timer

The left column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Fault indicates that the starter has detected a fault

Not all starters have this capability

The SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive can provide this information When the fault indication appears on the SMC-3 controller touching Fault takes you to the listed fault screen for the controller

The PF 4M drive VFD screen always has the Fault button displayed If a fault appears on the PF 4M drive the fault code is displayed on the drive You can press the Fault button on the PVc terminal to view the fault description You can scroll through the fault list just as with the SMC-3 controller

The fault indication on the 103T or 190E starter screen does not have this fault screen functionality since these starters do not provide additional information

bull OVLD indicates that there is an overload detected by the starter

bull SC indicates that there is a short circuit detected by the starter

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 27

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Understanding Faults

The Fault button is always present on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal This Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is merely a GoTo button and does not by itself indicate a fault condition with the PF 4M drive The SMC-3 controller however sends a signal back to the PVc terminal indicating a fault with the controller The Fault GOTO button is then displayed on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo screen on the PVc terminal Pressing the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo Fault screen or on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault screen takes you to the individual fault screens where you can scroll through to find the fault indicated on the PF 4M drive or the SMC-3 controller and its corresponding description

rsquoVFDrsquo Fault Screen (for PF 4M Drive)

lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault Screen

In both cases look at the fault code on the PF 4M drive or SMC-3 controller

bull For the PF 4M drive you must view the fault code on the drive Press the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal to view the fault listing Locate the specific fault for the drive To get a deeper description of the fault consult the user manual for the drive

bull The SMC-3 Controller will have a flashing LED and you need to count the number of flashes Then on the PVc terminal scroll through the fault listing screen and identify the fault using the number of flashes for identification

The button in the lower-right corner of the fault listings takes you back to the SMC-3 or VFD starter screen

28 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Test the SMC-3 Controller

Follow this procedure to test the SMC-3 controller

1 Make sure the motor is disconnected from the load for ease of testing in this procedure

2 Verify that the external HOA is in Auto mode

3 Verify that the 140M is in the ON position (I)

This enables the 3-phase power to the starter

4 Verify that there is no Fault OVLD or SC state If there is check the PVc terminal for the error condition The screen should look like this

5 Verify that the 3 Ph On indicator is present

6 Verify that the Start and Stop buttons are present

7 Make sure that the SMC-3 controller has the proper DIP switch setting for your application (for example ramp time current limit or soft start)

8 Touch the Start button

9 Verify the following

bull The isolation contactor pulls in

bull The motor starts according to the starting method selected for the SMC-3 controller

bull The Running indication appears when the motor is up to speed

10Touch the Stop button to stop the motor

11Unplug the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable from the PVc terminal going to the MicroLogix controller

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 29

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 26: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

The in the top-right corner exits the application and goes to the PVc Terminal Starters Overview screen

The 190E and 103T screens are similar to that for the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the fault button on the starter screen

The SMC-3 screen shows the following states

The right column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Start is a momentary start button which appears when the starterdrive is in Auto and the 140M is Ready Touching this button starts the starter or drive

bull Stop is also a momentary button Touching this button stops the starterdrive

If the HOA (Hand Off Auto) is not in Auto the Start and Stop buttons will not appear nor will they appear without a 3 Ph On signal In this building block a signal of lsquo1rsquo back to the PLC indicates an Auto position a signal of lsquo0rsquo back indicates a hand or off position You can add an additional contact block to the HOA for the hand position and feedback to the PLC to give that status also

The center column of the SMC-3 starter screen indicates the following

bull 3 Ph On indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOnrsquo position for the specific drive or starter

bull 3 Ph Off indicates that the 140M overload is in the lsquoOffrsquo position

bull Stopped indicates the SMC-3 controller is stopped

bull Starting indicates the motor is starting

bull At Speed indicates the motor is running and is at speed

bull Start Fail indicates the starter or drive received a start signal but did not start within the time set in the RSLogix program

CausesRemedies When getting a Start Fail indication check the starter drive andor motor for wiring issues or damage In addition the Start Fail indication may occur due to too short a time for the Timer On Delay in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller See Timer On Delay below

Reset procedure To reset the Start Fail on the PVc terminal when using the SMC-3 controller or the 103T or 190E starters turn the front knob on the 140M MPCB or MCP to off and then back to on to clear the indication To clear this indication on the drive press the stop button on the either on the PVc terminal in Auto mode or press the stop button in Hand mode

26 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Timer On Delay The timer is started when the Start signal is sent to the starter or drive At the end of the timing a comparison is done to see if the motor has actually started The time duration for the Timer On Delay is fully adjustable in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller For this building block the timers are set to 35 seconds for the SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive and 5 seconds for the 103T and 190E starters Check rung 3 or 4 of the default program for the timer

The left column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Fault indicates that the starter has detected a fault

Not all starters have this capability

The SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive can provide this information When the fault indication appears on the SMC-3 controller touching Fault takes you to the listed fault screen for the controller

The PF 4M drive VFD screen always has the Fault button displayed If a fault appears on the PF 4M drive the fault code is displayed on the drive You can press the Fault button on the PVc terminal to view the fault description You can scroll through the fault list just as with the SMC-3 controller

The fault indication on the 103T or 190E starter screen does not have this fault screen functionality since these starters do not provide additional information

bull OVLD indicates that there is an overload detected by the starter

bull SC indicates that there is a short circuit detected by the starter

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 27

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Understanding Faults

The Fault button is always present on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal This Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is merely a GoTo button and does not by itself indicate a fault condition with the PF 4M drive The SMC-3 controller however sends a signal back to the PVc terminal indicating a fault with the controller The Fault GOTO button is then displayed on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo screen on the PVc terminal Pressing the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo Fault screen or on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault screen takes you to the individual fault screens where you can scroll through to find the fault indicated on the PF 4M drive or the SMC-3 controller and its corresponding description

rsquoVFDrsquo Fault Screen (for PF 4M Drive)

lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault Screen

In both cases look at the fault code on the PF 4M drive or SMC-3 controller

bull For the PF 4M drive you must view the fault code on the drive Press the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal to view the fault listing Locate the specific fault for the drive To get a deeper description of the fault consult the user manual for the drive

bull The SMC-3 Controller will have a flashing LED and you need to count the number of flashes Then on the PVc terminal scroll through the fault listing screen and identify the fault using the number of flashes for identification

The button in the lower-right corner of the fault listings takes you back to the SMC-3 or VFD starter screen

28 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Test the SMC-3 Controller

Follow this procedure to test the SMC-3 controller

1 Make sure the motor is disconnected from the load for ease of testing in this procedure

2 Verify that the external HOA is in Auto mode

3 Verify that the 140M is in the ON position (I)

This enables the 3-phase power to the starter

4 Verify that there is no Fault OVLD or SC state If there is check the PVc terminal for the error condition The screen should look like this

5 Verify that the 3 Ph On indicator is present

6 Verify that the Start and Stop buttons are present

7 Make sure that the SMC-3 controller has the proper DIP switch setting for your application (for example ramp time current limit or soft start)

8 Touch the Start button

9 Verify the following

bull The isolation contactor pulls in

bull The motor starts according to the starting method selected for the SMC-3 controller

bull The Running indication appears when the motor is up to speed

10Touch the Stop button to stop the motor

11Unplug the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable from the PVc terminal going to the MicroLogix controller

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 29

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB ltFEFF005500740069006c0069007a006500200065007300740061007300200063006f006e00660069006700750072006100e700f5006500730020007000610072006100200063007200690061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200063006f006d00200075006d0061002000760069007300750061006c0069007a006100e700e3006f0020006500200069006d0070007200650073007300e3006f00200061006400650071007500610064006100730020007000610072006100200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f007300200063006f006d0065007200630069006100690073002e0020004f007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200070006f00640065006d0020007300650072002000610062006500720074006f007300200063006f006d0020006f0020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006500200070006f00730074006500720069006f0072002egt DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 27: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Timer On Delay The timer is started when the Start signal is sent to the starter or drive At the end of the timing a comparison is done to see if the motor has actually started The time duration for the Timer On Delay is fully adjustable in the ladder program in the Micrologix controller For this building block the timers are set to 35 seconds for the SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive and 5 seconds for the 103T and 190E starters Check rung 3 or 4 of the default program for the timer

The left column of the starter screen indicates the following

bull Fault indicates that the starter has detected a fault

Not all starters have this capability

The SMC-3 controller and the PF 4M drive can provide this information When the fault indication appears on the SMC-3 controller touching Fault takes you to the listed fault screen for the controller

The PF 4M drive VFD screen always has the Fault button displayed If a fault appears on the PF 4M drive the fault code is displayed on the drive You can press the Fault button on the PVc terminal to view the fault description You can scroll through the fault list just as with the SMC-3 controller

The fault indication on the 103T or 190E starter screen does not have this fault screen functionality since these starters do not provide additional information

bull OVLD indicates that there is an overload detected by the starter

bull SC indicates that there is a short circuit detected by the starter

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 27

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Understanding Faults

The Fault button is always present on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal This Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is merely a GoTo button and does not by itself indicate a fault condition with the PF 4M drive The SMC-3 controller however sends a signal back to the PVc terminal indicating a fault with the controller The Fault GOTO button is then displayed on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo screen on the PVc terminal Pressing the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo Fault screen or on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault screen takes you to the individual fault screens where you can scroll through to find the fault indicated on the PF 4M drive or the SMC-3 controller and its corresponding description

rsquoVFDrsquo Fault Screen (for PF 4M Drive)

lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault Screen

In both cases look at the fault code on the PF 4M drive or SMC-3 controller

bull For the PF 4M drive you must view the fault code on the drive Press the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal to view the fault listing Locate the specific fault for the drive To get a deeper description of the fault consult the user manual for the drive

bull The SMC-3 Controller will have a flashing LED and you need to count the number of flashes Then on the PVc terminal scroll through the fault listing screen and identify the fault using the number of flashes for identification

The button in the lower-right corner of the fault listings takes you back to the SMC-3 or VFD starter screen

28 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Test the SMC-3 Controller

Follow this procedure to test the SMC-3 controller

1 Make sure the motor is disconnected from the load for ease of testing in this procedure

2 Verify that the external HOA is in Auto mode

3 Verify that the 140M is in the ON position (I)

This enables the 3-phase power to the starter

4 Verify that there is no Fault OVLD or SC state If there is check the PVc terminal for the error condition The screen should look like this

5 Verify that the 3 Ph On indicator is present

6 Verify that the Start and Stop buttons are present

7 Make sure that the SMC-3 controller has the proper DIP switch setting for your application (for example ramp time current limit or soft start)

8 Touch the Start button

9 Verify the following

bull The isolation contactor pulls in

bull The motor starts according to the starting method selected for the SMC-3 controller

bull The Running indication appears when the motor is up to speed

10Touch the Stop button to stop the motor

11Unplug the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable from the PVc terminal going to the MicroLogix controller

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 29

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB ltFEFF005500740069006c0069007a006500200065007300740061007300200063006f006e00660069006700750072006100e700f5006500730020007000610072006100200063007200690061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200063006f006d00200075006d0061002000760069007300750061006c0069007a006100e700e3006f0020006500200069006d0070007200650073007300e3006f00200061006400650071007500610064006100730020007000610072006100200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f007300200063006f006d0065007200630069006100690073002e0020004f007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200070006f00640065006d0020007300650072002000610062006500720074006f007300200063006f006d0020006f0020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006500200070006f00730074006500720069006f0072002egt DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO ltFEFF004e00e4006900640065006e002000610073006500740075007300740065006e0020006100760075006c006c006100200076006f006900740020006c0075006f006400610020006a0061002000740075006c006f00730074006100610020005000440046002d0061007300690061006b00690072006a006f006a0061002c0020006a006f006900640065006e0020006500730069006b0061007400730065006c00750020006e00e400790074007400e400e40020006c0075006f00740065007400740061007600610073007400690020006c006f00700070007500740075006c006f006b00730065006e002e0020005000440046002d0061007300690061006b00690072006a0061007400200076006f0069006400610061006e0020006100760061007400610020004100630072006f006200610074002d0020006a0061002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020002d006f0068006a0065006c006d0061006c006c0061002000740061006900200075007500640065006d006d0061006c006c0061002000760065007200730069006f006c006c0061002egt ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE ltFEFF0041006e007600e4006e00640020006400650020006800e4007200200069006e0073007400e4006c006c006e0069006e006700610072006e00610020006e00e40072002000640075002000760069006c006c00200073006b0061007000610020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400200073006f006d00200070006100730073006100720020006600f600720020007000e5006c00690074006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f006300680020007500740073006b0072006900660074002000610076002000610066006600e4007200730064006f006b0075006d0065006e0074002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e0020006b0061006e002000f600700070006e006100730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f00630068002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006c006c00650072002000730065006e006100720065002egt ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 28: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

Understanding Faults

The Fault button is always present on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal This Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is merely a GoTo button and does not by itself indicate a fault condition with the PF 4M drive The SMC-3 controller however sends a signal back to the PVc terminal indicating a fault with the controller The Fault GOTO button is then displayed on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo screen on the PVc terminal Pressing the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo Fault screen or on the lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault screen takes you to the individual fault screens where you can scroll through to find the fault indicated on the PF 4M drive or the SMC-3 controller and its corresponding description

rsquoVFDrsquo Fault Screen (for PF 4M Drive)

lsquoSMC-3rsquo Fault Screen

In both cases look at the fault code on the PF 4M drive or SMC-3 controller

bull For the PF 4M drive you must view the fault code on the drive Press the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen on the PVc terminal to view the fault listing Locate the specific fault for the drive To get a deeper description of the fault consult the user manual for the drive

bull The SMC-3 Controller will have a flashing LED and you need to count the number of flashes Then on the PVc terminal scroll through the fault listing screen and identify the fault using the number of flashes for identification

The button in the lower-right corner of the fault listings takes you back to the SMC-3 or VFD starter screen

28 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Test the SMC-3 Controller

Follow this procedure to test the SMC-3 controller

1 Make sure the motor is disconnected from the load for ease of testing in this procedure

2 Verify that the external HOA is in Auto mode

3 Verify that the 140M is in the ON position (I)

This enables the 3-phase power to the starter

4 Verify that there is no Fault OVLD or SC state If there is check the PVc terminal for the error condition The screen should look like this

5 Verify that the 3 Ph On indicator is present

6 Verify that the Start and Stop buttons are present

7 Make sure that the SMC-3 controller has the proper DIP switch setting for your application (for example ramp time current limit or soft start)

8 Touch the Start button

9 Verify the following

bull The isolation contactor pulls in

bull The motor starts according to the starting method selected for the SMC-3 controller

bull The Running indication appears when the motor is up to speed

10Touch the Stop button to stop the motor

11Unplug the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable from the PVc terminal going to the MicroLogix controller

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 29

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR ltFEFF004200720075006b00200064006900730073006500200069006e006e007300740069006c006c0069006e00670065006e0065002000740069006c002000e50020006f00700070007200650074007400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065007200200073006f006d002000700061007300730065007200200066006f00720020007000e5006c006900740065006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f00670020007500740073006b007200690066007400200061007600200066006f0072007200650074006e0069006e006700730064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e00650020006b0061006e002000e50070006e006500730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0067002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f0067002000730065006e006500720065002egt SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 29: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

System Validation and Application Tips Chapter 2

Test the SMC-3 Controller

Follow this procedure to test the SMC-3 controller

1 Make sure the motor is disconnected from the load for ease of testing in this procedure

2 Verify that the external HOA is in Auto mode

3 Verify that the 140M is in the ON position (I)

This enables the 3-phase power to the starter

4 Verify that there is no Fault OVLD or SC state If there is check the PVc terminal for the error condition The screen should look like this

5 Verify that the 3 Ph On indicator is present

6 Verify that the Start and Stop buttons are present

7 Make sure that the SMC-3 controller has the proper DIP switch setting for your application (for example ramp time current limit or soft start)

8 Touch the Start button

9 Verify the following

bull The isolation contactor pulls in

bull The motor starts according to the starting method selected for the SMC-3 controller

bull The Running indication appears when the motor is up to speed

10Touch the Stop button to stop the motor

11Unplug the 1761-CBL-PM02 serial cable from the PVc terminal going to the MicroLogix controller

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009 29

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 30: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

Chapter 2 System Validation and Application Tips

12Verify these error messages appear on the PVc terminal There will be multiple errors referring to

bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1

bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1

13Press OK on all the pop-up screens

14Reinstall the serial cable

15Verify that all screens appear normal

If there is an error on the displays check the connection from the PVc terminal to the MicroLogix controller

Testing Other Drives and Starters

You can use the Test the SMC-3 Controller procedure for the PF 4M drive and the 190E and 103T starters since the screens on the PVc terminal are similar to the SMC-3 controller with the exception of the Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen The Fault button on the lsquoVFDrsquo screen is always present The reason is that the PF 4M drive has only one form C-type relay out Therefore the information that can be signaled from the relay is selectable by setting parameter t221 This building block uses the lsquoMotorRunningrsquo setting of parameter t221 [Relay Out Select] to indicate the motor is receiving power from the drive

Additional Resources

Refer to page 9 for a listing of product and information resources

30 Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP ltFEFF0055007300650020006500730074006100730020006f007000630069006f006e006500730020007000610072006100200063007200650061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200071007500650020007000650072006d006900740061006e002000760069007300750061006c0069007a006100720020006500200069006d007000720069006d0069007200200063006f007200720065006300740061006d0065006e0074006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f007300200065006d00700072006500730061007200690061006c00650073002e0020004c006f007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f00730020005000440046002000730065002000700075006500640065006e00200061006200720069007200200063006f006e0020004100630072006f00620061007400200079002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200079002000760065007200730069006f006e0065007300200070006f00730074006500720069006f007200650073002egt SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 31: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

Publication CC-QS006A-EN-P - January 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning it may need to be returned

United States 14406463434Monday ndash Friday 8 am ndash 5 pm EST

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues

United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure

  • CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start
  • Where to Start
  • Table of Contents
  • Preface
    • Introduction
    • Conventions Used in This Manual
    • Additional Resources
      • 1 - Simple Motor Control Integration
        • Introduction
        • Before You Begin
        • What You Need
        • Follow These Steps
        • Set up the PowerFlex 4M Drive
        • Set up the SMC-3 Controller
          • 2 - System Validation and Application Tips
            • Introduction
            • Before You Begin
            • What You Need
            • Follow These Steps
            • Connect PVc Terminal to Personal Computer
            • Configure PVc Terminal to MicroLogix Controller Communication
              • Navigating the Starters Overview Page
                • Test the Simple Starting Application Functionality
                  • Navigating the Simple Starting Screen
                  • Understanding Faults
                  • Test the SMC-3 Controller
                  • Testing Other Drives and Starters
                      • Back Cover
                        • ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice

                          Intro

                          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

                          Generic pub print specs

                          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
                          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

                          IN RN pub type specs

                          UM RM PM pub type specs

                          AP PP pub type specs

                          BR pub type specs

                          Field definitions

                          ampL04032006ampRampP
                          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
                          EA = Each
                          PK = Pack
                          PD = Pad
                          RL = Roll
                          BK = Book
                          CT = Carton
                          BX = Box
                          ST = Set
                          Multiple Order Qty
                          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
                          Business Group
                          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
                          CorporateBusiness Development
                          Finance
                          Human Resources
                          IT
                          Logistics
                          Manufacturing
                          Marketing Commercial
                          Marketing Europe
                          Marketing Other
                          Operations
                          Order Services
                          Other
                          Process Improvement
                          Procurement
                          Quality
                          Sales
                          Max Order Quantity
                          Presale items = 100
                          Postsale items = 5
                          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
                          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
                          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
                          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
                          BindingStitching
                          For a Form (F) use
                          CARBONLESS
                          CUTSHEET
                          ENVELOPE
                          For a Book (B) use
                          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
                          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
                          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
                          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
                          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
                          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
                          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
                          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
                          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
                          Sides Printed
                          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
                          Simplex = Single-sided printing
                          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
                          Number of Forms to a Sheet
                          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
                          Number of Sheets Required to Print
                          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
                          Paper Stock Type
                          Description
                          PLAIN Bond
                          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
                          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
                          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
                          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
                          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
                          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
                          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
                          CARD Card Stock
                          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
                          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
                          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
                          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
                          CUSTOM Custom
                          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
                          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
                          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
                          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
                          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
                          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
                          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
                          INDEX Index
                          LABEL80 80 Up Label
                          MICROPRT Micro Print
                          OFFSET Offset
                          PART2 2 Part
                          PART3 3 Part
                          PART4 4 Part
                          PART5 5 Part
                          PART6 6 Part
                          PERF 12 inch Perfed
                          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
                          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
                          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
                          RECYL Recycled
                          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
                          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
                          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
                          TAG Tag
                          TEXT Text
                          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
                          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
                          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
                          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
                          VELLUM Vellum
                          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
                          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
                          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
                          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
                          Paper Stock Color
                          Black
                          Blue
                          Buff
                          Canary
                          Cherry
                          Clear
                          Cream
                          Custom
                          Goldrenrod
                          Gray
                          Green
                          Ivory
                          Lavender
                          Manilla
                          NCRPinkCanary
                          NCRWhiteBlue
                          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanary
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
                          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
                          NCRWhiteGreen
                          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
                          NCRWhitePink
                          NCRWhiteWhite
                          Opaque
                          Orange
                          Orchid
                          Peach
                          Pink
                          Purple
                          Salmon
                          Tan
                          Violet
                          White
                          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
                          11 x 17
                          18 x 24 Poster
                          24 x 36 Poster
                          3 x 5
                          36 x 24 Poster
                          4 x 6
                          475 x 7
                          475 x 775
                          55 x 85
                          6 x 4
                          7 x 9
                          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
                          85 x 11
                          825 x 10875
                          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
                          8375 x 10875
                          9 x 12
                          A4
                          A5
                          Other - Custom size listed below
                          Drilling Locations
                          1CENTER
                          1LEFTTOP
                          1TOPCENTER
                          2LEFT
                          2LEFT2TOP
                          2TOP
                          2TOP2LEFT
                          2TOP3LEFT
                          2TOP5LEFT
                          2TOP5RIGHT
                          3BOTTOM
                          3LEFT
                          3LEFT2TOP
                          3LEFT3TOP
                          3RIGHT
                          3TOP
                          3TOP5LEFT
                          5BOTTOOM
                          5CENTER
                          5LEFT
                          5RIGHT
                          5RIGHT2TOP
                          5TOP
                          Fold Type
                          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
                          HALF Half
                          C C Fold
                          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
                          OFFSETZ Offset Z
                          SAMPLE See Sample
                          SHORT Short Fold
                          V V Fold
                          Z Z Fold
                          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
                          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
                          77 or more pages NA
                          33 to 76 pages 25
                          3 to 32 pages 50
                          1 or 2 pages 100
                          Comments
                          CoverText Stock Spine
                          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
                          100 Gloss Text
                          100 Text
                          10pt C1S Cover
                          10pt C2S Cover
                          10pt C2S Text
                          10pt Text Stock
                          110 White Index
                          12pt C1S Cover
                          20 White Opaque Bond
                          50 Colored Offset
                          50 White Offset
                          50 White Opaque
                          60 Cover Stock
                          60 White Offset
                          80 Gloss Cover
                          80 Gloss Text
                          8pt C1S White
                          90 White Index
                          CoverText Ink
                          Black
                          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color
                          4 color over black
                          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
                          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
                          4 color + aqueous
                          4 color + varnish
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
                          Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
                          Corp 17501
                          Bill To 69
                          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
                          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
                          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
                          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
                          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
                          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
                          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
                          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
                          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
                          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
                          Attach Print Specs to PDF
                          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
                          RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 32: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

Intro

ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

Generic pub print specs

ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

IN RN pub type specs

UM RM PM pub type specs

AP PP pub type specs

BR pub type specs

Field definitions

ampL04032006ampRampP
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
EA = Each
PK = Pack
PD = Pad
RL = Roll
BK = Book
CT = Carton
BX = Box
ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN Bond
ACNTCVR Accent Cover
BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
CARD Card Stock
CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM Custom
CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT Hots Text
INDEX Index
LABEL80 80 Up Label
MICROPRT Micro Print
OFFSET Offset
PART2 2 Part
PART3 3 Part
PART4 4 Part
PART5 5 Part
PART6 6 Part
PERF 12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF Pre-Perforated
RECYL Recycled
SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
TAG Tag
TEXT Text
TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
VELLUM Vellum
VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
HALF Half
C C Fold
DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
OFFSETZ Offset Z
SAMPLE See Sample
SHORT Short Fold
V V Fold
Z Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages NA
33 to 76 pages 25
3 to 32 pages 50
1 or 2 pages 100
Comments
CoverText Stock Spine
100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
Corp 17501
Bill To 69
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308
Page 33: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

Generic pub print specs

ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCREF046ampRampD ampT

IN RN pub type specs

UM RM PM pub type specs

AP PP pub type specs

BR pub type specs

Field definitions

ampL04032006ampRampP
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
EA = Each
PK = Pack
PD = Pad
RL = Roll
BK = Book
CT = Carton
BX = Box
ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN Bond
ACNTCVR Accent Cover
BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
CARD Card Stock
CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM Custom
CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT Hots Text
INDEX Index
LABEL80 80 Up Label
MICROPRT Micro Print
OFFSET Offset
PART2 2 Part
PART3 3 Part
PART4 4 Part
PART5 5 Part
PART6 6 Part
PERF 12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF Pre-Perforated
RECYL Recycled
SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
TAG Tag
TEXT Text
TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
VELLUM Vellum
VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
HALF Half
C C Fold
DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
OFFSETZ Offset Z
SAMPLE See Sample
SHORT Short Fold
V V Fold
Z Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages NA
33 to 76 pages 25
3 to 32 pages 50
1 or 2 pages 100
Comments
CoverText Stock Spine
100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
Corp 17501
Bill To 69
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
Page 34: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

IN RN pub type specs

UM RM PM pub type specs

AP PP pub type specs

BR pub type specs

Field definitions

ampL04032006ampRampP
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
EA = Each
PK = Pack
PD = Pad
RL = Roll
BK = Book
CT = Carton
BX = Box
ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN Bond
ACNTCVR Accent Cover
BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
CARD Card Stock
CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM Custom
CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT Hots Text
INDEX Index
LABEL80 80 Up Label
MICROPRT Micro Print
OFFSET Offset
PART2 2 Part
PART3 3 Part
PART4 4 Part
PART5 5 Part
PART6 6 Part
PERF 12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF Pre-Perforated
RECYL Recycled
SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
TAG Tag
TEXT Text
TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
VELLUM Vellum
VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
HALF Half
C C Fold
DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
OFFSETZ Offset Z
SAMPLE See Sample
SHORT Short Fold
V V Fold
Z Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages NA
33 to 76 pages 25
3 to 32 pages 50
1 or 2 pages 100
Comments
CoverText Stock Spine
100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 50 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
Page 35: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

UM RM PM pub type specs

AP PP pub type specs

BR pub type specs

Field definitions

ampL04032006ampRampP
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
EA = Each
PK = Pack
PD = Pad
RL = Roll
BK = Book
CT = Carton
BX = Box
ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN Bond
ACNTCVR Accent Cover
BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
CARD Card Stock
CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM Custom
CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT Hots Text
INDEX Index
LABEL80 80 Up Label
MICROPRT Micro Print
OFFSET Offset
PART2 2 Part
PART3 3 Part
PART4 4 Part
PART5 5 Part
PART6 6 Part
PERF 12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF Pre-Perforated
RECYL Recycled
SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
TAG Tag
TEXT Text
TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
VELLUM Vellum
VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
HALF Half
C C Fold
DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
OFFSETZ Offset Z
SAMPLE See Sample
SHORT Short Fold
V V Fold
Z Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages NA
33 to 76 pages 25
3 to 32 pages 50
1 or 2 pages 100
Comments
CoverText Stock Spine
100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
CC-QS006A-EN-P Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19041 01012009 100 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 32 8 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA 25 RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak
Page 36: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

AP PP pub type specs

BR pub type specs

Field definitions

ampL04032006ampRampP
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
EA = Each
PK = Pack
PD = Pad
RL = Roll
BK = Book
CT = Carton
BX = Box
ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN Bond
ACNTCVR Accent Cover
BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
CARD Card Stock
CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM Custom
CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT Hots Text
INDEX Index
LABEL80 80 Up Label
MICROPRT Micro Print
OFFSET Offset
PART2 2 Part
PART3 3 Part
PART4 4 Part
PART5 5 Part
PART6 6 Part
PERF 12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF Pre-Perforated
RECYL Recycled
SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
TAG Tag
TEXT Text
TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
VELLUM Vellum
VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
HALF Half
C C Fold
DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
OFFSETZ Offset Z
SAMPLE See Sample
SHORT Short Fold
V V Fold
Z Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages NA
33 to 76 pages 25
3 to 32 pages 50
1 or 2 pages 100
Comments
CoverText Stock Spine
100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
Page 37: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

BR pub type specs

Field definitions

ampL04032006ampRampP
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
EA = Each
PK = Pack
PD = Pad
RL = Roll
BK = Book
CT = Carton
BX = Box
ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN Bond
ACNTCVR Accent Cover
BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
CARD Card Stock
CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM Custom
CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT Hots Text
INDEX Index
LABEL80 80 Up Label
MICROPRT Micro Print
OFFSET Offset
PART2 2 Part
PART3 3 Part
PART4 4 Part
PART5 5 Part
PART6 6 Part
PERF 12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF Pre-Perforated
RECYL Recycled
SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
TAG Tag
TEXT Text
TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
VELLUM Vellum
VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
HALF Half
C C Fold
DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
OFFSETZ Offset Z
SAMPLE See Sample
SHORT Short Fold
V V Fold
Z Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages NA
33 to 76 pages 25
3 to 32 pages 50
1 or 2 pages 100
Comments
CoverText Stock Spine
100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 825 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
Page 38: Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block ... · Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block. ... Position Control Connected Components Building Block

Field definitions

ampL04032006ampRampP
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
EA = Each
PK = Pack
PD = Pad
RL = Roll
BK = Book
CT = Carton
BX = Box
ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil
SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound
THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN Bond
ACNTCVR Accent Cover
BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
CARD Card Stock
CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM Custom
CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT Hots Text
INDEX Index
LABEL80 80 Up Label
MICROPRT Micro Print
OFFSET Offset
PART2 2 Part
PART3 3 Part
PART4 4 Part
PART5 5 Part
PART6 6 Part
PERF 12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF Pre-Perforated
RECYL Recycled
SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
TAG Tag
TEXT Text
TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
VELLUM Vellum
VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
Fold Type
For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
HALF Half
C C Fold
DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
OFFSETZ Offset Z
SAMPLE See Sample
SHORT Short Fold
V V Fold
Z Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages NA
33 to 76 pages 25
3 to 32 pages 50
1 or 2 pages 100
Comments
CoverText Stock Spine
100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish